Pushbutton Switches OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company Sensing Devices Division H.Q. Industrial Sensors Division Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku, Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan Tel: (81)75-344-7022/Fax: (81)75-344-7107 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. Authorized Distributor: Cat. No. X032-E1-08 Printed in Japan 0206-1M (H) OMRON SALES OFFICES ASIA/OCEANIA JAPAN OMRON CORPORATION (Industrial) Gate City Ohsaki, West Tower 14F, 1-11-1 Ohsaki, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo, 141-0032 JAPAN Tel: 81-3-3779-9001/Fax: 81-3-3779-9019 @ OMRON CORPORATION (Consumer & Commercial) Gate City Ohsaki, West Tower 14F, 1-11-1 Ohsaki, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo, 141-0032 JAPAN Tel: 81-3-3779-8709/Fax: 81-3-3779-9047 CHINA OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD. BEIJING OFFICE 32F, Tower B, Jianwai SOHO #39, East 3rd. Ring Road, Chaoyang District, Beijing, 100022 CHINA Tel: 86-10-5869-3030/Fax: 86-10-5869-3815 @ OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS (HONG KONG) LTD. BEIJING OFFICE 32/F, Tower A, Jianwai SOHO, #39, East 3rd. Ring Road, Chaoyang District, Beijing, 100022 CHINA Tel: 86-10-5869-3131/Fax: 86-10-5869-0228 OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS (HONG KONG) LTD. SHANGHAI OFFICE Room 2211, Bank of China Tower, 200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road, PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120 CHINA Tel: 86-21-5037-2222/Fax: 86-21-5037-2200 @ OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD. SHANGHAI OFFICE Room 2503, Raffles City Shanghai (Office Tower), No. 268 Xi Zang Middle Road, Huang Pu District, Shanghai, 200001 CHINA Tel: 86-21-6340-3737/Fax: 86-21-6340-3757 OMRON ELECTRONICS GUANGZHOU LTD. Room 2103, Guangzhou China Mayors Plaza, No. 189, Tian He Bei Road, Guangzhou CHINA Tel: 86-20-8732-0508/Fax: 86-20-8732-1750 @ OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS (HONG KONG) LTD. SHENZHEN OFFICE Room 106, SEG Plaza, Huaqiang North Road, Futian District, Shenzhen, 518031 CHINA Tel: 86-755-8346-2220/Fax: 86-755-8346-2230 HONG KONG OMRON ELECTRONICS ASIA LTD. Unit 601-9, Tower 2, The Gateway No. 25, Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon HONG KONG Tel: 852-2375-387/Fax: 852-2375-1475 @ OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS (HONG KONG) LTD. Unit 601-9, Tower 2, The Gateway No. 25, Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, HONG KONG Tel: 852-2375-3827/Fax: 852-2375-1475 INDIA OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. INDIA LIAISON OFFICE M-45, Market Complex, Greater Kailash Part II, New Delhi-110048 INDIA Tel: 91-11-5163-8215/Fax: 91-11-5163-8218 @ OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PTE LTD, INDIA LIAISON OFFICE 2nd Floor, Pathi Towers, No. 80-55 East End B' Main Road, Jayanagar IX Block, (Nr. Jayadeva Cardiac Institute), Bangalore 560 069, INDIA Tel: 91-80-5696-9638/Fax: 91-80-2663-1685 INDONESIA PT. OMRON ELECTRONICS Graha Pratama Floor 3A, JL MT Haryono Kav. 15, Jakarta Selatan INDONESIA 12810 Tel: 62-21-8370-9555/Fax: 62-21-8370-9550 @ PT. OMRON MANUFACTURING OF INDONESIA EJIP Industrial Park Plot 5C, Lemahabang Bekasi 17550, Jakarta INDONESIA Tel: 62-21-897-5108/Fax: 62-21-897-5160 SOUTH KOREA OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS CO.,LTD. 307, Teheran Office Bldg. #707-38, Yeoksam-dong, Gangnam-gu, Seoul KOREA Tel: 82-2-567-5020/Fax: 82-2-567-5804 MALAYSIA OMRON ELECTRONICS SDN. BHD. Unit No. 1101, Level 11, Uptown 1, No. 1, Jalan SS 21/58, Damansara Uptown, 47400 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan MALAYSIA Tel: 60-3-7688-2888/Fax: 60-3-7688-2833 OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PTE. LTD. 3A, Lot 4 Bangunan TH Uptown 3, Damansara Uptown, No.3, Jalan SS21/39, 47400 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, MALAYSIA Tel: 60-3-7623-6300/Fax: 60-3-7665-0078 THE PHILIPPINES OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. MANILA REPRESENTATIVE OFFICE 2nd Floor, King's Court II Bldg, 2129 Don Chino Roces Avenue, 1231 Makati City, Metro, Manila THE PHILIPPINES Tel: 632-811-2831/Fax: 632-811-2583 @ OMRON MALAYSIA SDN BHD, PHILIPPINES REPRESENTATIVE OFFICE U-1103, 11th Floow, ALPAP 2 Building, Investment Cor. Trade Drive, Madrigal Business Park, Alabang Muntinlupa City, THE PHILIPPINES Tel: 632-7723-667/Fax: 632-7723-665 SINGAPORE OMRON ELECTRONICS PTE. LTD. 55, Ubi Avenue 1, #05-01 SINGAPORE 408935 Tel: 65-6547-6789/Fax: 65-6547-6766 @ OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS PTE. LTD. 140 Paya Lebar Road #04-11 A-Z Building SINGAPORE 409015 Tel: 65-6848-8800/Fax: 65-6848-8811 TAIWAN OMRON TAIWAN ELECTRONICS INC. 6F, Home Young Bldg., No. 363, Fu-Shing N. Road, Taipei TAIWAN ROC Tel: 886-2-2715-3331/Fax: 886-2-2712-6712 OMRON TAIWAN SYSTEM INC. 11F, No. 8, Chung Hsiao West Road, Sec 1, Taipei TAIWAN Tel: 886-2-2375-2200/Fax: 886-2-2375-2233 OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS (HONG KONG) LTD. TAIWAN BRANCH (*) 5F-3, No. 146, Song Jiang Road, Taipei, 10458, TAIWAN ROC Tel: 886-2-2521-2350/Fax: 886-2-2521-0686 THAILAND OMRON ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. Rasa Tower 20th Floor, #555 Phaholyothin Rd., Chatuchak, Bangkok 10900 THAILAND Tel: 66-2-937-0500/Fax: 66-2-937-0501 @ OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS CO., LTD. Phaholythin Place Building, 41st Floor, 408/166, Phaholythin Road, Samsen-nai, Phayathai, Bangkok 10400 THAILAND Tel: 66-2-619-0292/Fax: 66-2-619-0624-5 VIETNAM OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. HANOI/HCM REPRESENTATIVE OFFICE 2, Lang Ha, 6th Floor Vinaconex Building, Hanoi VIETNAM Tel: 844-831-3121/Fax: 844-831-3122 AUSTRALIA OMRON ELECTRONICS PTY. LTD. 71 Epping Road, North Ryde, Sydney NSW 2113 AUSTRALIA Tel: 61-2-9878-6377/Fax: 61-2-9878-6981 NEW ZEALAND OMRON ELECTRONICS LTD. 65 Boston Road, Mt Eden Auckland NEW ZEALAND Tel: 64-9-358-4400/Fax:64-9-358-4411 NORTH/SOUTH AMERICA UNITED STATES OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC One Commerce Drive Schaumburg, IL 60173-5302 U.S.A. Tel: 1-847-843-7900/Fax: 1-847-843-7787 @ OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS LLC 55 East Commerce Drive, Suit B, IL 60173 U.S.A. Tel: 1-847-882-2288/Fax: 1-847-882-2192 CANADA OMRON CANADA INC. 885 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1B 5V8 CANADA Tel: 1-416-286-6465/Fax: 1-416-286-6648 BRAZIL OMRON ELECTRONICA DO BRASIL LTDA. Av. Santa Catarina, 935 04378-300 Sao Paulo-SP-BRAZIL Tel: 55-11-5564-6488/Fax: 55-11-5564-7751 EUROPE AUSTRIA OMRON Electronics G.m.b.H Brunner Strasse 81, Box 323, A-1230 Vienna AUSTRIA Tel: 43-1-801-90-0/Fax: 43-1-804-48-46 BELGIUM OMRON ELECTRONICS NV/SA Stationsstraat 24 B-1702 Groot-Bijgaarden BELGIUM Tel: 32-2-4662-480/Fax: 32-2-4660-687 CZECH REPUBLIC OMRON ELECTRONICS Spol.s.r.o. Jankovcova 53, 170 00 CZECH REPUBLIC Tel: 420-234-602-602/Fax: 420-234-602-607 DENMARK OMRON ELECTRONICS A/S Lykkebaekvej 2, DK-4600 Koege DENMARK Tel: 45-43-44-0011/45-43-44-0211 FINLAND OMRON ELECTRONICS OY Metsanpojankuja 5, FIN-02130 Espoo FINLAND Tel: 358-207-464-200/Fax: 358-207-464-210 FRANCE OMRON ELECTRONICS S.a.r.l. 14, Rue de Lisbonne 93561 Rosny Sous Bois FRANCE Tel: 33-1-4974-7000/Fax: 33-1-4876-0930 @ OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS EUROPE B.V. 14, Rue de Lisbonne 93561 Rosny Sous Bois FRANCE Tel: 33-1-4974-7050/Fax: 33-1-4876-2795 As of October 2005 (IAB/ECB) GERMANY OMRON ELECTRONICS G.m.b.H. Elisabeth-Selbert-Strasse 17, 40764 Langenfeld GERMANY Tel: 49-2173-6800-0/Fax: 49-2173-6800-400 @ OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS EUROPE B.V. Gruber Strasse 60d, 85586 Poing GERMANY Tel: 49-8121-77240/Fax: 49-8121-772440 HUNGARY OMRON ELECTRONICS Kft. H-1046 Budapest Kiss Erno u. 1-3 HUNGARY Tel: 36-1-399-3050/Fax: 36-1-399-3060 ITALY OMRON ELECTRONICS S.p.A. Viale Certosa, 49 20149 Milano ITALY Tel: 39-02-32681/Fax: 39-02-325154 @ OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS EUROPE B.V. Viale Certosa, 49 20149 Milano ITALY Tel: 39-02-3268-850/Fax: 39-02-3268-851 THE NETHERLANDS OMRON ELECTRONICS B.V. Wegalaan 61, 2132 JD Hoofddorp, Postbus 582 2130 AN Hoofddorp THE NETHERLANDS Tel: 31-23-568-1100/Fax: 31-23-568-1188 @ OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS EUROPE B.V. Wegalaan 57, 2132 JD Hoofddorp THE NETHERLANDS Tel: 31-23-568-1200/Fax: 31-23-568-1212 NORWAY OMRON ELECTRONICS NORWAY AS Ole Deviksvei 4, P. O. Box 109, Bryn, N-0611 Oslo NORWAY Tel: 47-2265-7500/Fax: 47-2265-8300 POLAND OMRON ELECTRONICS SP.Z.O.O ul. Jana Sengera "Cichego" 1, 02-790 Warsaw POLAND Tel: 48-22- 645-7860/Fax: 48-22-645-7863 PORTUGAL OMRON ELECTRONICS LDA. Rua de S. Tome, Lote 131 2689-510 Prior-Velho PORTUGAL Tel: 351-21-942-9400/Fax: 351-21-941-7899 SPAIN OMRON ELECTRONICS S.A. c/Arturo Soria 95, E-28027 Madrid SPAIN Tel: 34-91-377-7900/Fax: 34-91-377-7956 @ OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS EUROPE B.V. c/Arturo Soria 95, E-28027 Madrid SPAIN Tel: 34-91-377-7900/Fax: 34-91-377-7987 SWEDEN OMRON ELECTRONICS AB Norgegatan 1, P. O. Box 1275, SE-164 29 Kista SWEDEN Tel: 46-8-632-3500/Fax: 46-8-632-3510 @ OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS EUROPE B.V. Norgegatan 1, S-164 32 Kista SWEDEN Tel: 46-8-632-3500/Fax: 46-8-632-3535 SWITZERLAND OMRON ELECTRONICS AG Sennweidstrasse 44 CH-6312 Steinhausen SWITZERLAND Tel: 41-41-748-1313/Fax: 41-41-748-1345 TURKEY OMRON ELECTRONICS LTD. Altunizade, Kisikli Cad. No: 2 A-Blok K. 2 TR-34662 Uskudar - Istanbul TURKEY Tel: 90-216-474-00-40/Fax: 90-216-474-00-47 UNITED KINGDOM OMRON ELECTRONICS LTD. Opal Drive, Fox Milne, Milton Keynes MK15 0DG UNITED KINGDOM Tel: 44-1908-258-258/Fax: 44-1908-258-158 @ OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS EUROPE B.V. 1 Bishop Square, Hatfield Business Park, Hatfield, Hertfordshire AL10 9NE United Kingdom Tel: 44-870-750-5661/Fax: 44-870-750-5662 NOTE: 1. Each of OMRON Sales offices has its branch offices. 2. Some of abovementioned offices do not deal all of OMRON products. 3. Contron Corporation is an independent distributor in Korea. 4. Information subject to change without notice. @ This company mainly deals electronic components. For the most up-to-date office information please visit www.omron.com Warranty and Application Considerations Read and Understand this Catalog Please read and understand this catalog before purchasing the product. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments. Warranty and Limitations of Liability Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS, OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT LIABILITY. In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted. IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR. Application Considerations Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products. At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products. * Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this catalog. * Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations. * Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products. NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM. 1 Disclaimers Disclaimers PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this catalog is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability. CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products. DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown. ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this catalog has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions. Copyright and Copy Permission Copyright and Copy Permission COPYRIGHT AND COPY PERMISSION This catalog shall not be copied for sales or promotions without permission. This catalog is protected by copyright and is intended solely for use in conjunction with the products. Please notify us before copying or reproducing this catalog in any manner, for any other purpose. If copying or transmitting this catalog to another, please copy or transmit it in its entirety. 2 Safety Precautions Meaning of Signal Words The following signal word is used in this catalog. @ WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in minor or moderate injury, or may result in serious injury or death. Additionally there may be significant property damage. Meaning of Alert Symbols The following alert symbol is used in this catalog. Indicates the possibility of electric shock under specific conditions. Alert Statement in this Catalog The following alert statement applies to the products in this catalog. This alert statement also appears at the locations needed in this catalog to attract your attention. Please read the Technical Information section (page 8) and Safety Precautions for each model for other operation precautions. @ WARNING Electric shock may possibly occur. Do not perform wiring work or touch the charged parts of terminals while power is supplied to the Switch. 3 CONTENTS Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switches and Indicators with Round Bodies 5 8 A3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 M2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 A3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 M2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 A16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 A165S/W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 A165K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 A165E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 M16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 M2BJ-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 A22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 A22S/W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 A22K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 A22E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 M22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Switches and Indicators with Square Bodies A3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 A3P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 M2P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 4 Selection Guide Classification Model Pushbutton switch A3A A3C A3D Panel cutout dimensions 11.5 11.5, 11.5 dia. 12 dia. 8 dia. Pushbutton color LED-lighted: red, yellow, green LED-lighted: red, yellow, green, white LED-lighted: red, yellow, green, white Non-lighted: red, yellow, green, blue, gray, black, light gray, dark gray Incandescent lamp-lighted: red, yellow, green, blue, white Appearance Pushbutton shape Non-lighted: red, yellow, green, blue, white, black Indicator type (see note) NO YES YES Switch color Black Black Black Form SPST-NO, SPDT SPST-NO+ SPST-NC SPST-NO Rated load (resistive) 6 A, 125 VAC; 4 A, 30 VDC 0.5 A, 250 VAC; 1 A, 30 VDC 0.1 A, 30 VDC Mechanical life expectancy Momentary operation: 1,000 x 103 operations min. Alternate operation: 50 x 103 operations min. (high capacitive load), 100 x 103 operations min. (general-purpose, micro loads) Momentary operation: 1,000 x 103 operations min. Momentary operation: 1,000 x 103 operations min. Alternate operation: 100 x 103 operations min. Alternate operation: 100 x 103 operations min. Electrical life expectancy 50 x 103 operations min. (high capacitive load) 100 x 103 operations min. (general-purpose load) 1,000 x 103 operations min. (micro load) 100 x 103 operations min. 100 x 103 operations min. Mounting style Snap-in panel mounting PC board mounted, thru-panel Nut mounting Nut mounting Remarks Possible to switch wide range of loads Accessories: socket, insulation cover Series product: micro load type LED & lamp for A16 can be used. Accessories: socket, insulation cover Approved standards RC RC --- Page 210 34 20 Note: Indication function only 5 Selection Guide Classification Model Pushbutton switch, knob-type selector switch, key-type selector switch Pushbutton switch A16 A22 A3PA A3PJ Panel cutout dimensions 16 dia. 22 dia. 23.5 22.5 23.5 30.5 Pushbutton color LED-lighted: red, yellow, pure yellow, green, white, blue LED-lighted: red, yellow, green, white, blue Lighted with built-in LED: red, white, green, orange Appearance Pushbutton shape Incandescent lamp-lighted: red, yellow, green, pure yellow, white, blue Incandescent lamp-lighted: red, yellow, green, white, blue Incandescent lamp-lighted: red, green, white, blue, orange LED-lighted: red, yellow, green, white (split types and 2-color types also available) Non-lighted: red, yellow, green, white, blue, black Non-lighted: red, yellow, pure yellow, green, white, blue, black Indicator type (see note) YES YES YES Switch color Black Black, brown Light gray, black Form SPDT, DPDT SPST-NO, SPST-NC, SPST-NO+SPST-NC, DPST-NO, DPST-NC SPDT, DPDT Rated load (resistive) 5 A, 125 VAC; 3 A, 250 VAC; 3 A, 30 VDC 10 A, 110 VAC; 6 A, 220 VAC 3 A, 250 VAC; 3 A, 30 VDC Mechanical life expectancy Pushbutton Switch Momentary operation: 2,000 x 103 operations min. Pushbutton Switch 5,000 x 103 operations min. Momentary operation: 1,000 x 103 operations min. Knob-type Selector Switch 250 x 103 operations min. Key-type Selector Switch 250 x 103 operations min. Electrical life expectancy Knob-type Selector Switch Non-lighted: 500 x 103 operations min. Lighted: 100 x 103 operations min. Key-type Selector Switch 500 x 103 operations min. Pushbutton Switch 100 x 103 operations min. Pushbutton Switch 500 x 103 operations min. Knob-type Selector Switch 100 x 103 operations min. Knob-type Selector Switch Non-lighted: 500 x 103 operations min. Lighted: 100 x 103 operations min. Key-type Selector Switch 100 x 103 operations min. Alternate operation: 200 x 103 operations min. 100 x 103 operations min. Key-type Selector Switch 500 x 103 operations min. Mounting style Nut mounting Remarks Accessories: extractor, Accessories: contact legend plate, screw fitting, block, lamp socket, panel plug, lock ring mounting latch, legend plate, metallic bezel ring, sealing cap, control box, snap-in legend plate Page 6 R cR R cR Approved standards Note: Nut mounting 55 Indication function only 136 Snap-in panel mounting Accessories: socket, mounting plate, barrier, switch guard, protective cover Series product: Microload version RC 220 220 Selection Guide Classification Model Pushbutton switch A3PT Buzzer M2BJ-B 58.4 Appearance 44.5 Pushbutton shape Panel cutout dimensions 29 dia. 16 dia. Pushbutton color LED-lighted: white, red, yellow, green Incandescent lamp-lighted: red, green, white, blue, orange Non-lighted Indicator type (see note) YES NO Switch color Light grey Black Form SPDT, DPDT --- Rated load (resistive) 3 A, 250 VAC; 5 A, 125 VAC; 5 A, 8 VDC; 5 A, 14 VDC; 4A, 30 VDC; 0.4 A, 125 VDC; 0.2 A, 250 VDC Mechanical life expectancy Momentary operation: 1,000,000 operations min. Alternate operation: 200,000 operations min. --- Electrical life expectancy 100,000 operations min. --- Mounting style Spring mounting Nut mounting Snap-in panel mounting Remarks Same as the A3PA and A3PJ Buzzer only Accessories: snap-in mounting leaf spring, panel plug Approved standards RC --- Page 220 131 Note: Indication function only 7 Technical Information Technical Information Technical Information Terms for Configuration and Structure A Pushbutton Switch is a switch designed so that its contacts are opened and closed by depressing and releasing a pushbutton on the Switch in the direction of its axis. Pushbutton Switches come in two categories: lighted and non-lighted. The structure of a typical Lighted Pushbutton Switch is shown below. Broadly speaking, Lighted Pushbutton Switches are made up of the 5 sections shown below. Non-lighted Pushbutton Switches are made up of 4 sections, the 5 sections shown below less the light source. Structure of Typical Lighted Pushbutton Switch Pushbutton surface (illuminated surface) Pushbutton Transmits external force/movement to the Switch. Mounting Section Used to secure the body of the Switch to the mounting panel. Light Source Controls the light indication. Case Protects internal mechanisms. Mounting panel Switch Opens and closes electric circuit. Pushbutton Movable spring Movable piece Case Movable contacts Terminal Terms for Operating Action Operation Explanation Momentary operation The pushbutton returns to its original position after it is released. Alternate operation The first time the pushbutton is pressed, an internal lock mechanism holds it in the same position. The next time it is pressed, the lock is released and the pushbutton returns to its original position. Push-pull operation When the pushbutton is pressed, an internal lock mechanism holds it in the same position. The pushbutton is returned to its original position when the pushbutton is pulled to release the lock. Push-lock, turn-reset operation When the pushbutton is pressed, an internal lock mechanism holds it in the same position. The pushbutton is returned to its original position when the pushbutton is twisted to release the lock. 8 Technical Information Technical Information Terms Related to Operating Characteristics Classification Force Position Travel Unit Definition Operating Force Term OF N, Nm The force (or torque) that must be applied to the pushbutton to move it from the free position to the operating position. Releasing Force RF N, Nm The force (or torque) that must be applied to the pushbutton to move it from the operating limit position back to the returned position. Total Travel Force TTF N, Nm The force (or toque) on the pushbutton when it reaches the stopper. Free Position FP mm, () The position (or angle) of the pushbutton when there is no external force applied to it. Operating Position OP mm, () The position (or angle) of the pushbutton when the movable contact changes from the free position state to the operating position state due to an external force. Release Position RP mm, () The position (or angle) of the pushbutton when the movable contact changes from the operating position state to the free position state due to the reduction of external force. Total Travel Position TTP mm, () The position (or angle) of the pushbutton when it reaches the stopper. Set Position SP mm, () The position of an alternate operation pushbutton when it is in the self-holding state, or the position (or angle) of a selector switch when it is in the self-holding state. Pretravel PT mm, () The distance (or angle) through which the pushbutton moves in going from the free position to the operating position. Overtravel OT mm, () The distance (or angle) through which the pushbutton moves in going from the operating position to the operating limit position. Movement Differential MD mm, () The distance (or angle) through which the pushbutton moves in going from the operating position back to the returned position. Total Travel TT mm, () The distance (or angle) through which the pushbutton moves in going from the free position to the operating limit position. Releasing Travel RT mm, () The distance (or angle) through which the pushbutton moves in going from the returned position to the free position. Lock Travel Alternate LTA mm, () The distance (or angle) through which the pushbutton moves in going from the free position to the set position. Free position Abbreviation Operating position Terminal Symbols Symbol Operating limit position Returned position Free position Set position Contact Form Meaning COM Common terminal NC Normally closed terminal NO Normally open terminal Name Contact form SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO Double-break 9 Technical Information Technical Information General Terms Term Explanation Chameleon lighting Full-screen lighting in one of 3 colors: red, green, or orange. (Orange is produced by simultaneous illumination of red and green.) Simultaneity This term is used for switches that have more than one contact circuit. It indicates the difference in time or position between the contacts when all the contacts of the switch are opened or closed in one operation. LED lighting LED-lighted models are lit with an LED installed in the base of the Pushbutton Unit. The LED is mounted internally; it cannot be removed. LED-lamp lighting LED lamp-lighted models use the same light source as incandescent lamp-lighted models, with an LED instead of a filament. The Lamp (i.e., the LED lamp) and the Pushbutton Unit can be separated. Pushbutton Unit Pushbutton Unit LED lamp LED lamp A16, M16 Incandescent lamp lighting A3P Incandescent lamp-lighted models are lit with an incandescent lamp. The Lamp (i.e., the incandescent lamp) and the Pushbutton Unit can be separated. Pushbutton Unit Pushbutton Unit Incandescent lamp Incandescent lamp A16, M16 A3P Voltage Reduction Unit For 16-dia. A16 (M16) models, 22-dia. A22 (M22) models, and 30-dia. A30 models Matrix mounting Mounting several Switches in vertical and/or horizontal lines. Locking Switches Switches that have the functionality to self-hold when the pushbutton is operated. Horizontal side-by-side mounting Mounting Switches side-by-side with the long side of the Switch (rectangular models) horizontal. Vertical side-by-side mounting Mounting Switches side-by-side with the long side of the Switch (rectangular models) vertical. 10 The Voltage Reduction Unit has a smoothing circuit and a resistance, and lights the LED lamp by applying 110 (220) VAC/VDC directly to the Lamp terminals. Technical Information Technical Information Protection Ratings Note: International protection degrees are determined by the following tests. Be sure to check the sealing capability under the actual operating environment and conditions before actual use. IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) Standards (IEC 60529 January 1997) IP-jj Degree of protection against water Degree of protection against solid materials International protection mark Degree of Protection from Solid Materials Degree Protection 0 No protection 1 50 mm dia. Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a hand, that is 50 mm or more in diameter. 2 12.5 mm dia. Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a finger, that is 12.5 mm or more in diameter. 3 2.5 mm 4 1 mm Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a wire, that is 2.5 mm or more is diameter. Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a wire, that is 1 mm or more in diameter. 5 Protects against penetration of dust of a quantity that may cause malfunction or obstruct the safe operation of the product. 6 Protects against penetration of all dust. 11 Technical Information Technical Information Degree of Protection Against Water Degree Protection Test method (with fresh water) 0 No protection Not protected against water. No test 1 Protection against water drops Protects against vertical drops of water towards the product. Water is dropped vertically towards the product from the test machine for 10 min. Protection against water drops Protects against drops of water approaching at a maximum angle of 15 to the left, right, back, and front of vertical towards the product. Water is dropped for 2.5 min each (i.e., 10 min in total) towards the product inclined 15 to the left, right, back, and front from the test machine. 2 200 mm 200 mm 3 Protection against sprinkled water Protects against sprinkled water approaching at a maximum angle of 60 from vertical towards the product. Water is sprinkled at a maximum angle of 60 to the left and right from vertical for 10 min from the test machine Water rate is 0.07 liter/min per hole. 4 Protection against water spray Protects against water spray approaching at any angle towards the product. Water is sprayed at any angle towards the product for 10 min from the test machine. Water rate is 0.07 liter/min per hole. 5 Protection against water jet spray Protects against water jet spray approaching at any angle towards the product. Water is jet sprayed at any angle towards the product for 1 min per square meter for at least 3 min in total from the test machine. 6 Protection against high-pressure water jet spray Protects against high-pressure water jet spray approaching at any angle towards the product. Water is jet sprayed at any angle towards the product for 1 min per square meter for at least 3 min in total from the test machine. Resists the penetration of water when the product is placed underwater at specified pressure for a specified time. The product is placed 1 m deep in water (if the product is 850 mm max. in height) for 30 min. Can be used continuously underwater. The test method is determined by the manufacturer and user. 12.5 liter/min 2.5 to 3 m Discharging nozzle: 6.3 dia. 7 8 12 Protection underwater Protection underwater 100 liter/min 2.5 to 3 m Discharging nozzle: 12.5 dia. 1m Technical Information Technical Information Terms Related to IEC947 and IEC950 No. Term Explanation 1 Rated operating voltage (Ue) VAC: 120, 240, 380, 480, 500, 600 VDC: 125, 250, 440, 500, 600 2 Rated operating current (Ie) Specified by the manufacturer on consideration of rated operating voltage (Ue), rated frequency, rated energizing time, area of application, and type of enclosure protection. 3 Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Determined by creepage distance and the dielectric strength. The maximum Ue value must not exceed the maximum Ui value. If there is no Ui value specified, the maximum Ue value is taken as the Ui value. 4 Pollution degree 1. Either no pollutants are present, or only dried, non-conductive pollutants are present (e.g., clean rooms). 2. Basically, only non-conductive pollutants are present, or only transient conductivity occurs due to condensation (indoor locations, such as offices). 3. Conductive pollutants are present, or non-conductive pollutants are present in locations where condensation is expected (e.g., factories). 4. Conductivity due to impurities is a constant possibility, or conductivity is caused by conductive dust, rain, or snow (e.g., outdoor locations). 5 Electric shock protection class Class I: These devices require grounding. Electric shock is prevented by basic insulation and charged parts that would be subject to dangerously high voltages if the insulation was damaged, are grounded. Class II: Electric shocks are prevented by double insulation or enforced insulation. Class III: No countermeasures against electric shocks are required because the electric circuits in use operate in a low-enough voltage range. Class II: Electric shocks are prevented by double insulation or enforced insulation. Class III: No countermeasures against electric shocks are required because the electric circuits in use operate in a low-enough voltage range. 6 PTI 7 IP Proof tracking index. Specified CTI values (comparative tracking indices): Materials satisfying the 175, 250, 300, 375, and 500 levels are denoted as PTI-175, PTI-250, PTI-300, PTI-375, and PTI-500 respectively. IP-jj Degree of protection against water (See below.) Degree of protection against solid materials (See below.) Degree of Protection The meanings of the IP numbers are given in the following table. No. Degree of protection against solid materials Degree of protection against water 0 No protection No protection 1 Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a hand, that is 50 mm or more in diameter. Protects against vertical drops of water. 2 Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a finger, that is 12.5 mm or more in diameter. Protects against drops of water approaching at a maximum angle of 15 to the vertical. 3 Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a wire, that is 2.5 mm or more is diameter. Protects against sprinkled water. 4 Protects against penetration of any solid object, such as a wire, that is 1 mm or more in diameter. Protects against water spray. 5 Protects against penetration of dust of a quantity that may cause malfunction or obstruct the safe operation of the product. Protects against water jet spray. 6 Protects against penetration of all dust. Protects against high-pressure water jet spray. 13 Technical Information Technical Information Common Precautions For the individual precautions for a Switch, refer to the precautions in the section for that Switch. Type of Load vs. Inrush Current Cautions Do not perform wiring or touch the charged parts of terminals while power is being supplied to the Switch. Doing so may result in electric shock. Solenoid (Approximately 10 to 20 times higher) Electrical Characteristics Incandescent lamp (Approximately 10 to 15 times higher) Electrical Conditions * The switching load capacity of the Switch greatly varies between AC and DC. Always be sure to apply the rated load. The control capacity will drastically drop if it is a DC load. This is because a DC load has no current zero-cross point, unlike an AC load. Therefore, if an arc is generated, it may continue for a comparatively long time. Furthermore, the current direction is always the same, which results in a contact relocation phenomena whereby the contacts easily stick to each other and do not separate when the surfaces of the contacts are uneven. * Some types of load have a great difference between normal current and inrush current. Make sure that the inrush current is within the permissible value. The greater the inrush current in the closed circuit is, the greater the contact abrasion or shift will be. Consequently, contact weld, contact separation failures, or insulation failures may result. Furthermore, the Switch may be broken or damaged. * If the load is inductive, counter-electromotive voltage will be generated. The higher the voltage is, the higher the generated energy will be, which will increase the abrasion of the contacts and contact relocation phenomena. Be sure to use the Switch within the rated conditions. Motor (Approximately 5 to 10 times Relay higher) (Approximately 4 to 5 times higher) * All the performance ratings given are for operation under the following conditions unless otherwise specified. Inductive load: A minimum power factor of 0.4 (AC) and a maximum time constant of 7 ms (DC) Lamp load: An inrush current 10 times higher than the steady-state current Motor load: An inrush current 6 times higher than the steady-state current Note: Inductive loads can cause problems especially in DC circuitry. Therefore, it is essential to know the time constants (L/R) of the load. Load Connections Inrush Current Do not contact a single Switch to two power supplies that are different in polarity or type. Connection of Different Polarities The power supply may short-circuit if the loads are connected in the way shown in the "incorrect" example below. i (Inrush current) Incorrect Load Load o (Steadystate current) Correct Load * Approximate control capacities are given in ratings tables, but these alone are insufficient to guarantee correct operation. For special types of load, with unusual switching voltage or current waveforms, test whether correct operation is possible with the actual load before application. * When switching for microloads (voltage or current), use a Switch with microload specifications. The reliability of silver-plated contacts, which are used in Switches for standard loads, will be insufficient for microloads. * When switching microloads or very high loads that are beyond the switching capacity of the Switch, connect a relay suitable for the load. 14 Load Even in the "correct" example, note that the insulation performance of the switch may deteriorate and the switch life may be shortened because loads are connected to both contacts. Technical Information Technical Information Connection of Different Power Supplies The DC and AC power may be mixed for the circuit shown below. Do not design a circuit where voltage is imposed between contacts, otherwise contact weld may result. Incorrect Incorrect Load Load Load Contact Protective Circuit Apply a contact protective circuit to extend the contact life, prevent noise, and suppress the generation of carbide or nitric acid. Be sure to apply the contact protective circuit correctly, otherwise an adverse effect may occur. The following provides typical examples of contact protective circuits. If the Limit Switch is used in an excessively humid location for switching a load that easily generates arcs, such as an inductive load, the arcs may generate NOx, which will change into HNO3 if it reacts with moisture. Consequently, the internal metal parts may corrode and the Limit Switch may fail. Be sure to select the ideal contact preventive circuit from the following. Typical Examples of Contact Protective Circuits Applicable current Circuit example AC CR circuit Power supply DC *When AC is switched, the load impedance must be lower than the CR impedance. Yes Yes The operating time will be greater if the load is a relay or solenoid. Connecting the CR circuit in parallel to the load is effective when the power supply voltage is 24 or 48 V and in parallel to the contacts when the power supply voltage is 100 to 200 V. No Yes Energy stored in the coil is changed into current by the diode connected in parallel to the load. Then the current flowing to the coil is consumed and Joule heat is generated by the resistance of the inductive load. The reset time delay with this method is longer than that in the CR method. The diode must withstand a peak inverse voltage 10 times higher than the circuit voltage and a forward current as high or higher than the load current. No Yes This method will be effective if the reset time delay caused by the diode method is too long. Use a Zener diode with a Zener voltage that is approximately 1.2 x power supply voltage as, depending on the environment, the load may not operate. Yes Yes This method makes use of constant-voltage characteristic of the varistor so that no high-voltage is imposed on the contacts. This method causes a reset time delay. Connecting a varistor in parallel to the load is effective when the supply voltage is 24 to 48 V and in parallel to the contacts when the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V. --- Inductive load Diode and Zener diode method Power supply Inductive load Inductive load Varistor method Inductive load Power supply C: 1 to 0.5 F x switching current (A) R: 0.5 to 1 x switching voltage (V) The values may change according to the characteristics of the load. The capacitor suppresses the spark discharge of current when the contacts are open. The resistor limits the inrush current when the contacts are closed again. Consider the roles of the capacitor and resistor and determine ideal capacitance and resistance values through testing. Basically, use a capacitor with a dielectric strength between 200 and 300 V. When AC is switched, make sure that the capacitor has no polarity. Yes Power supply Power supply Element selection * Inductive load Diode method Feature 15 Technical Information Technical Information Do not apply contact protective circuits as shown below. Incorrect Power supply Load Incorrect This circuit effectively suppresses arcs when the contacts are OFF. The capacitor will be charged, however, when the contacts are OFF. Consequently, when the contacts are ON again, short-circuited current from the capacitance may cause contact weld. Hammer Do not apply excessive or sudden force. Incorrect Power supply Load This circuit effectively suppresses arcs when the contacts are OFF. When the contacts are ON again, however, charge current will flow to the capacitor, which may result in contact weld. * The pushbutton surface is composed of resin. Therefore, do not attempt to operate the pushbutton using a sharp object, such as a screwdriver or a pair of tweezers. Doing so may damage or deform the pushbutton surface and result in faulty operation. Switching a DC inductive load is usually more difficult than switching a resistive load. By using an appropriate contact protective circuit, however, switching a DC inductive load will be as easy as switching a resistive load. Incorrect Do not use sharp objects. Switching * Do not use the Switch for loads that exceed the rated switching Screwdriver capacity or other contact ratings. Doing so may result in contact weld, contact separation failures, or insulation failures. Furthermore, the Switch may be broken or damaged. * Do not touch the charged switch terminals while power is supplied, otherwise an electric shock may be received. * The life of the Switch varies greatly with switching conditions. Before using the Switch, be sure to test the Switch under actual conditions. Make sure that the number of switching operations is within the permissible range. If a deteriorated Switch is used continuously, insulation failures, contact weld, contact failures, switch damage, or switch burnout may result. * Do not apply excessive or incorrect voltages to the Switch or incorrectly wire the terminals. Otherwise, the Switch may not function properly and have an adverse effect on external circuitry. Furthermore, the Switch itself may become damaged or burnt. * Do not use the Switch in locations where flammable or explosive gases are present. Otherwise switching arcs or heat radiation may cause a fire or explosion. * Do not drop or disassemble the Switch, otherwise it may not be capable of full performance. Furthermore, it may be broken or burnt. Tweezers Mounting * Switches can be broadly divided into two categories according to mounting method: panel-mounting models and PCB-mounting models. Use the appropriate model for the mounting method required. Basically, panel-mounting Switches can withstand a greater operating force than PCB-mounting Switches. If, however, the panel thickness or the panel-cutout dimensions are not suitable for the Switch, it may not be able to withstand the normal operating force. With continuous mounting in particular, select a panel of a thickness that is easily sufficient to withstand the total operating force. * Panel-mounting Switches can be divided into two categories according to the mounting method: snap-in mounting models and screw-mounting models. Snap-in mounting Switches are held in place with the elasticity of resin or a metal leaf spring. Do not attempt to modify the spring after mounting. Doing so may result in faulty operation or damage the mounting structure. Mount screw-mounting models using the screws and nuts provided (or individually specified). Tighten the screws to the specified torque. Mounting with different screws or nuts, or tightening beyond the specified torque may result in distortion of the inside of the case or damage to the screw section. Mechanical Conditions Operating Force and Operating Method * Fingertip operation is an important feature of Pushbutton Switches. In terms of Switch operation, Pushbutton Switches differ greatly from detection switches such as Microswitches. Operating the Switch using a hard object (e.g., metal), or with a large or sudden force, may deform or damage the Switch, resulting in faulty or rough operation, or shortening of the Switch life. The strength varies with the size and construction of the Switch. Use the appropriate Switch for the application after confirming the operating method and operating force with this catalog. Snap-in Mounting Do not attempt to modify the spring after mounting. * 16 Screw Mounting Use the screws and nuts provided (or specified). Subjecting the Switch to severe vibrations or shock may result in faulty operation or damage. Also, many of the Switches are Technical Information Technical Information composed of resin so contact with sharp objects may result in damage to the surface. This kind of damage may spoil the appearance of the Switch or result in faulty operation. Do not throw or drop the Switch. Correct Incorrect Do not drop or knock the Switch. Incorrect Incorrect Do not drop objects or place heavy objects on the Switch. * Incorrect With miniature Switches, the gap between the terminals is very narrow. Use protective or heat-absorbing tubes to prevent burning of the wire sheath or shorting. Correct Do not operate the Switch with heavy or sharp objects. Hammer Incorrect Screwdriver Mounting Precautions Wiring * Perform wiring so that the lead wires will not be caught on other objects as this will cause stress on the Switch terminals. Wire the Switch so that there is slack in the lead wires and fix lead wires at intermediate points. If the panel to which the Switch is mounted needs to be opened and closed for maintenance purposes, perform wiring so that the opening and closing of the panel will not interfere with the wiring. Protective tube Soldering * There are two methods for soldering the Switch: hand soldering and automatic soldering. In addition, automatic soldering itself can be divided into two types : dip soldering and reflow soldering. Use the soldering method appropriate for the mounting method. The following table gives some examples of applications using the types of soldering given above. 17 Technical Information Technical Information Method Soldering device Hand soldering Automatic soldering Application Case Soldering iron Dip soldering Small quantities Jet soldering bath Reflow soldering Solder Lead wire terminals Lead wire Large quantities of discrete terminals Dip soldering bath Infrared reflow (IR) soldering bath Terminal Different materials * Large quantities of miniature SMD terminals When applying flux using a brush, use a sponge soaked in flux as shown below. Do not apply more than is necessary. Also, apply the flux with the PCB inclined at an angle of less than 80 so that flux does not flow onto the mounting surface of the Switch. Correct Vapor-phase (VPS) reflow soldering bath Brush * Do not use soldering flux that contains chlorine. Doing so may result in metal corrosion. * Perform hand soldering using the appropriate soldering iron. Incorrect 1 mm min. 80C max. Incorrect Sponge soaked in flux Incorrect Brush Terminal Correct Largecapacity Lead wire soldering iron Small-capacity soldering iron used for a long time Flux * Perform soldering for between 3 to 5 s with a suitable soldering iron. * Do not place PCBs that have had flux applied or have been soldered on top of each other. Otherwise, the flux on the PCB's solder surface may stain the upper part of the Switch or even permeate the inside of the Switch and cause contact failure. Incorrect With the exception of PCB-mounting Switches, when performing hand soldering, hold the Switch so that the terminals point downwards so that flux does not get inside the Switch. Incorrect Correct Flux Do not place PCBs with solder or flux on top of each other. * 18 Leave a gap of at least 1 mm between the soldered parts and the surface of the case so that flux does not get inside the Switch. Technical Information Technical Information * When performing soldering with a dip soldering bath, ensure that the flux does not reach a higher level than the PCB. Incorrect Correct * Flux is especially likely to rise up at the edges of the PCB. If the Switch is mounted near the edge of the PCB, create a gap between the edge by using a split PCB, and insert the PCB in the soldering bath so that the edge that is farthest from the Switch enters the bath first. Create distance Create gap Split PCB Flux is more likely to rise at the edges. Insert in soldering bath from this edge. Storage * When the Switch is left unused or stored for long periods, the ambient conditions can have a great effect on the condition of the Switch. In certain environments, leaving the Switch exposed may result in deterioration (i.e., oxidation, or the creation of an oxide film) of the contacts and terminals, causing the contact resistance to increase, and making it difficult to solder the lead wires. Therefore, store in a well-ventilated room, inside, for example, a non-hygroscopic case, in a location where no corrosive gases are present. * If the Switch is stored in a location where it will be exposed to direct light, colored resin in the colored plate may fade. Therefore, do not store the Switch in locations where it will be exposed to direct light. 19 Lighted Pushbutton Switch A3D Lighted Pushbutton Switch with Cylindrical 18-mm x 8-dia. Body Good illumination with even surface brightness. Cylindrical body means panel cutouts can be made easily. Combines miniature design with excellent operating sensitivity. Ordering Information Model Number Legend: The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Pushbutton (LED lamp built-in) and Switch. (1) (2) (3) A3DJ-90A1-00ER (1) Shape of Pushbutton Symbol (2) Switch Specifications Microload (30 VDC, 0.1 A) Shape Symbol J Rectangular A A Square B T Round Terminals Operation (3) Color of Pushbutton Contact Momentary Solder Alternate SPST-NO Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC Symbol Color R Red Y Yellow G Green If PCB terminals are required, use the Socket given under Accessories on page 22. W White All models are illumination only. Colored-illumination models are not available. Momentary operation: Self-resetting Alternate operation: Self-holding Non-lighted models are not available. Standard load models are not available. An external resistor is required. (Refer to page 28.) List of Models Appearance Model Rectangular A3DJ Square A3DA Round A3DT 20 A3D A3D Ordering as a Set The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following table. One set comprises the Pushbutton (LED lamp built-in), and Switch. Appearance A3DJ (Rectangular) Degree of protection IP40 A3DA (Square) A3DT (Round) Operation Model number Momentary A3DJ-90A1-00Ej Alternate A3DJ-90B1-00Ej Momentary A3DA-90A1-00Ej Alternate A3DA-90B1-00Ej Momentary A3DT-90A1-00Ej Alternate A3DT-90B1-00Ej Color symbol for Pushbutton R, Y, G, W 9 dia. Note: 1. Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in j. 2. All the above are solder-terminal, microload, SPST-NO, LED lamp-lighted models. Ordering Individually Pushbuttons and Switches can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual Units. Also, store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs. Pushbutton (LED built-in) Switch 21 A3D A3D Pushbutton (All Lighted with LED Built-in) Appearance Rectangular Square Round Color Red A3DJ-500R A3DA-500R A3DT-500R Yellow A3DJ-500Y A3DA-500Y A3DT-500Y Green A3DJ-500GY A3DA-500GY A3DT-500GY White A3DJ-500W A3DA-500W A3DT-500W Switch Sealing Appearance Contact type SPST-NO Operating action IP40 Rectangle Square Round Terminal type Momentary Solder terminals A3DJ-7111 A3DA-7111 A3DT-7111 Alternative Solder terminals A3DJ-7121 A3DA-7121 A3DT-7121 Accessories (Order Separately) Name Socket Appearance Classification Model Application precautions Cannot be used together with Insulation Cover Cover. Wire-wrap terminal A3D-4101 PCB terminal A3D-4102 Solder terminal A3D-4103 Insulation Cover --- A3D-3002 Cannot be used together with the Socket. Tightening Tool --- A3D-3004 Do not tighten to a torque exceeding 0.29 Nm. Legend Plate Rectangular A3DJ-5201 Square A3DA-5201 One milky-white Legend Plate is included with standard products. Round A3DT-5201 22 A3D A3D Specifications Ratings 1. 2. 3. 4. Contact Rating: 30 VDC, 0.1 A (Minimum Applicable Load: 5 VDC, 1 mA) The above ratings conform to JIS C4505, for testing under the following conditions. Load: Resistive load Mounting conditions: No vibration or shock Ambient temperature: 20 $2_C. Operating frequency: 20 times/min. Built-in LED Lamp Color Item Red Forward voltage, g , VF Yellow (White) (See note 4.) Green Reference value (See note 3.) 1.7 V 2.2 V 2.1 V Maximum value 2.0 V 2.5 V 2.5 V Reference value 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA Absolute maximum value 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA Permissible dissipation, PD Absolute maximum value 100 mW 125 mW 122 mW Reverse voltage, VR Absolute maximum value 4V 4V 4V Forward current,, IF Note: 1. The above ratings are for an ambient temperature of 25C. 2. The built-in LED lamp has no limiting resistor and so it is necessary to connect an external resistor within the range shown in the above table. (For details of calculation formulas, refer to page 28.) 3. Refer to the characteristic graphs of VF - IF on page 24. 4. The same LED lamp is used for both yellow illumination and white illumination and so the ratings are the same. Characteristics Operating frequency Mechanical: 120 operations/minute max. (See note 1.) Electrical: 20 operations/minute max. Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength g 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of same polarity 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of different polarity, and between each terminal and ground 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between lamp terminals (See note 2.) Vibration resistance Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude (See note 3.) Shock resistance Destruction: 500 m/s2 Malfunction: 150 m/s2 (See note 3.) Life expectancy Mechanical: Momentary operation models: 1,000,000 operations min. Alternate operation models: 100,000 operations min. (One operation consists of set and reset operations.) Electrical: 100,000 operations min. Weight Approx. 3 g Ambient operating temperature -10_C to 55_C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient operating humidity 35% to 85% Ambient storage temperature -25_C to 65_C Degree of protection IP40 Electric shock protection class Class II PTI (proof tracking index) 175 Pollution degree 3 (IEC947-5-1) Note: 1. With alternate operation models, 60 operations/minute max. One operation cycle consists of set and reset operations. 2. The figure for dielectric strength between lamp terminals is for when the LED lamp is not mounted. 3. "Malfunction" in the above table indicates malfunctions of less than 1 ms. 23 A3D A3D Operating Characteristics OF max. 2.45 N RF min. 0.196 N TT Approx. 3.5 mm LTA min. (See note.) 0.5 mm PT max. 2.5 mm Note: The figure for LTA in the table applies only to models with alternate operation. Contact Form Contact name SPST-NO Contact form COM NO Engineering Data LED Characteristics Ta: Ambient Temperature 24 Forward Current Reduction Curve VF (V) I F (mA) I F (mA) VF (V) VF - IF Characteristic for Green LED I F (mA) VF - IF Characteristic for Yellow or White LED I F (mA) VF - IF Characteristic for Red LED VF (V) TA (C) A3D A3D Nomenclature Color cap Legend plate (milky white) Reflective plunger LED Pushbutton Shape of Pushbutton Rectangular (A3DJ) Square (A3DA) Round (A3DT) Color of Pushbutton (All models LED-lighted) Red, yellow, green, white Note: The LED lamp is built into the Pushbutton. Switch Switch Specifications Microload 0.1 A at 30 VDC Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC Note: The A3DJ model is shown here as a representative example. 25 A3D A3D Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. Rectangular Models (A3DJ) Square Models (A3DA) Round Models (A3DT) 9 dia. 7.4 dia. Terminals Panel Cutouts (Top View) Solder Terminals of SPST-NO Lighted Models Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Rectangular models (A3DJ) 8 +0.2 0 dia. 15 min. Square models (A3DA) and round models (A3DT) 8 +0.2 0 dia. 10 min. 10 min. 0.8 2 LED terminal (t0.3) Note: Recommended panel thickness: 1.0 to 3.2 mm. Note: Recommended panel thickness: 1.0 to 3.2 mm. Accessory Mounting Dimensions Socket Mounting Dimensions Wire-wrap Terminal A3D-4101 PCB Terminal A3D-4102 Solder Terminal A3D-4103 9 dia. 9 dia. PCB Cutout (bottom view) Four, 0.8 dia. 26 9 dia. A3D A3D Insulation Cover Mounting Dimensions A3D-3002 8.9 dia. Note: * After securing the Switch to the panel using the mounting nut, pass the lead wires through the holes in the Insulation Cover before performing wiring. Hold the Insulation Cover so that the cylindrical hole is facing the Switch, and insert the lead wires from the end with the barriers. * After wiring is completed, mount the Insulation Cover by pushing it into the Switch. 1. The diagram above shows the rectangular model as a representative example. 2. Unless specified, there is a tolerance of 0.4 mm for dimensions. Legend Plate Mounting Dimensions Rectangular A3DJ-5201 Round A3DT-5201 Square A3DA-5201 5.8 dia. Note: 1. The thickness is 0.8 mm. 2. Since the legend plate is made of polycarbonate, use alcohol-based paints such as melanin, phthalic acid, or acryl paint when marking the legend. Installation Mounting and Replacing the Pushbutton Mounting Direction for the Pushbutton and Switch If soldering is used, mount the mounting nut first. Lead wires and mounds of solder may make it impossible to mount the nut after soldering. Panel Switch Mounting nut Curved claw Projection Pushbutton Align the curved claw on the outside of the protruding part of the Pushbutton with the projection on the upper part of the Switch and insert. Apply a pressure between 9.8 and 24.5 N. Note: If the terminals of the LED lamp become bent, it may be impossible to fit them into the LED lamp terminal holes. Ensure that the terminals are straight when they are inserted. Be sure to insert the lamp terminals for round models with the correct orientation. Inserting the terminals with the reverse orientation will result in damage. Removing the Pushbutton Socket Mounting After securing the Switch to the panel using the mounting nut, insert the Socket into the Switch. When inserting the Socket, align the positioning groove of the Socket with the projecting part of the Switch. Panel Recessed portions Projecting part of Switch Hold the recessed portions on the cap of the Pushbutton and pull. Note: Do not use tools such as pliers to remove the Pushbutton as this may damage the cap. Positioning groove of Socket Panel Mounting Using the Mounting Nut Insert the Switch from the front of the panel. Mount the mounting nut from the terminal end of the Switch and tighten it. Tighten the nut to a torque 0.20 to 0.39 Nm. 27 A3D A3D Precautions Correct Use Mounting Always make sure that the power is turned OFF before mounting, removing, or wiring the Switch, or performing maintenance. Do not tighten the mounting ring excessively using pliers or a similar tool. Excessive tightening may damage the mounting ring. (Tightening torque: 0.20 to 0.29 Nm) Wiring When wiring, use wires of a size appropriate for the applied voltage and carry current. Perform soldering correctly under the conditions given below. Using the Switch with the wires soldered incorrectly may cause the terminals to become abnormally hot and cause a fire. 1. Hand soldering: At 30 W within 5 seconds. 2. Dip soldering: At 240C within 3 seconds. Wait for one minute after soldering before exerting any external force on the solder. Use a non-corrosive rosin liquid for the flux. Perform wiring so that the wire sheaths do not come into contact with the Switch. If this is unavoidable, use wires that can withstand temperatures of 100C min. After wiring to the Switch has been completed, ensure an appropriate insulation distance. Calculation Example for Limiting Resistance Conditions: Red LED with an IF of 20 mA at 24 V and a Ta of 25C. From the red LED characteristic given previously, VF will be 1.7 V when IF is 20 mA. Therefore, R = (24 V - 1.7 V)/0.02 A = 1,100 . Thus the recommended resistance is 1.1 k at 1 W (2 x IF2R). (see note) Note: A factor of 2 is applied because the permissible wattage of the resistor must be twice as large as the required wattage. Operating Environment Ensure that dust, metal powder, or oil do not enter the interior of the Switch. Using Microloads Using a standard load switch for opening and closing a microload circuit may cause wear on the contacts. Use the switch within the operating range. (Refer to the diagram below.) Even when using microload models within the operating range shown below, if inrush current occurs when the contact is opened or closed, it may cause the contact surface to become rough, and so decrease life expectancy. Therefore, insert a contact protection circuit where necessary. The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability level of 60% ( 60) (conforming to JIS C5003). The equation, 60 = 0.5 x 10-4/times indicates that the estimated malfunction rate is less than 1/2,000,000 with a reliability level of 60%. LED The polarity of the LED is indicated on the back of the Switch. Wire the LED correctly according to the polarity. The built-in LED does not have a limiting resistor. Connect a limiting resistor. Make sure that the limiting resistor satisfies the characteristics of the built-in LED. The forward current of the built-in LED must be 8 mA minimum. The resistance can be calculated by using the following expression. R = (E -VF)/IF () E: Operating voltage (V) VF: LED forward voltage (V) IF: LED forward current (A) Voltage (V) Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on page 14. Microload area Standard load area Invalid area Current (mA) Recommended Values for Limiting Resistance Voltage Red Yellow (White) Green 5 VDC 165 140 145 12 VDC 515 490 495 24 VDC 1,100 1,090 1,095 Note: The above values are calculated values that can be used as reference. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A031-E1-05 28 Indicator M2D Cylindrical 8-dia. Indicator Same basic design as the A3D Pushbutton Switch. Good illumination with even surface brightness. Cylindrical body means panel cutouts can be made easily. Ordering Information Model Number Legend: The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Display (LED lamp built-in) and Socket Unit. (1) (2) (3) M2DJ-90A1-00ER (1) Shape of Display Symbol Shape Symbol J Rectangular A Square T (2) Terminal Type A Terminal type Solder terminals If PCB terminals are required, use the Socket given under Accessories on page 22. Round (3) Color of Display Symbol Color R Red Y Yellow G Green W White All models are illuminationonly. Colored-illumination models are not available. An external resistor is required. (Refer to page 28.) List of Models Appearance Model Rectangular M2DJ Square M2DA Round M2DT 29 M2D M2D Ordering as a Set The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following table. One set comprises the Display (LED lamp built-in), and Socket Unit. Degree of protection Appearance Rectangular IP40 Model number M2DJ-90A1-00Ej Square M2DA-90A1-00Ej Round M2DT-90A1-00Ej Color symbol for Display R, Y, G, W 9 dia. Note: 1. Enter the desired color symbol for the Display in j: R (red), Y (yellow), G (green), or W (white) 2. Degree of protection: IP40 Ordering Individually Displays and Socket Units can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual Units. Also, store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs. Display (LED built-in) Note: Degree of protection: IP40 Socket Unit Display (All Lighted with LED Built-in) Appearance Rectangular Square Round Color 30 Red M2DJ-500R M2DA-500R M2DT-500R Yellow M2DJ-500Y M2DA-500Y M2DT-500Y Green M2DJ-500GY M2DA-500GY M2DT-500GY White M2DJ-500W M2DA-500W M2DT-500W M2D M2D Socket Unit Sealing IP40 Appearance Round Square Rectangle Terminal type Solder terminals M2DJ-7001 M2DA-7001 M2DT-7001 Accessories The accessories for the A3D Lighted Pushbutton Switch can also be used with the M2D. Refer to page 22. Specifications Ratings Built-in LED Lamp Color Item Red Forward voltage, g , VF Yellow (White) (See note 4.) Green Reference value (See note 3.) 1.7 V 2.2 V 2.1 V Maximum value 2.0 V 2.5 V 2.5 V Reference value 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA Absolute maximum value 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA Permissible dissipation, PD Absolute maximum value 100 mW 125 mW 122 mW Reverse voltage, VR Absolute maximum value 4V 4V 4V Forward current,, IF Note: 1. The above ratings are for an ambient temperature of 25C. 2. The built-in LED lamp has no limiting resistor and so it is necessary to connect an external resistor within the range shown in the above table. (For details of calculation formulas, refer to page 28.) 3. Refer to the characteristic graph of VF - IF on page 24. 4. The same LED lamp is used for both yellow illumination and white illumination and so the ratings are the same. Characteristics Ambient operating temperature -10_C to 55_C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient operating humidity 35% to 85% Ambient storage temperature -25_C to 65_C 31 M2D M2D Nomenclature Color cap Legend plate (milky white) Reflective plunger LED Color of Display (All models LED-lighted) Display Shape of Display Rectangular Square Red, yellow, green, white Round Note: The LED lamp is built into the Display. Socket Unit Note: The M2DJ model is shown here as a representative example. Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. Rectangular Models (M2DJ-90A1-00Ej) Square Models (M2DA-90A1-00Ej) Square Models (M2DT-90A1-00Ej) 9 dia. 7.4 dia. Note: 32 Unless specified, there is a tolerance of 0.4 mm for dimensions. M2D M2D Terminals Panel Cutouts (Top View) Solder Terminals Rectangular models (M2DJ) 8 +0.2 0 dia. 15 min. Square models (M2DA) and round models (M2DT) 8 +0.2 0 10 min. dia. 10 min. 0.8 2 LED terminal (0.3) Note: Note: Recommended panel thickness: 1.0 to 3.2 mm. Note: Recommended panel thickness: 1.0 to 3.2 mm. If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating. Precautions Correct Use Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on page 14. Refer to Correct Use for A3D on page 28. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A122-E1-02 33 Lighted Pushbutton Switch A3C Cylindrical 12-dia. Series with Superb Operability, High Visibility, and Compact Housing Three models of Pushbuttons (round, square, and rectangular), two types of light-emitting elements (LED lamp and incandescent lamp), and two types of Switches (switching standard loads and microloads) available. Models that can be used as an indicator also available. Requires only 20 mm mounting depth Efficiency in wiring improved by terminals arranged on the same surface. RC All LED lamps, incandescent lamps, caps, and legends replaceable without tools. UL (E41515) and CSA (LR45258) approved. Ordering Information Model Number Legend When placing your order, specify the individual component part model numbers of the Pushbutton, Lamp (lighted models only), and Switch, as listed in the ordering tables below. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) A 3 C J - 9 0 A 1 - 24E R (1) Shape of Pushbutton (2) Terminal Type Symbol Shape J Rectangular A Square T Round Symbol 0 Type Solder terminal PCB terminals are also available. Refer to the Switch table on page 37. (3) Switch Specifications Standard Load Symbol Operation A Momentary B Alternate SPDT Operation E Momentary F Alternate SPDT Standard Load 0.5 A at 250 VAC 1 A at 125 VAC 1 A at 30 VDC Microload 0.1 A at 125 VAC 0.1 A at 30 VDC Minimum applicable load 1 mA at 5 VDC Momentary-action: Self-resetting Alternate-action: Self-holding 34 Symbol 0 1 Type Non-lighted Illumination only Colored-illumination models are also available. Refer to page 36. Microload Symbol (4) Lighted/Non-lighted "Colored-illumination" models operate in the way shown below: Unlit White (5) Lighting Method LED Lamp-lighted Models Symbol Operating voltage Symbol Color 05E 5 VDC R Red 12E 12 VDC Y Yellow 24E 24 VDC G Green W White Incandescent Lamplighted Models Symbol Operating voltage Lit 06 5 VAC/VDC Color 14 12 VAC/VDC 28 24 VAC/VDC The built-in LED is colored. (6) Color of Pushbutton For LED Lamp Non-lighted Models No symbol For Incandescent Lamp Symbol Color R Red Y Yellow G Green A Blue W White For Non-lighted Models Symbol Color R Red Y Yellow G Green W White A Blue B Black A3C A3C Ordering as a Set The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following tables. One set comprises the Pushbutton, Lamp (lighted models only), and Switch. Rectangular Models Square Models Round Models A3CA A3CJ A3CT Lighted Pushbutton Switches (SPST-NO+SPST-NC Solder Terminals) Contact type yp Operation Shape Rectangular g (A3CJ) ( ) Lighting LED lamp p Incandescent lamp Standard load Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding) Microload Momentary operation (Self-resetting) A3CJ-90A1-05Ej A3CJ-90B1-05Ej A3CJ-90E1-05Ej A3CJ-90A1-12Ej A3CJ-90B1-12Ej A3CJ-90E1-12Ej A3CJ-90A1-24Ej A3CJ-90B1-24Ej A3CJ-90E1-24Ej R: red Y yellow Y: ello G: green W: white A3CJ-90A1-06j --- R: red Y: yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 3.) A3CJ-90A1-14j A3CJ-90A1-28j Square q (A3CA) ( ) Non-lighted A3CJ-90A0-j A3CJ-90B0-j A3CJ-90E0-j LED lamp p A3CA-90A1-05Ej A3CA-90B1-05Ej A3CA-90E1-05Ej A3CA-90A1-12Ej A3CA-90B1-12Ej A3CA-90E1-12Ej A3CA-90A1-24Ej A3CA-90B1-24Ej A3CA-90E1-24Ej R: red Y yellow Y: ello G: green W: white A3CA-90A1-06j --- R: red Y: yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 3.) Incandescent lamp A3CA-90A1-14j A3CA-90A1-28j Round (A3CT) ( ) Non-lighted A3CA-90A0-j A3CA-90B0-j A3CA-90E0-j LED lamp p A3CT-90A1-05Ej A3CT-90B1-05Ej A3CT-90E1-05Ej A3CT-90A1-12Ej A3CT-90B1-12Ej A3CT-90E1-12Ej A3CT-90A1-24Ej A3CT-90B1-24Ej A3CT-90E1-24Ej R: red Y yellow Y: ello G: green W: white A3CT-90A1-06j --- A3CT-90E0-j R: red Y: yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 3.) Incandescent lamp A3CT-90A1-14j A3CT-90A1-28j Non-lighted Note: Pushbutton color symbol A3CT-90A0-j A3CT-90B0-j 1. Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in the j at the end of the model number. 2. There are also alternate-operation models that can be used for microloads. Refer to the Switch table on page 37. 3. Black ("B") Pushbuttons are only available for non-lighted models. 35 A3C A3C Illumination-only and Colored-illumination LED Models "Illumination only" describes LED models for which the screen color is the same whether the LED is lit or not. The screen simply becomes brighter when the LED lights. Example: Red LED Cap (red) Not lit Red Pushbutton Legend plate (milky white) Lit Reflective plunger Red LED lamp (red) Lamp "Colored illumination" describes LED models for which the screen color is white when the LED is not lit and changes to the color of the LED lamp when the LED is lit. Example: Red LED White cap (semi-transparent) Not lit White Legend plate (milky white) Pushbutton Lit Reflective plunger Red LED lamp (red) Lamp Ordering: With colored-illumination models, order the Pushbutton, Lamp, and Switch as shown in the following table. Illuminated color Pushbutton Lamp (LED) Red IP40 A3Cj-500W A16-jDR Yellow Enter one of the following symbols in j. J: Rectangular A: Square T: Round A16-jDY Green 36 A16-jDG Enter one of the following symbols in j. 5: 5 VDC 12: 12 VDC 24: 24 VDC Switch Refer to the following information. Order the Switch that is appropriate for the Pushbutton. A3C A3C Ordering Individually Pushbuttons, Lamps, and Switches can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual Units. Also, store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs. Pushbuttons LED Lamp Button color Non-lighted Models Rectangular Square Round Rectangular Button color Square Round Red A3CJ-500R A3CA-500R A3CT-500R Red A3CJ-500R A3CA-500R A3CT-500R Yellow A3CJ-500Y A3CA-500Y A3CT-500Y Yellow A3CJ-500Y A3CA-500Y A3CT-500Y Green A3CJ-500GY A3CA-500GY A3CT-500GY Green A3CJ-500G A3CA-500G A3CT-500G White A3CJ-500W A3CA-500W A3CT-500W White A3CJ-500W A3CA-500W A3CT-500W Blue A3CJ-500A A3CA-500A A3CT-500A Black A3CJ-501B A3CA-501B A3CT-501B Note: The red, yellow, and white Pushbuttons listed above can be used with either LED lamp-lighted models or incandescent lamp-lighted models. Incandescent Lamp Button color Rectangular Square Round Red A3CJ-500R A3CA-500R A3CT-500R Yellow A3CJ-500Y A3CA-500Y A3CT-500Y Green A3CJ-500G A3CA-500G A3CT-500G White A3CJ-500W A3CA-500W A3CT-500W Blue A3CJ-500A A3CA-500A A3CT-500A Lamps LED Lamp Rated voltage Color 5 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC Red A16-5DR A16-12DR A16-24DR Yellow A16-5DY A16-12DY A16-24DY Green A16-5DG A16-12DG A16-24DG White A16-5DW A16-12DW A16-24DW Incandescent Lamp 6 VAC/VDC Rated voltage Model 14 VAC/VDC A16-5 28 VAC/VDC A16-12 A16-24 Switches Configuration g Contact Switch action Degree of protection: IP40 Terminal Rectangular Standard Microload SPST-NO+ SPST NC SPST-NC Momentary Solder Square Round A3CJ-7011 A3CA-7011 A3CT-7011 Alternate A3CJ-7021 A3CA-7021 A3CT-7021 Momentary A3CJ-7111 A3CA-7111 A3CT-7111 Alternate A3CJ-7121 A3CA-7121 A3CT-7121 37 A3C A3C Accessories (Order Separately) Name Appearance Classification Socket Model Remarks Cannot be used with Insulation Cover. Wire-wrap terminal A3C-4101 PCB terminal A3C-4102 Solder terminal A3C-4103 Insulation Cover --- A3C-3002 Cannot be used with Socket. Switch Guard For rectangular models A3CJ-5050 Cannot be used with Dust Cover. For square, round models A3CA-5050 Dust Cover For rectangular models A3CJ-5060 Cannot be used with Switch Guard. Tightening Tool --- A3C-3004 The tightening torque is 0.20 to 0.39 Nm. Extractor --- A3PJ-5080 --- Legend Plate For rectangular models A3CJ-5201 One Legend Plate is supplied per standard Switch. For square models A3CA-5201 For round models A3CT-5201 Specifications Contact Ratings Item Model Standard load Microload (See note 1.) Note: 38 LED Lamp Ratings AC resistive load DC resistive load 0.5 A at 250 VAC 1 A at 125 VAC 1 A at 30 VDC 0.1 A at 125 VAC 0.1 A at 30 VDC 1. The minimum permissible load is 1 mA, 5 VDC. 2. The above ratings are for testing under the following conditions: 1) Load: Resistive load 2) Mounting conditions: No vibrations or shock 3) Temperature: 20C 2C 4) Operation frequency: 20 operations/minute Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage Internal limiting resistance 5 VDC 30 mA 5 VDC5% 33 12 VDC 15 mA 12 VDC5% 270 24 VDC 10 mA 24 VDC5% 1,600 Incandescent Lamp Ratings Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage 6 VAC/VDC 60 mA 5 VAC/VDC 14 VAC/VDC 40 mA 12 VAC/VDC 28 VAC/VDC 24 mA 24 VAC/VDC A3C A3C Characteristics Operating frequency Mechanical: Momentary-action models: 120 operations/minute max. Alternate-action models: 60 operations/minute max. (See note 1.) Electrical: 20 operations/minute max. Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of same polarity and between lamp terminals (See note 2.) 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of different polarity and also between each terminal and ground Vibration Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (No malfunctions for more than 1 s.) Shock Destruction: 500 m/s2 Malfunction: 150 m/s2 (No malfunctions for more than 1 s.) Life expectancy Mechanical: Momentary-action models: 1,000,000 operations min. Alternate-action models: 100,000 operations min. (See note 1.) Electrical: 100,000 operations min. Weight Approx. 5 g (See note 3.) Ambient operating temperature -10C to 55C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient operating humidity 35% to 85% Ambient storage temperature -25C to 65C Degree of protection IP40 Electric shock protection class Class II PTI (proof tracking index) 175 Pollution degree 3 (IEC947-5-1) Note: 1. With alternate-operation models, one operation cycle consists of set and reset operations. 2. The figure given above for the dielectric strength between lamp terminals is for when there is no LED lamp or incandescent lamp mounted. 3. The weight indicated here applies to the lighted models (SPST-NO+SPST-NC). Operating Characteristics OF max. RF min. 0.29 N TT Approx. 3.5 mm LTA min. (See note.) 0.5 mm PT max. 2.5 mm Note: Approved by Standards 2.45 N UL (File No. E41515) CSA (File No. LR45258-31) The value for LTA min. applies to alternate-operation models only. Rating Standard 1 A at 125 VAC 0.5 A at 250 VAC 1 A at 30 VDC Microload 0.1 A at 125 VAC 0.1 A at 30 VDC Contact Form Contact name SPDT Contact form NO NO NC NC 39 A3C A3C Nomenclature Color cap Legend Plate (milky white) Reflective plunger Pushbutton Color of Pushbutton Shape of Pushbutton Rectangular (A3CJ) Square (A3CA) Round (A3CT) * LED lamp-lighted Models: Red, yellow, green, white * Incandescent lamp-lighted Models: Red, yellow, green, white, blue * Non-lighted Models: Red, yellow, green, white, blue, black Lamp LED Lamp Incandescent Lamp Switch * Standard load: 0.5 A at 250 VAC 1 A at 125 VAC 1 A at 30 VDC * Microload: 0.1 A at 125 VAC, 0.1 A at 30 VDC Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC Note: 40 The A3CJ model is shown here as a representative example. A3C A3C Dimensions The following dimensions apply to the Switch with SPST-NO+SPST-NC contact configuration, with solder terminals. Rectangular Models A3CJ Square Models A3CA Round Models A3CT 14 dia.11.8 dia. 41 A3C A3C Accessory Mounting Dimensions Dimensions with Socket Mounted The diagrams below show the external dimensions for rectangular models as representative models. Wire-wrap Terminal A3C-4101 PCB Terminal A3C-4102 Solder Terminal A3C-4103 13.9 dia. 13.9 dia. 13.9 dia. PCB Cutout (bottom view) 9.70.1 Terminal Hole Dimensions Six, 0.8 dia. 5.10.1 7.40.1 Switch Guard Rectangular A3CJ-5050 Square/Round A3CA-5050 Holder (black) Guard (transparent) Holder (black) Guard (transparent) Torsion spring Torsion spring Dust Cover A3CJ-5060 Insulation Cover A3C-3002 Legend Plate Rectangular Square Round 13.9 dia. Cover B (black) Cover A (transparent) 42 10.1 dia. Note: 1. The thickness is 0.8 mm. 2. Since the Legend Plate is made of polycarbonate, use alcohol-based paints such as melanin, phthalic acid, or acryl paint when marking the legend. A3C A3C Panel Cutout (Top View) Accessories used Rectangular/A3CJ Switch only 12 dia.+0.2 0 19 min. Square/A3CA, Round/A3CT 2 dia. (Lock hole) 12 dia.+0.2 0 15 min. 15 min. Note: Note: With Switch Guard Recommended panel thickness: 1.0 to 3.2 mm. 12 dia.+0.2 0 22.5 min. Recommended panel thickness: 1.0 to 3.2 mm. 12 dia.+0.2 0 2 dia. 19 min. 19 min. With Dust Cover 12 dia.+0.2 0 23.5 min. 19 min. 2 dia. --- 19.5 min. Note: If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating. Operation Terminal Connections Type Terminal SPST-NO+SPST-NC Solder terminal Lighted and non-lighted models (bottom view) Lamp terminal t0.3 Terminal hole 43 A3C A3C Installation Mounting and Replacing the Pushbutton 2. If the terminals of the Lamp become bent, it may be impossible to fit them into the lamp terminal holes. Ensure that the terminals are straight when they are inserted. 3. Take particular care about the mounting direction with the round models (A3CT). Mounting Direction for the Pushbutton/Display and Lamp Lighted Pushbutton Switch * Insert the Lamp (incandescent lamp or LED lamp) into the Pushbutton so that the lamp guide fits into the wider gap between the projections on the Pushbutton. Removing the Pushbutton/Display Hold the recessed portions on the cap of the Pushbutton and pull. Recess Note: Do not use tools such as pliers to remove the Pushbutton as this may damage the cap. Panel Mounting Indicator * With Indicators, the Lamp is inserted facing the opposite direction (i.e., at 180) to that for Lighted Pushbutton Switches. Insert the Switch from the front of the panel. Mount the mounting nut from the terminal end of the Switch and tighten it. There are projections on the terminal end of the Switch which may, depending on the orientation, block the nut. In this case, turn the nut until it is possible to mount it. Tighten the nut to a torque between 0.20 and 0.39 Nm. If soldering is used, mount the mounting nut first. Lead wires and mounds of solder may make it impossible to mount the nut after soldering. Panel Mounting nut Socket Mounting Groove of the Display After securing the Switch to the panel using the mounting nut, insert the Socket into the Switch. Align the positioning holes of the Socket with the projections of the Switch before inserting the Socket. Panel Note: 1. Push the projections on the Lamp into the grooves on the Pushbutton/Display. 2. The Lamp for Lighted Pushbutton Switches moves, but the Lamp for Indicators is fixed. Mounting Direction for the Pushbutton/Display and Switch Insert the Pushbutton/Display into the Switch so that the lamp guide is aligned with the non-projecting part of the Switch. Apply a pressure between 9.8 and 24.5 N. Projection of the Switch Note: 44 1. The mounting direction for Indicators is 180 to that for Lighted Pushbutton Switches. Be sure to insert the Legend Plate and other parts with the correct orientation. Projection of the Switch Positioning hole of the Socket A3C A3C Mounting the Insulation Cover After securing the Switch to the panel using the mounting nut, pass the lead wires through the holes in the Insulation Cover and then perform wiring. Hold the Insulation Cover so that the cylindrical hole is facing the Switch, and insert the lead wires from the end with the barriers. After wiring is completed, mount the Insulation Cover by pushing it into the Switch. Insulation Cover attached to Switch Switch terminal Mounting the Dust Cover 1. The Dust Cover separates into 2 parts: the cap and the mounting frame. 2. Insert the Switch into the mounting frame. (Align the lock projection with the recess on the mounting frame.) 3. Insert the Switch in the state described in step 2 into the panel. (Align the lock protrusion on the mounting frame with the hole in the panel.) 4. Mount the mounting nut from the back of the panel and tighten it. 5. Insert the cap into the mounting frame. Ensure that the entire perimeter of the cap is properly inserted into the mounting frame by pressing down on the cap from different directions. Cap (transparent) Mounting frame Mounting nut Panel Switch Lock protrusions Mounting the Switch Guard 1. Insert the Switch into the Switch Guard. 2. Insert the Switch into the panel in the state described in step 1. 3. Mount the mounting nut from the back of the panel and tighten it. Mounting nut Panel Holder (black) Guard (transparent) 45 A3C A3C Precautions ! Caution Do not apply a voltage higher than the maximum rated operating voltage between the lamp terminals, as there is a risk that the incandescent lamp or LED lamp will be damaged, and the Pushbutton will be ejected. When replacing the incandescent lamp, first turn OFF the power supply, and then wait 10 minutes before performing replacement, as the lamp is still hot immediately after the power is turned OFF, so there is a risk of burns. Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on page 14. Using Microloads Using a standard load switch for opening and closing a microload circuit may cause wear on the contacts. Use the switch within the operating range. (Refer to the diagram below.) Even when using microload models within the operating range shown below, if inrush current occurs when the contact is opened or closed, it may cause the contact surface to become rough, and so decrease life expectancy. Therefore, insert a contact protection circuit where necessary. The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability level of 60% ( 60) (conforming to JIS C5003). The equation, 60 = 0.5 x 10-4/times indicates that the estimated malfunction rate is less than 1/2,000,000 with a reliability level of 60%. Voltage (V) Correct Use Mounting To prevent electric shock or a fire, always make sure that the power is turned OFF before mounting, removing, or wiring the Switch, or performing maintenance. Do not tighten the mounting ring excessively using pliers or a similar tool. Excessive tightening may damage the mounting ring. (Tightening torque: 0.20 to 0.39 Nm) Wiring When wiring, use wires of a size appropriate for the applied voltage and carry current. Perform soldering correctly under the conditions given below. Using the Switch with the wires soldered incorrectly may cause the terminals to become abnormally hot and cause a fire. 1. Hand soldering: At 30 W within 5 seconds. 2. Dip soldering: At 240C within 3 seconds. Wait for one minute after soldering before exerting any external force on the solder. Use a non-corrosive rosin liquid for the flux. Perform wiring so that the wire sheaths do not come into contact with the Switch. If this is unavoidable, use wires that can withstand temperatures of 100C min. After wiring to the Switch has been completed, ensure an appropriate insulation distance. Operating Environment Do not use in locations that are subject to dust, oil, or metal filings as these may penetrate the interior of the Switch and cause malfunction. 30 0.15 mA 26 mA 100 mA 24 Microload area Standard load area 12 Invalid area 5 1 mA 100 mA 150 mA 0 Current (mA) LED Resistance to limit the LED current is provided internally and so an external resistance is not required. Internal limiting resistance Rated voltage 5 VDC 33 12 VDC 270 24 VDC 1600 ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A030-E1-05 46 Indicator M2C Indicator with Cylindrical 20-mm x 12-dia. Body Same basic design as the A3C Pushbutton Switch. Good illumination with even surface brightness. Cylindrical body means panel cutouts can be made easily. UL (E41515) and CSA (LR45258) approved. RC Ordering Information Model Number Legend: The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Display, Lamp, and Socket Unit. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) M 2 C J - 9 0 A 1 - 24E R (1) Shape of Display Symbol J A T Shape Rectangular Square Round (2) Terminal Type (3) Lighting Type Symbol Terminal type Symbol Lighting type 0 Solder terminals 1 Illumination only Colored-illumination models are also available. For details, refer to page 49. "Colored-illumination" models operate in the way shown below: Unlit White (4) Lighting Method LED lamp-lighted Models Symbol 05E Operating voltage 5 VDC 12E 12 VDC 24E 24 VDC Incandescent Lamplighted Models Symbol Operating voltage (5) Color of Display For LED lamp Symbol Color R Red Y Yellow G Green W White For incandescent lamp Lit 06 5 VAC/VDC Color 14 12 VAC/VDC R Red 28 24 VAC/VDC Y Yellow G Green The built-in LED is colored. Symbol Color A Blue W White 47 M2C M2C List of Models Appearance Model Rectangular M2CJ Square M2CA Round M2CT Ordering as a Set The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following tables. One set comprises the Display, Lamp, and Socket Unit. Rectangular Models Square Models Round Models Indicators (Solder Terminals) Appearance Rectangular g ((M2CJ)) Lighting LED lamp p Model number (for set) M2CJ-90A1-05Ej M2CJ-90A1-12Ej M2CJ-90A1-24Ej Incandescent lamp M2CJ-90A1-06j M2CJ-90A1-14j M2CJ-90A1-28j Square q ((M2CA)) LED lamp p M2CA-90A1-05Ej M2CA-90A1-12Ej M2CA-90A1-24Ej Incandescent lamp M2CA-90A1-06j M2CA-90A1-14j M2CA-90A1-28j Round (M2CT) ( ) LED lamp p M2CT-90A1-05Ej M2CT-90A1-12Ej M2CT-90A1-24Ej Incandescent lamp M2CT-90A1-06j M2CT-90A1-14j M2CT-90A1-28j Note: 48 Enter the desired color symbol for the Display in the j at the end of the model number. Display color symbol R: red Y yellow Y: ello G: green W: white R: red Y: yellow G: green W: white A: blue R: red Y yellow Y: ello G: green W: white R: red Y: yellow G: green W: white A: blue R: red Y yellow Y: ello G: green W: white R: red Y: yellow G: green W: white A: blue M2C M2C Illumination-only and Colored-illumination LED Models "Illumination only" describes LED models for which the screen color is the same whether the LED is lit or not. The screen simply becomes brighter when the LED lights. Example: Red LED Cap (red) Not lit Red Display Legend plate (milky white) Lit Reflective plunger Red LED lamp (red) Lamp "Colored illumination" describes LED models for which the screen color is white when the LED is not lit and changes to the color of the LED lamp when the LED is lit. Example: Red LED White cap (semi-transparent) Not lit White Legend plate (milky white) Display Lit Reflective plunger Red LED lamp (red) Lamp Ordering: With colored-illumination models, order the Display, Lamp, and Socket Unit as shown in the following table. Illuminated color Display Lamp (LED) Red IP40 A3Cj-500W A16-jDR Yellow Enter one of the following symbols in j. J: Rectangular A: Square T: Round A16-jDY Green Enter one of the following symbols in j. 5: 5 VDC 12: 12 VDC 24: 24 VDC Socket Unit Refer to the following information. Order the Socket Unit that is appropriate for the Display. A16-jDG 49 M2C M2C Ordering Individually Displays, Lamps, and Socket Units can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual Units. Also, store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs. Display Rectangular Square Round Lamp LED Lamp Incandescent lamp Socket Unit Rectangular 50 Square Round M2C M2C Display (Lighted Models) Incandescent Lamp LED Lamp Button color Rectangular Square Round Button color Rectangular Square Round Red A3CJ-500R A3CA-500R A3CT-500R Red A3CJ-500R A3CA-500R A3CT-500R Yellow A3CJ-500Y A3CA-500Y A3CT-500Y Yellow A3CJ-500Y A3CA-500Y A3CT-500Y Green A3CJ-500GY A3CA-500GY A3CT-500GY Green A3CJ-500G A3CA-500G A3CT-500G White A3CJ-500W A3CA-500W A3CT-500W White A3CJ-500W A3CA-500W A3CT-500W Blue A3CJ-500A A3CA-500A A3CT-500A Note: The red, yellow, and white Displays listed above can be used with either LED lamp-lighted models or incandescent lamp-lighted models. Lamp LED Lamp Incandescent Lamp Rated voltage Color 5 VDC Model Rated voltage 12 VDC 24 VDC 6 VAC/VDC A16-5 Red A16-5DR A16-12DR A16-24DR 14 VAC/VDC A16-12 Yellow A16-5DY A16-12DY A16-24DY 28 VAC/VDC A16-24 Green A16-5DG A16-12DG A16-24DG White A16-5DW A16-12DW A16-24DW Socket Unit Sealing IP40 Appearance Terminal Solder terminals M2CJ-7001 M2CA-7001 M2CT-7001 Accessories The accessories for the A3C Lighted Pushbutton Switch can also be used with the M2C. Refer to page 38. Specifications Ratings LED Lamp Rated voltage Incandescent Lamp Rated current Operating voltage Internal limiting resistance 5 VDC 30 mA 5 VDC 5% 33 12 VDC 15 mA 12 VDC 5% 270 24 VDC 10 mA 24 VDC 5% 1,600 Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage 6 VAC/VDC 60 mA 5 VAC/VDC 14 VAC/VDC 40 mA 12 VAC/VDC 28 VAC/VDC 24 mA 24 VAC/VDC Characteristics Ambient operating temperature -10_C to 55_C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient operating humidity 35% to 85% Ambient storage temperature -25_C to 65_C Approved Standards UL, CSA 51 M2C M2C Nomenclature Color cap Legend plate (milky white) Reflective plunger Display Color of Display Shape of Display * LED Lamp-lighted Models: Red, yellow, green, white * Incandescent Lamp-lighted Models: Red, yellow, green, white, blue Rectangular (M2CJ) Round (M2CT) Square (M2CA) Lamp LED Lamp Incandescent Lamp Socket Unit Note: 52 The M2CJ model is shown here as a representative example. M2C M2C Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. Rectangular Models (M2CJ) Square Models (M2CA) Round Models (M2CT) 14 dia.11.8 dia. Note: Unless specified, there is a tolerance of 0.4 mm for dimensions. Operation Panel Cutout (Top View) Accessories used Rectangular/M2CJ Indicator Unit only 12 dia.+0.2 0 19 min. Square/M2CA, Round/M2CT 2 dia. (Lock hole) 12 dia.+0.2 0 15 min. 15 min. Note: Note: With Dust Cover Recommended panel thickness: 1.0 to 3.2 mm. Recommended panel thickness: 1.0 to 3.2 mm. 12 dia.+0.2 0 23.5 min. 2 dia. --- 19.5 min. Note: If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating. Terminal Connections Type Terminal SPST-NO+SPST-NC Solder terminal Lighted and non-lighted models Terminal Hole Dimensions Terminal Arrangement (bottom view) Lamp terminal (t0.3) 53 M2C M2C Precautions Correct Use Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on page 14. Refer to Correct Use for A3C on page 46. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A123-E1-02 54 Pushbutton Switch A16 Mounting Aperture of 16 mm * Modular construction (Pushbutton + Case + Lamp + Switch) * Wide Variety of Control and Signal Devices: Lighted, Non-Lighted, and Buzzer * UL and cUL approved. * Conforms to EN60947-5-1, IEC947-5-1 * Quick and easy assembly, snap-in Switch. * Wide range of switching capacity from standard to microload * High reliability, IP65 * Short mounting depth, less than 28.5 mm below panel Model Number Structure Model Number Legend Completely Assembled The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Pushbutton, Lamp (lighted models only), Case, and Switch. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) A 1 6 5 L - J R M - 24D - 2 (1) Degree of Protection (7) Contact Configuration Symbol Type Symbol Protection No symbol IP40 1 SPDT 5 IP65 oil-resistant 2 DPDT 1P SPDT 2P DPDT 2S DPDT (2) Lighted/Non-lighted Symbol Type No symbol L Non-lighted Lighted Rectangular 2-way guard A Square 2-way guard T Round Projecting model PCB Terminal Screw-Less Clamp (6) Light Source Shape J Solder Terminal Only DPDT contacts are available with Screw-Less Clamp. (3) Shape of Pushbutton Symbol Terminal (4) Color of Pushbutton Symbol Color (5) Switch Operation Symbol Symbol Operation Momentary 5 Alternate 12 Operating voltage Type Rated voltage Non-lighted No symbol R Red M Y Yellow A PY Pure yellow 24 24 VAC/VDC 28 VAC/VDC G Green 5D 5 5% VDC 5 VDC W White 12D 12 5% VDC 12 VDC A Blue 24D 24 5% VDC 24 VDC B Black (non-lighted models only) "Colored-illumination" models operate in the way shown below: Unlit Lit White Color The built-in LED is colored. Momentary-action: Self-resetting Alternate-action: Self-holding Incandescent lamp LED 5 VAC/VDC 6 VAC/VDC 12 VAC/VDC 14 VAC/VDC Voltage Reduction Unit (24-V Built-in LED) Symbol T1 T2 Type LED Operating voltage Rated voltage 90 to 121 VAC/VDC 110 VAC 180 to 242 VAC/VDC 220 VAC Note: 1. Solder terminals are available only with 100-V models. 2. The Voltage Reduction Unit is not available for models with PCB terminals. 3. "T2" is available only for the Screw-Less Clamp type. 55 Neon lamps are not available with models that are ordered as a set. They must be ordered individually if required. Refer to page 62. Model Lighted Pushbutton Switches Non-lighted Pushbutton Switches Pushbutton Rectangular Rectangular Square Square Round Round Lamp LED lamp Incandescent lamp Case Switch Solder Terminals (Without Voltage Reduction Unit) Note: There is no Lamp with non-lighted models. Subassembled 1. Pushbutton Non-lighted/Lighted A16@L-@@ 1 2 3 1. Degree of Protection None: IP40 5: IP65 2. Flange Shape J: Rectangular T: Round A: Square 3. Illumination Color for Non-lighted Models R: Red G: Green Y: Yellow W: White A: Blue B: Black 56 Illumination Color for Lighted Models LED/Incandescent Lamp R: Red Y: Yellow PY: Pure yellow W: White A: Blue LED GY: Green Incandescent Lamp G: Green 2. Lamp A16-@@ 1 2 1. Operating Voltage (Rated Voltage) Incandescent Lamp 5: 5 VAC/VDC (6 VAC/VDC) 12: 12 VAC/VDC (14 VAC/VDC) 24: 24 VAC/VDC (28 VAC/VDC) LED 5DS: 5 VDC (5 VDC) 12DS:12 VDC (12 VDC) 24DS:24 VDC (24 VDC) 2. Illumination Color None: Incandescent Lamp R: Red (LED) G: Green (LED) Y: Yellow (LED) W: White (LED) A: Blue (LED) 3. Case A16@-@@ 1 2 3 1. Degree of Protection None: IP40 5: IP65 Oil-resistant 2. Flange Shape CJ: Rectangular CT: Round CA: Square 3. Switch Action M: Momentary A: Alternate 4. Switch (Solder Terminals) A16-@-@ 1 2 1. Voltage Reduction Circuit (Operating Voltage/Rated Voltage) None: Without Voltage Reduction Unit T1: 100 VAC/110 VAC 2. Contacts 1: SPDT 2: DPDT 5. Socket (Solder Terminals Only) M16-@ 1 1. Voltage Reduction Circuit (Operating Voltage/Rated Voltage) 0: Without Voltage Reduction Unit T1: 100 VAC/110 VAC 57 Ordering Information List of Models Ordering as a Set The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following tables. One set comprises the Pushbutton, Lamp (lighted models only), Case, and Switch. A16@-J (Rectangular) Models Solder Terminal Models IP40 Output SPDT Lighting Operating voltage LED 5 VDC without Voltage 12 VDC Reduction Unit 24 VDC Incandescent lamp Alternate operation (Self-holding) A16L-J@M-5D-1 A16L-J@A-5D-1 A16L-J@M-12D-1 A16L-J@A-12D-1 A16L-J@M-24D-1 A16L-J@A-24D-1 5 VDC/VAC A16L-J@M-5-1 A16L-J@A-5-1 12 VDC/VAC A16L-J@M-12-1 A16L-J@A-12-1 24 VDC/VAC DPDT Momentary operation (Self-resetting) A16L-J@M-24-1 A16L-J@A-24-1 Non-lighted A16-J@M-1 A16-J@A-1 LED 5 VDC without Voltage 12 VDC Reduction Unit 24 VDC A16L-J@M-5D-2 A16L-J@A-5D-2 A16L-J@M-12D-2 A16L-J@A-12D-2 A16L-J@M-24D-2 A16L-J@A-24D-2 5 VDC/VAC A16L-J@M-5-2 A16L-J@A-5-2 12 VDC/VAC A16L-J@M-12-2 A16L-J@A-12-2 Incandescent lamp 24 VDC/VAC Non-lighted A16L-J@M-24-2 A16L-J@A-24-2 A16-J@M-2 A16-J@A-2 Pushbutton color symbol (See note 1.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green A: blue W: white R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 2.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green A: blue W: white R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 2.) IP65 Oil-resistant Output SPDT Lighting Operating voltage LED 5 VDC without Voltage 12 VDC Reduction Unit 24 VDC Incandescent lamp A165L-J@M-5D-1 A165L-J@A-5D-1 A165L-J@M-12D-1 A165L-J@A-12D-1 A165L-J@M-24D-1 A165L-J@A-24D-1 A165L-J@M-5-1 A165L-J@A-5-1 12 VDC/VAC A165L-J@M-12-1 A165L-J@A-12-1 A165L-J@M-24-1 A165L-J@A-24-1 Non-lighted A165-J@M-1 A165-J@A-1 LED 5 VDC without Voltage 12 VDC Reduction Unit 24 VDC A165L-J@M-5D-2 A165L-J@A-5D-2 A165L-J@M-12D-2 A165L-J@A-12D-2 A165L-J@M-24D-2 A165L-J@A-24D-2 Incandescent lamp 5 VDC/VAC A165L-J@M-5-2 A165L-J@A-5-2 12 VDC/VAC A165L-J@M-12-2 A165L-J@A-12-2 24 VDC/VAC Non-lighted A165L-J@M-24-2 A165L-J@A-24-2 A165-J@M-2 A165-J@A-2 Note: 1. Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in the @. 2. Black ("B") Pushbuttons are only available for non-lighted models. 58 Alternate operation (Self-holding) 5 VDC/VAC 24 VDC/VAC DPDT Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Pushbutton color symbol (See note 1.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green A: blue W: white R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 2.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green A: blue W: white R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 2.) A16@-A (Square) Models Solder Terminal Models IP40 Output SPDT Lighting Operating voltage LED 5 VDC without Voltage 12 VDC Reduction Unit 24 VDC Incandescent lamp Alternate operation (Self-holding) A16L-A@M-5D-1 A16L-A@A-5D-1 A16L-A@M-12D-1 A16L-A@A-12D-1 A16L-A@M-24D-1 A16L-A@A-24D-1 5 VDC/VAC A16L-A@M-5-1 A16L-A@A-5-1 12 VDC/VAC A16L-A@M-12-1 A16L-A@A-12-1 24 VDC/VAC DPDT Momentary operation (Self-resetting) A16L-A@M-24-1 A16L-A@A-24-1 Non-lighted A16-A@M-1 A16-A@A-1 LED 5 VDC without Voltage 12 VDC Reduction Unit 24 VDC A16L-A@M-5D-2 A16L-A@A-5D-2 A16L-A@M-12D-2 A16L-A@A-12D-2 A16L-A@M-24D-2 A16L-A@A-24D-2 Incandescent lamp 5 VDC/VAC A16L-A@M-5-2 A16L-A@A-5-2 12 VDC/VAC A16L-A@M-12-2 A16L-A@A-12-2 A16L-A@M-24-2 A16L-A@A-24-2 A16-A@M-2 A16-A@A-2 24 VDC/VAC Non-lighted Pushbutton color symbol (See note 1.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green A: blue W: white R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 2.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green A: blue W: white R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 2.) IP65 Oil-resistant Output SPDT Lighting Operating voltage LED 5 VDC without Voltage 12 VDC Reduction Unit 24 VDC Incandescent lamp Alternate operation (Self-holding) A165L-A@M-5D-1 A165L-A@A-5D-1 A165L-A@M-12D-1 A165L-A@A-12D-1 A165L-A@M-24D-1 A165L-A@A-24D-1 5 VDC/VAC A165L-A@M-5-1 A165L-A@A-5-1 12 VDC/VAC A165L-A@M-12-1 A165L-A@A-12-1 24 VDC/VAC DPDT Momentary operation (Self-resetting) A165L-A@M-24-1 A165L-A@A-24-1 Non-lighted A165-A@M-1 A165-A@A-1 LED 5 VDC without Voltage 12 VDC Reduction Unit 24 VDC A165L-A@M-5D-2 A165L-A@A-5D-2 A165L-A@M-12D-2 A165L-A@A-12D-2 A165L-A@M-24D-2 A165L-A@A-24D-2 Incandescent lamp 5 VDC/VAC A165L-A@M-5-2 A165L-A@A-5-2 12 VDC/VAC A165L-A@M-12-2 A165L-A@A-12-2 24 VDC/VAC Non-lighted A165L-A@M-24-2 A165L-A@A-24-2 A165-A@M-2 A165-A@A-2 Pushbutton color symbol (See note 1.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green A: blue W: white R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 2.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green A: blue W: white R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 2.) Note: 1. Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in the @. 2. Black ("B") Pushbuttons are only available for non-lighted models. 59 A16@-T (Round) Models Solder Terminals IP40 Output SPDT Lighting Operating voltage LED 5 VDC without Voltage 12 VDC Reduction Unit 24 VDC Incandescent lamp Alternate operation (Self-holding) A16L-T@M-5D-1 A16L-T@A-5D-1 A16L-T@M-12D-1 A16L-T@A-12D-1 A16L-T@M-24D-1 A16L-T@A-24D-1 5 VDC/VAC A16L-T@M-5-1 A16L-T@A-5-1 12 VDC/VAC A16L-T@M-12-1 A16L-T@A-12-1 24 VDC/VAC DPDT Momentary operation (Self-resetting) A16L-T@M-24-1 A16L-T@A-24-1 Non-lighted A16-T@M-1 A16-T@A-1 LED 5 VDC without Voltage 12 VDC Reduction Unit 24 VDC A16L-T@M-5D-2 A16L-T@A-5D-2 A16L-T@M-12D-2 A16L-T@A-12D-2 A16L-T@M-24D-2 A16L-T@A-24D-2 Incandescent lamp 5 VDC/VAC A16L-T@M-5-2 A16L-T@A-5-2 12 VDC/VAC A16L-T@M-12-2 A16L-T@A-12-2 24 VDC/VAC Non-lighted A16L-T@M-24-2 A16L-T@A-24-2 A16-T@M-2 A16-T@A-2 Pushbutton color symbol (See note 1.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green A: blue W: white R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 2.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green A: blue W: white R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 2.) IP65 Oil-resistant Output SPDT Lighting Operating voltage LED 5 VDC without Voltage 12 VDC Reduction Unit 24 VDC Incandescent lamp A165L-T@M-5D-1 A165L-T@A-5D-1 A165L-T@M-12D-1 A165L-T@A-12D-1 A165L-T@M-24D-1 A165L-T@A-24D-1 5 VDC/VAC A165L-T@M-5-1 A165L-T@A-5-1 A165L-T@M-12-1 A165L-T@A-12-1 A165L-T@M-24-1 A165L-T@A-24-1 Non-lighted A165-T@M-1 A165-T@A-1 LED 5 VDC without Voltage 12 VDC Reduction Unit 24 VDC A165L-T@M-5D-2 A165L-T@A-5D-2 A165L-T@M-12D-2 A165L-T@A-12D-2 A165L-T@M-24D-2 A165L-T@A-24D-2 Incandescent lamp 5 VDC/VAC A165L-T@M-5-2 A165L-T@A-5-2 12 VDC/VAC A165L-T@M-12-2 A165L-T@A-12-2 24 VDC/VAC Non-lighted A165L-T@M-24-2 A165L-T@A-24-2 A165-T@M-2 A165-T@A-2 Note: 1. Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in the @. 2. Black ("B") Pushbuttons are only available for non-lighted models. 60 Alternate operation (Self-holding) 12 VDC/VAC 24 VDC/VAC DPDT Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Pushbutton color symbol (See note 1.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green A: blue W: white R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 2.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green A: blue W: white R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 2.) Other Models Models with Reduced-voltage Lighting and Solder Terminals IP40 Output Lighting Operating voltage 100/110 VAC/VDC LED (with built-in reduced-voltage lighting 100/110 VAC/VDC function) SPDT DPDT Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding) A16L-@M-T1-1 A16L-@A-T1-1 A16L-@M-T1-2 A16L-@A-T1-2 Pushbutton color symbol (See note 1.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue IP65 Output Lighting Operating voltage 100/110 VAC/VDC LED (with built-in reduced-voltage lighting 100/110 VAC/VDC function) SPDT DPDT Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding) A165L-@M-T1-1 A165L-@A-T1-1 A165L-@M-T1-2 A165L-@A-T1-2 Pushbutton color symbol (See note 1.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue Note: 1. Enter the desired shape for the Pushbutton in : J (rectangular), A (square), or T (round). Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in the @. 2. Models with rated voltage 200 to 220 VAC/VDC (T2 models) are only available with Screw-Less Clamps. Screw-Less Clamp Models IP40 Output DPDT Lighting LED Operating voltage Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding) 5 VDC A16L-@M-5D-2S A16L-@A-5D-2S 12 VDC A16L-@M-12D-2S A16L-@A-12D-2S A16L-@M-24D-2S A16L-@A-24D-2S LED (with built-in re- 100/110 VAC/VDC duced-voltage lighting 200/220 VAC/VDC function) A16L-@M-T1-2S A16L-@A-T1-2S A16L-@M-T2-2S A16L-@A-T2-2S Non-lighted A16-@M-2S A16-@A-2S 24 VDC Pushbutton color symbol (See note 1.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 2.) IP65 Output DPDT Lighting LED Operating voltage Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding) 5 VDC A165L-@M-5D-2S A165L-@A-5D-2S 12 VDC A165L-@M-12D-2S A165L-@A-12D-2S A165L-@M-24D-2S A165L-@A-24D-2S LED (with built-in re- 100/110 VAC/VDC duced-voltage light- 200/220 VAC/VDC ing function) A165L-@M-T1-2S A165L-@A-T1-2S A165L-@M-T2-2S A165L-@A-T2-2S Non-lighted A165-@M-2S A165-@A-2S 24 VDC Pushbutton color symbol (See note 1.) R: red Y: yellow PY: pure yellow G: green W: white A: blue B: black (See note 2.) Note: 1. Enter the desired shape for the Pushbutton in : J (rectangular), A (square), or T (round). Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in the @. 2. Black ("B") Pushbuttons are only available for non-lighted models. 61 Ordering Individually Pushbuttons, Lamps, Cases, and Switches (Sockets) can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual Units. Also, store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs. Pushbutton Rectangular Models Square Models Round Models Note: Use IP40 Pushbuttons with IP40 Switches and use IP65 Pushbuttons with IP65 Switches. There is no Legend Plate built into the Pushbutton Case Lighted Models Non-lighted Models Lamp LED Incandescent lamp Socket Solder terminals (no transformer) Lighted/non-lighted 62 Pushbuttons Illumination: red, yellow, and white use either LED or incandescent lamps. LED Degree of protection IP40 Rectangular Oil-resistant IP65 Square Round Rectangular Square Round Color Red A16L-JR A16L-AR A16L-TR A165L-JR A165L-AR A165L-TR Yellow A16L-JY A16L-AY A16L-TY A165L-JY A165L-AY A165L-TY Pure yellow A16L-JPY A16L-APY A16L-TPY A165L-JPY A165L-APY A165L-TPY Green A16L-JGY A16L-AGY A16L-TGY A165L-JGY A165L-AGY A165L-TGY White A16L-JW A16L-AW A16L-TW A165L-JW A165L-AW A165L-TW Blue A16L-JA A16L-AA A16L-TA A165L-JA A165L-AA A165L-TA Incandescent Lamps (With the exception of green, the Units are the same as for LEDs.) Degree of protection IP40 Rectangular Oil-resistant IP65 Square Round Rectangular Square Round Color Red A16L-JR A16L-AR A16L-TR A165L-JR A165L-AR A165L-TR Yellow A16L-JY A16L-AY A16L-TY A165L-JY A165L-AY A165L-TY Pure yellow A16L-JPY A16L-APY A16L-TPY A165L-JPY A165L-APY A165L-TPY Green A16L-JG A16L-AG A16L-TG A165L-JG A165L-AG A165L-TG White A16L-JW A16L-AW A16L-TW A165L-JW A165L-AW A165L-TW Blue A16L-JA A16L-AA A16L-TA A165L-JA A165L-AA A165L-TA Non-lighted (Same as Units for incandescent lamps.) Degree of protection IP40 Rectangular Square Oil-resistant IP65 Round Rectangular Square Round Color Red A16L-JR A16L-AR A16L-TR A165L-JR A165L-AR A165L-TR Yellow A16L-JY A16L-AY A16L-TY A165L-JY A165L-AY A165L-TY Pure yellow A16L-JPY A16L-APY A16L-TPY A165L-JPY A165L-APY A165L-TPY Green A16L-JG A16L-AG A16L-TG A165L-JG A165L-AG A165L-TG White A16L-JW A16L-AW A16L-TW A165L-JW A165L-AW A165L-TW Blue A16L-JA A16L-AA A16L-TA A165L-JA A165L-AA A165L-TA Black A16L-JB A16L-AB A16L-TB A165L-JB A165L-AB A165L-TB 63 Switches Appearance Classification Lighted/non-lighted (common use) Standard load/microload (common use) Model SPDT Solder terminal A16-1 DPDT SPDT A16-2 PCB terminal A16-1P DPDT DPDT A16-2P Screw-Less Clamp A16-2S Solder terminal A16-T1-1 Switches with Reduced-voltage Lighting Appearance Classification 100 V Standard load/microload (common use) 100 V Model SPDT DPDT DPDT A16-T1-2 Screw-less clamp A16-T1-2S 200 V A16-T2-2S Lamps LED 5 VDC Operating voltage 12 VDC 24 VDC Light color Red A16-5DSR A16-12DSR A16-24DSR Yellow A16-5DSY A16-12DSY A16-24DSY Green A16-5DSG A16-12DSG A16-24DSG White (See note.) A16-5DSW A16-12DSW A16-24DSW Blue A16-5DA A16-12DA A16-24DA Note: Use the white LED together with white or pure yellow Pushbuttons. Incandescent Lamp 5 VAC/VDC Operating voltage Model 64 A16-5 12 VAC/VDC A16-12 24 VAC/VDC A16-24 Cases Appearance Classification IP40 Momentary operation Alternate operation Oil-resistant IP65 Momentary operation Alternate operation Model Rectangular (2-way guard) A16-CJM Square A16-CAM Round A16-CTM Rectangular (2-way guard) A16-CJA Square A16-CAA Round A16-CTA Rectangular (2-way guard) A165-CJM Square A165-CAM Round A165-CTM Rectangular (2-way guard) A165-CJA Square A165-CAA Round A165-CTA Accessories (Order Separately) Accessories Name Switch Guards Dust Covers Panel Plugs Appearance Classification Model For rectangular models A16ZJ-5050 For square and round models A16ZA-5050 For rectangular models A16ZJ-5060 For square models A16ZA-5060 For round models A16ZT-5060 For rectangular models A16ZJ-3003 For square models A16ZA-3003 For round models A16ZT-3003 Remarks Cannot be used with the Dust Cover. Cannot be used with the Switch Guard. Used for covering the panel cutouts for future panel expansion. Protective structure: IP40 Color: Black 65 Replacements Name Appearance Legend Plates Classification Rectangular IP40 Square Round Color Caps (for IP40) Transparent A16ZJ-5202 A16ZJ-5203 IP40 Milky A16ZA-5204 Transparent A16ZA-5202 Oil-resis- Milky tant IP65 Transparent A16ZA-5203 IP40 A16ZT-5204 A16ZA-5204 Milky A16ZT-5202 Oil-resis- Milky tant IP65 Transparent A16ZT-5204 A16ZT-5203 White A16Z@-5001W Red A16Z@-5001R Yellow A16Z@-5001Y Pure yellow A16Z@-5001PY Blue A16Z@-5001A LED indicator Green A16Z@-5001GY Incandescent lamp/ non-lighted Green A16Z@-5001G Non-lighted Black A16Z@-5011B LED indicator/incandescent lamp/nonlighted White A16Z@-5101W Red A16Z@-5101R Yellow A16Z@-5101Y Pure yellow A16Z@-5101PY Blue A16Z@-5101A LED indicator Green A16Z@-5101GY Incandescent lamp/ non-lighted Green A16Z@-5101G Non-lighted Black A16Z@-5111B Round Remarks A single Legend Plate (transparent) is included with a standard model. The milky Legend Plate can be used with the IP40 and oil-resistant IP65. A16ZJ-5204 Transparent Rectangular Square A16ZJ-5204 Oil-resis- Milky tant IP65 Transparent LED indicator/incandescent lamp/nonlighted Color Caps (for oil-resistant IP65) Model Milky Insert one of the following letters into the box (@). J: Rectangular A: Square T: Round The Color Cap is usually supplied. Replace the Cap if the color is to be changed. When using an LED indicator, be sure to use a Color Cap that matches the luminescent color of the LED. The materials used for the IP40 and oil-resistant IP65 are different so be sure to use a Color Cap that matches the specifications of the Switch. Tools Name Appearance Model Applicable types Pushbutton Knob-type Switch Selector Switch Key-type Selector Switch Emergency Stop Switch Remarks Indicator Extractor A3PJ-5080 Yes No No No Yes Convenient for extracting Pushbutton Switches Screw Fitting A16Z-3004 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Convenient for ganged installation. Tighten to a torque of 0.39 N m min. Extractor A16Z-5080 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Convenient for extracting the Switch and Lamps. 66 Specifications Approved Standards Agency Standards File No. UL, cUL (See note.) UL508 E41515 --- EN60947-5-1 --- Note: cUL: CSA, C22.2 No. 14 Approved Standard Ratings UL, cUL (File No. E41515) 5 A at 125 VAC, 3 A at 250 VAC (general use) 3 A at 30 VDC (resistive) EN60947-5-1 (Low Voltage Directive) 3 A at 250 VAC (AC12), 3 A at 30 VDC (DC12) Ratings Contacts Super-bright LED AC resistive load 3 A at 250 VAC 5 A at 125 VAC DC resistive load Rated voltage 3 A at 30 VDC Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC Rated values are obtained from tests conducted under the following conditions. 1. 2. 3. 4. Load: Resistive load Mounting conditions: No vibration and no shock Temperature: 202C Operating frequency: 20 operations/min Rated current Operating voltage Internal limiting resistor 5 VDC 30 mA (red: 15 mA) 5 VDC5% 33 (blue: 51 , red: 68 ) 12 VDC 15 mA 12 VDC5% 270 (blue: 270 , red: 560 ) 24 VDC 10 mA 24 VDC5% 1600 (blue: 1.8 k, red 2 k) Note: The values in parentheses are for models with blue or red Pushbuttons. Incandescent Lamp Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage 6 VAC/VDC 60 mA 5 VAC/VDC 14 VAC/VDC 40 mA 12 VAC/VDC 28 VAC/VDC 24 mA 24 VAC/VDC Characteristics Item Allowable operating frequency Pushbutton Switch Mechanical Momentary operation: Alternate operation: Electrical 20 operations/minute max. (See note 1.) 120 operations/minute max. 60 operations/minute max. (See note 1.) Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different polarity and also between each terminal and ground 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between lamp terminals (See note 2.) Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (malfunction within 1 ms) Shock resistance Destruction 500 m/s2 Durability Malfunction 150 m/s2 max. (malfunction within 1 ms) Mechanical Momentary operation: Alternate operation: Electrical 100,000 operations min. (See note 1.) 2,000,000 operations min. 200,000 operations min. (See note 1.) Ambient temperature Operating: Storage: -10C to 55C (with no icing or condensation) -25C to 65C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85% Electric shock protection class Class II PTI (tracking characteristic) 175 Degree of contamination 3 (IEC947-5-1) Weight Approx. 10 g (in the case of a lighted DPDT switch with solder terminals) Note: 1. Set and reset constitute one operation. 2. With LED and incandescent lamp not mounted. 67 Screw-Less Clamp Item Screw-Less Clamp Recommended wire size Usable wires and tensile strength 0.5 mm2 twisted wire or 0.8 mm-dia. solid wire Twisted wire 0.3 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.75 mm2 1.25 mm2 Solid wire 0.5 mm dia. 0.8 mm dia. 1.0 mm dia. --- Tensile strength 10 N 20 N 30 N 40 N 10 1 mm Length of exposed wire Operating Characteristics Type Pushbutton Switch IP40 Features Operating force (OF) max. 4.41 N Releasing force (RF) min. 0.29 N Total travel (TT) Approx. 3 mm Pretravel (PT) max. 2.5 mm Oil-resistant IP65 4.91 N Lock stroke (LTA) min. (See note.) 0.5 mm Note: Lock stroke is only for alternate operation. Contact Form Name Contact DPDT NC COM NO 68 Nomenclature Color of Pushbutton * LED/incandescent models Red, green, yellow, white, blue * Neon models Red, green, white * Non-lighted models Red, green, yellow, white, blue, black Pushbutton Cap Legend plate Dispersion plate Degree of Protection * IP40/Oil-resistant IP65 Reflective plunger Flange Shape Lamp Rectangular (A16@-J) Switch * Switch Ratings 5 A at 125 VAC 3 A at 250 VAC 3 A at 30 VDC Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC Square (A16@-A) Terminal Type Round (A16@-T) * Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) * PCB terminals * Screw-Less Clamp 69 Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. Lighted/Non-lighted Pushbutton Switches without Voltage Reduction Unit The lamp terminal is also provided with non-lighted models. Solder terminals and tab terminals (#110) can be both used with Lighted and Non-lighted Pushbutton Switches. Rectangular A16@-J Panel Cutouts See page 77 for panel cutouts Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) Lamp terminal 16 +0.2 0 dia. 24 min. 19 min. Lock ring Mounting nut Lamp terminals Packing (t0.5) (for oil-resistant IP65 only) Square A16@-A Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) Lamp terminals Panel Cutouts See page 77 for panel cutouts 16 +0.2 0 dia. 19 min. Lock ring Mounting nut Lamp terminals 19 min. Packing (t0.5) (for oil-resistant IP65 only) Round A16@-T Panel Cutouts See page 77 for panel cutouts Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) Lamp terminals 16 +0.2 0 dia. 19 min. 18 dia. 15.1 dia. 19 min. Lock ring Mounting nut Lamp terminals Packing (t0.5) (for oil-resistant IP65 only) 70 The following diagrams show the rectangular model as a representative example. Rectangular A16@-J@-@P PCB terminals Panel Cutouts See page 77 for panel cutouts 16 +0.2 0 dia. 24 min. 24 min. Lock ring Mounting nut Packing (t0.5) (for oil-resistant IP65 only) Rectangular A16@-J@-T1 Panel Cutouts See page 77 for panel cutouts Voltage-reduction lighting, solder terminals (tab terminals #110) 16 +0.2 0 dia. Direction-indication arrow 25 min. 23 min. (Dimension A) Pushbutton Case Packing (t0.5) (for oil-resistant IP65 only) Marking face Lock ring Mounting ring Switch Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm Rectangular A16@-J@-2S, T1-2S, T2-2S Screw-Less Clamp Panel Cutouts See page 77 for panel cutouts 16 +0.2 0 dia. Switch dismounting lever 25 min. Lock ring Mounting ring 33 min. Packing (t0.5) (for oil-resistant IP65 only) 71 Lamps Incandescent Lamp A16-5/-12/-24 LED A16-5DS@/-12DS@/-24DS@ 13 max. 4 13 max. 6 dia. 0.5 dia. 2.54 6 dia. 2.54 Same as emitting color 4 Cathode (-) 0.25 Anode (+) Accessories, Tools, and Components Extractor A3PJ-5080 Legend Plates A16ZJ-520@ A16ZA-520@ A16ZT-520@ 12.9 dia. 13.4 dia. Note: 1. The panel is 0.6 mm thick. 2. The panel is made of the materials listed in the following table. Color Degree of protection IP40 Milky Materials Polyalylate resin IP65 Transparent IP40 IP65 Polycarbonate resin Polyalylate resin Note: The standard model is transparent. Screw Fitting A16Z-3004 18 dia. Panel Plugs (Black Resin) Select the Plug that fits the panel design and mount from the front of the Panel. Panel cutouts are the same as those for Switches. Protective structure: IP40 Square Rectangular Round A16ZA-3003 A16ZJ-3003 A16ZT-3003 72 Lock Ring Rough surface 15.80.1 dia. 12 x 12 17.90.1 Rough surface 2 +0.2 0 150-0.1 dia. 17.90.1 t=1 Extractor A16Z-5080 73 Dimensions with Accessories Switch Guards Rectangular A16ZJ-5050 Torsion spring 18.1 Guard (transparent) Holder (black) Panel Cutouts (Top View) 24.5 min. 16 +0.2 0 dia. Note: The above illustration shows the case where 4.5 mm is provided for the distance "x." If no clearance is required for the "x" section, the vertical mounting dimension can be as small as 24 mm. Set this distance according to operating conditions. 28 min. Square A16ZA-5050 Torsion spring 18.1 Guard (transparent) Holder (black) Panel Cutouts (Top View) 19 min. 16 +0.2 0 dia. 28 min. 74 Note: The above illustration shows the case where 4.5 mm is provided for the distance "x." If no clearance is required for the "x" section, the vertical mounting dimension can be as small as 24 mm.Set this distance according to operating conditions.For models with PCB terminals, the horizontal mounting dimension is 24 mm min. Dust Covers Rectangular A16ZJ-5060 Cover A (transparent) Cover B (black) Panel Cutouts 31 min. 16 +0.2 0 dia. 25 min. Square A16ZA-5060 Cover A (transparent) Cover B (black) Panel Cutouts 25 min. 16 +0.2 0 dia. 25 min. Round A16ZT-5060 Panel Cutouts Cover A (transparent) Cover B (black) 25 min. 16 +0.2 0 dia. 25 min. 24 dia. 75 Terminal Arrangement Models without Reduced-voltage Lighting Non-lighted Pushbutton Switches are also provided with lamp terminals. Solder Terminals Lighted SPDT Switches Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Dimensions of Terminal Holes Lighted DPDT Switches Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Dimensions of Terminal Holes Note: The L+ is not shown on the Switch. Lamp terminal Note: The L+ is not shown on the Switch. Lamp terminal PCB Terminals Lighted SPDT Switches Model, rating, and lot number indication Dimensions of PCB Terminals Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Side with TOP indicated Lighted DPDT Switches Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Side with TOP indicated Dimensions of PCB Terminals PCB Cutouts (Bottom View) PCB Cutouts (Bottom View) Side with TOP indicated Side with TOP indicated Lamp terminal (t=0.5) Lamp terminal (t=0.5) Eight, 1 dia. Five, 1 dia. Two, 5 dia. Two, 5 dia. Voltage Reduction Units Screw-Less Clamps DPDT lighted models DPDT lighted models (Bottom view) * The voltage-reduction circuit is built in. (Bottom view) Black Side with direction arrow Side indicating TOP Red Red White White Black Black Black Black Red * Voltage-reduction lighting models with Screw-Less Clamps (A16L@T1-2S, A16L-@T2-2S) incorporate voltage-reduction circuits. 76 Panel Cutouts Solder Terminals Square A16@-A/M16@-A Round A16@-T/M16@-T (Top View) Rectangular A16@-J/M16@-@J (Top View) 16 +0.2 0 dia. 24 min. 16 +0.2 0 dia. 19 min. 19 min. 19 min. Note: 1. Make sure the thickness of the mounting panel is between 0.5 and 3.2 mm. If, however, a Switch Guard or Dust Cover is used, the thickness of the mounting panel must be between 0.5 and 2 mm. 2. If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after coating. PCB Terminals Rectangular A16@-J/M16@-J (Top View) 16 +0.2 0 dia. Square A16@-A/M16@-A Round A16@-T/M16@-T (Top View) 16 +0.2 0 dia. 24 min. 24 min. 9.10.05 9.10.05 14.70.05 dia. 5.10.05 24 min. 14.70.05 dia. 24 min. 5.10.05 Note: 1. Ensure that the variation in the distance between the centers of neighboring mounting holes is less than 0.1 mm. 2. Make sure the thickness of the mounting panel is between 0.5 and 3.2 mm. If, however, a Switch Guard or Dust Cover is used, the thickness of the mounting panel must be between 0.5 and 2 mm. 3. If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after coating. 77 Installation Panel Mounting Mounting the Switch Unit After mounting the Pushbutton Unit (i.e., the Pushbutton and the Case) to the panel, snap in the Switch Unit (i.e., the Switch and the Lamp) from the back of the panel. Snap on the Switch Unit to the Pushbutton Unit. Mounting to the Panel Insert the Pushbutton Unit into the front of the panel, and fix the lock ring and mounting nut from the terminal side. Make sure that the Switch Unit has the correct orientation when snapping it onto the Case. Align the * mark on the Case with the groove between the case guards on the NC terminal side of the Switch Unit in the way shown below, and push the Switch Unit into the Case until it clicks into place. Confirm that the Switch Unit is securely in place before using. Make sure that the lock ring is aligned with the thread of the Case and the edge of the lock ring is touching the panel. Tighten the mounting nuts to a torque of 0.29 to 0.49 Nm. * mark Panel Mounting nut Case Thread Groove between case guards NC terminal Lock ring Edge Mounting the Switch Unit for Voltage Reduction Types 1. The mounting panel thickness must be 0.5 to 3.2 mm. 2. The mounting ring must be tightened to a torque 0.29 to 0.49 Nm. 3. The mounting hole must be cut out in the way described previously. The dimension A is the length required for removing the Switch when it is in the mounted state. If Switches are mounted side-by-side separated by less than the specified distance, it may not be possible to remove the Switch. 4. Be sure to mount the Case to the Switch with the correct orientation. Mount with the * mark on the Case facing in the same direction as the side of the Switch with the direction arrow or the word TOP. TOP mark Direction arrow * mark Case 78 * mark Switch Case Switch Removing the Switch Unit Removing the Lamp Grip the part between the Switch holder of the Case and the Switch Unit using the A16Z-5080 Extractor, and pull to remove the Switch Unit. Removing from the Pushbutton End * 16-mm Models Lamp Grip the Lamp with the A16Z-5080 Extractor and pull to remove. Removing from the Switch End A16Z-5080 Extractor The Lamp can be removed by hand once the Switch is removed using the A16Z-5080 Extractor. * A16-P Models (with PCB Terminals) Installing the Lamp When mounting the Lamp, make sure it is facing the direction shown in the following diagram. Insert the Lamp while matching the protruding part of the Lamp and the small guides on the outer surface of the Case. The Switch Unit can be mounted or dismounted by simply opening or closing the lever. Mounting and Replacing the Pushbutton Protruding part The Lamp can be mounted from the Pushbutton end by using the A16Z-5080 Extractor. The lamp can be mounted by following the opposite procedure for removing the Lamp. Removing and Mounting the Pushbutton 1. Remove the Pushbutton as shown in the following diagram. If the Pushbutton cannot be removed by hand, use the A3PJ-5080 Extractor. Pushbutton 2. To attach the Pushbutton, push until it clicks into place. 79 Mounting the A16Z Dust Cover Cover A (transparent) Pushbutton Unit Set A16ZJ-5060 Mounting the A16Z Switch Guard Switch Guard Panel Pushbutton Unit Cover B (black) Panel Lock ring Mounting nut Lock ring Mounting nut Switch Unit Switch Unit 1. 2. 3. 4. Separate the Dust Cover into 2 parts: cover A and cover B. Insert the Case (Pushbutton Unit) into cover B. Mount these parts together onto the panel. From the back of the panel, mount the lock ring and secure with the mounting nut. 5. Insert cover A into cover B. Ensure that the entire perimeter of cover A is securely attached to cover B by pressing in different directions. 6. Mount the Switch Unit to the Case. Note: Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 2 mm. 80 1. Insert the Case (Pushbutton Unit) into the Switch Guard. 2. Mount these parts together onto the panel. 3. From the back of the panel, mount the lock ring and secure with the mounting nut. 4. Attach the Switch Unit to the Case. Note: Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 2 mm. Precautions !WARNING Do not apply a voltage between the incandescent lamp and the terminal that is greater than the rated voltage. If the incandescent lamp is broken, the operating part may pop out. Always turn OFF the power and wait for 10 minutes before replacing the incandescent lamp. If the lamp is replaced immediately after the power is turned OFF, the remaining heat may cause burns. Correct Use Mounting Always make sure that the power is turned OFF before mounting, removing, or wiring the Switch, or performing maintenance. Do not tighten the mounting nut more than necessary using tools such as pointed-nose pliers. Doing so will damage the mounting nut. The tightening torque is 0.29 to 0.49 Nm. Wiring Operating Environment The IP65 model is designed with a degree of protection so that it will not sustain damage if it is subjected to water from any direction to the front of the panel. Using the Microload Insert a contact protection circuit, if necessary, to prevent the reduction of life expectancy due to extreme wear on the contacts caused by loads where inrush current occurs when the contact is opened and closed. The A16 allows both a standard load (125 V at 5A, 250 V at 3 A) and a microload. If a standard load is applied, however, the microload area cannot be used. If the microload area is used with a standard load, the contact surface will become rough, and the opening and closing of the contact for a microload may become unreliable. The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability level of 60% ( 60) (conforming to JIS C5003). The equation, 60 = 0.5 x 10-4/operations indicates that the estimated malfunction rate is less than 1/2,000,000 operations with a reliability level of 60%. Voltage (V) Refer to the Technical Information for Pushbutton Switches (Cat. No. A143). Solder Terminal Solder terminals and quick-connect terminals (#110) are commonly used for terminals. Be sure to use electrical wires that are a size appropriate for the applied voltage and carry current (conductor size is 0.5 to 0.75 mm2). Perform soldering according to the conditions provided below. If the soldering is not properly performed, the lead wires will become detached, resulting in short-circuits. Area of use Invalid area 1. Hand soldering: 30 W, within 5 s 2. Dip soldering: 240C, within 3 s Wait for one minute after soldering before exerting any external force on the solder. Use non-corrosive resin fluid as the flux. Make sure that the electric cord is wired so that it does not touch the Unit. If the electric cord touches the Unit, then electric wires with a heat resistance of 100C min. must be used. After wiring the Switch, maintain an appropriate clearance and creepage distance. Current (mA) LED The LED current-limiting resistor is built-in, so external resistance is not required. Rated voltage Internal limiting resistor Screw-Less Clamps 5 VDC 33 (blue: 51 , red: 68 ) Mounting Procedure 12 VDC 270 (blue: 270 , red: 560 ) 24 VDC 1600 (blue: 1.8 k, red: 2 k) 1. Strip a length of 10 mm off the end of the wire (allowable range: 101 mm). 2. Bunch wire strands together and straighten them. 3. Insert the wire into the insertion hole while pressing the release button at the side of the hole. (Using a precision screwdriver is recommended.) 4. Let go of the release button to lock the wire into place. 5. After locking, pull on the wire gently to confirm that it is securely locked. Note: The values in parentheses are for models with blue or red Pushbutton Units. Others The oil-resistant IP65 uses NBR rubber and is resistant to general cutting oil and cooling oil. Some particular oils cannot be used with the oil-resistant IP65, however, so contact your OMRON representative for details. Removing Procedure Remove wires by pulling them while pressing the release button. Note: When reusing wires that have already been locked, cut off the end of the wire and strip the wire again before using. 81 If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating. Do not subject the Switch to extreme shock or vibration. Doing so will cause malfunctions and damage to the Switch. Do not let sharp objects come into contact with the Switches that are made of resin. Doing so will damage the Switches, causing scratches on the outside of the operating parts, and malfunction. When handling the Switches, do not throw or drop them. Do not allow the Switch to drop and hit the ground. Do not place or drop heavy objects on the Switch. Do not operate the Switch with hard or sharp objects. Hammer Screwdriver ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A124-E1-03 82 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. Knob-type Selector Switch A165S/W Mounting Aperture of 16 mm * Modular construction * Oil-resistant IP65 models * UL and cUL approved. * Conforms to EN60947-5-1, IEC947-5-1 * Short mounting depth, less than 28.5 mm below panel * Wide range of switching capacity from standard to microload * Lighted and non-lighted models * 2 and 3-notch models * Manual and automatic reset models Model Number Structure Model Number Legend Completely Assembled The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Selector, Lamp (lighted models only), and Switch. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) A 1 6 5 W - A 2A R - 24D - 1 (1) Lighted/Non-lighted Symbol S W Type Symbol Non-lighted Lighted (2) Shape of Selector Symbol Shape J A Rectangular Square T Round (6) Contact Configuration (3) Number of Notches/Resetting Method Symbol No. of notches 2M 2A 2 notches Manual Automatic Manual 3M 3A Reset method 3 notches Automatic (4) Color of Selector Symbol Color Red Green Y Yellow Terminal SPDT 2 DPDT Solder terminal 1P SPDT 2P DPDT 2S DPDT PCB terminal Screw-Less Clamp Note: 1. Only DPDT contacts are available with 3-notch models and Screw-Less Clamp models. 2. PCB terminals are available only with 2-notch models. No symbol Black (non-lighted models only) R G Type 1 (5) Light Source Symbol No symbol 24D Type Non-lighted 24 V-LED Voltage Reduction Unit (24-V Built-in LED) Symbol Type Operating voltage T1 T2 LED 90 to 121 VAC/VDC 180 to 242 VAC/VDC Rated voltage 110 VAC/VDC 220 VAC/VDC Note: 1. Solder terminals are only available with 100-V models. 2. The Voltage Reduction Unit is not available for models with PCB terminals. 83 Subassembled 1. Selector A165@-@@@ 1 2 3 4 1. Lighted/Non-lighted S: Non-lighted W: Lighted 2. Flange Shape J: Rectangular A: Square T: Round 3. Number of Notches/Reset Method 2M: 2 notches/Manual 2A: 2 notches/Automatic 3M: 3 notches/Manual 3A: 3 notches/Mixed-operation 4. Illumination Color None: Black (Non-lighted models only) R: Red G: Green Y: Yellow 2. Switch (Same as for Key-type Selector Switches) A16S-@-@@@ 1 2 3 4 1. Number of Notches 2N: 2 notches 3N: 3 notches 2. Contacts 1: SPDT 2: DPDT 3. Lighted/Non-lighted None: Non-lighted L: Lighted 4. Terminals None: Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) 3. Lamp A16-@@ 1 2 1. Operating Voltage (Rated Voltage) LED 5DS: 5 VDC (5 VDC) 12DS:12 VDC (12 VDC) 24DS:24 VDC (24 VDC) 84 2. Illumination Color R: Red (LED) G: Green (LED) Y: Yellow (LED) Ordering Information List of Models Ordering as a Set The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following tables. One set comprises the Selector, Lamp (lighted models only), and Switch. Solder Terminals A165@-J (Rectangular) Models IP65 Oil-resistant No. of notches 2 notches Output SPDT Reset method Manual Automatic DPDT Manual Automatic 3 notches DPDT Manual Lighting method Operating voltage Model LED 24 VDC A165W-J2M@-24D-1 Non-lighted --- A165S-J2M-1 LED 24 VDC A165W-J2A@-24D-1 Non-lighted --- A165S-J2A-1 LED 24 VDC A165W-J2M@-24D-2 Non-lighted --- A165S-J2M-2 LED 24 VDC A165W-J2A@-24D-2 Non-lighted --- A165S-J2A-2 LED 24 VDC A165W-J3M@-24D-2 Non-lighted --- A165S-J3M-2 Note: Enter the desired color symbol for the Selector in @: R (red); Y (yellow); G (green). The Selector for non-lighted models is black. A165@-A (Square) Models IP65 Oil-resistant No. of notches 2 notches Output SPDT Reset method Manual Automatic DPDT Manual Automatic 3 notches DPDT Manual Lighting method Operating voltage Model LED 24 VDC A165W-A2M@-24D-1 Non-lighted --- A165S-A2M-1 LED 24 VDC A165W-A2A@-24D-1 Non-lighted --- A165S-A2A-1 LED 24 VDC A165W-A2M@-24D-2 Non-lighted --- A165S-A2M-2 LED 24 VDC A165W-A2A@-24D-2 Non-lighted --- A165S-A2A-2 LED 24 VDC A165W-A3M@-24D-2 Non-lighted --- A165S-A3M-2 Note: Enter the desired color symbol for the Selector in @: R (red); Y (yellow); G (green). The Selector for non-lighted models is black. 85 A165@-T (Round) Models IP65 Oil-resistant No. of notches 2 notches Output SPDT Reset method Manual Automatic DPDT Manual Automatic 3 notches DPDT Manual Lighting method Operating voltage Model LED 24 VDC A165W-T2M@-24D-1 Non-lighted --- A165S-T2M-1 LED 24 VDC A165W-T2A@-24D-1 Non-lighted --- A165S-T2A-1 LED 24 VDC A165W-T2M@-24D-2 Non-lighted --- A165S-T2M-2 LED 24 VDC A165W-T2A@-24D-2 Non-lighted --- A165S-T2A-2 LED 24 VDC A165W-T3M@-24D-2 Non-lighted --- A165S-T3M-2 Note: Enter the desired color symbol for the Selector in @: R (red); Y (yellow); G (green). The Selector for non-lighted models is black. 86 Ordering Individually Selectors, Lamps, and Switches (Sockets) can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual Units. Also, store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs. Selector Selectors with Knobs Rectangular Models Square Models Lighted Models Round Models Non-lighted Models Lamp LED only Note: Temperature rises in incandescent lamps can cause heat deformation. Switch Solder terminals (no transformer) Lighted/non-lighted PCB terminals Lighted/non-lighted 87 Selectors (Oil-resistant IP65 Models Only) Appearance Rectangular (A165@-J) Number of notches 2 notches Reset method Manual Square (A165@-A) 2 notches Round (A165@-T) 2 notches 24 VDC A165W-J2M@ --- A165S-J2M LED 24 VDC A165W-J2A@ Non-lighted --- A165S-J2A LED 24 VDC A165W-J3M@ Non-lighted --- A165S-J3M Fully automatic LED 24 VDC A165W-J3A@ Non-lighted --- A165S-J3A Manual LED 24 VDC A165W-A2M@ Non-lighted --- A165S-A2M LED 24 VDC A165W-A2A@ Non-lighted --- A165S-A2A LED 24 VDC A165W-A3M@ Non-lighted --- A165S-A3M Manual Manual Fully automatic LED 24 VDC A165W-A3A@ Non-lighted --- A165S-A3A Manual LED 24 VDC A165W-T2M@ Non-lighted --- A165S-T2M LED 24 VDC A165W-T2A@ Non-lighted --- A165S-T2A LED 24 VDC A165W-T3M@ Non-lighted --- A165S-T3M LED 24 VDC A165W-T3A@ Non-lighted --- A165S-T3A Automatic 3 notches Model LED Automatic 3 notches Operating voltage Non-lighted Automatic 3 notches Lighting method Manual Fully automatic Selector color symbol R (red), Y (yellow), G (green) R (red), Y (yellow), G (green) R (red), Y (yellow), G (green) Note: 1. Enter the desired color symbol for the Selector in the @. 2. The selector for non-lighted models is black. Switches Appearance Classification Lighted Socket (without voltage-reduction lighting) Non-lighted Lighted Non-lighted 2 notches Model SPDT Solder terminal DPDT A16S-2N-1L A16S-2N-2L 3 notches DPDT A16S-3N-2L 2 notches SPDT A16S-2N-1 DPDT A16S-2N-2 3 notches DPDT A16S-3N-2 2 notches SPDT PCB terminal A16S-2N-1LP DPDT A16S-2N-2LP SPDT A16S-2N-1P DPDT A16S-2N-2P Lamps LED 5 VDC Operating voltage 12 VDC 24 VDC Light color Red A16-5DSR A16-12DSR A16-24DSR Yellow A16-5DSY A16-12DSY A16-24DSY Green A16-5DSG A16-12DSG A16-24DSG 88 Accessories (Order Separately) Accessories Name Appearance Panel Plugs Classification Model Rectangular A16ZJ-3003 Square A16ZA-3003 Round A16ZT-3003 Remarks Used for covering the panel cutouts for future panel expansion. Degree of protection: IP40 Tools Name Appearance Model Applicable types Pushbutton Switch Knob-type Selector Switch Key-type Selector Switch Emergency Stop Switch Remarks Indicator Screw Fitting A16Z-3004 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Convenient for ganged installation. Tighten to a torque of 0.39 N*m min. Extractor A16Z-5080 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Convenient for extracting the Switches and Lamps. Specifications Approved Standards Agency Standards File No. UL, cUL (See note.) UL508 E41515 --- EN60947-5-1 --- Note: cUL: CSA, C22.2 No. 14 Approved Standard Ratings UL, cUL (File No. E41515) 5 A at 125 VAC, 3 A at 250 VAC (general use) 3 A at 30 VDC (resistive) EN60947-5-1 (Low Voltage Directive) 3 A at 250 VAC (AC12), 3 A at 30 VDC (DC12) Ratings Contacts AC resistive load 3 A at 250 VAC 5 A at 125 VAC Super-bright LED DC resistive load 3 A at 30 VDC Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC Rated values are obtained from tests conducted under the following conditions. 1. 2. 3. 4. Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage Internal limiting resistor 5 VDC 30 mA (15 mA) 5 VDC5% 33 (68 ) 12 VDC 15 mA 12 VDC5% 270 (560 ) 24 VDC 10 mA 24 VDC5% 1600 (2,000 ) Note: The values in parentheses are for red Selectors. Load: Resistive load Mounting conditions: No vibration and no shock Temperature: 202C Operating frequency: 20 times/min 89 Characteristics Item Allowable operating frequency Knob-type Selector Switch Mechanical 20 operations/minute max. Electrical 10 operations/minute max. Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different polarity and also between each terminal and ground 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between lamp terminals (See note.) Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (malfunction within 1 ms) Shock resistance Destruction 500 m/s2 Malfunction 150 m/s2 max. (malfunction within 1 ms) Mechanical 250,000 operations min. Electrical 100,000 operations min. Durability Ambient temperature Operating: -10C to 55C (with no icing or condensation) Storage: -25C to 65C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85% Electric shock protection class Class II PTI (tracking characteristic) 175 Degree of contamination 3 (IEC947-5-1) Weight Approx. 13 g (in the case of a lighted DPDT switch) Note: With LED not mounted. Screw-less Clamp Item Screw-less Clamp Recommended wire size 0.5 mm2 twisted wire or 0.8 mm-dia. solid wire Usable wires and ten- Twisted wire sile strength Solid wire 0.3mm2 0.5 mm2 0.75 mm 2 1.25 mm2 0.5 mm dia. 0.8 mm dia. 1.0 mm dia. --- 10 N 20 N 30 N 40 N Tensile strength 10 1 mm Length of exposed wire Operating Characteristics Type Knob-type Selector Switch 2 notches Features Operating force (OF) max. 0.1 N*m Set position (SP) 905 Operation Angle Two notches Three notches Note: 1. The angle used for automatic reset is shown in parentheses. 2. FP: Free Position 90 3 notches 45+10 0 Contact Form Name Contact SPDT NC COM NO SW2 SW1 Notch Contact SPDT Position DPDT SW Position SW2 SW1 2 notches 3 notches --- 91 Nomenclature Color of Selector * LED models Red, green, yellow * Non-lighted models Black Selector Flange Shape Rectangular (A165@-J) Lighting Method * Lighted (LED) models (The upper face of the knob is illuminated.) * Non-lighted models Square (A165@-A) Number of Notches and Reset Method * 2 Notches Manual reset Automatic reset Round (A165@-T) * 3 Notches Manual reset Automatic reset Protective Structure * Oil-resistant IP65 Lamp Switch Terminal Type * Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) * PCB terminals 92 Switch Specifications * Standard Loads 5 A at 125 VAC 5 A at 250 VAC 3 A at 30 VDC Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. Knob-type Selector Switches without Voltage Reduction Unit Rectangular A165@-J Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) Lamp terminal Note: See page 96 for panel cutouts. Packing (t0.5) Model, standard, lot No., serial number Mounting nut Lock ring Square A165@-A Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) Lamp terminal Note: See page 96 for panel cutouts. Packing (t0.5) Model, standard, lot No., serial number Mounting nut Lock ring Round A165@-T Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) Lamp terminal Note: See page 96 for panel cutouts. Packing (t0.5) Model, standard, lot No., serial number Mounting nut Lock ring 93 The following diagrams show the rectangular model as a representative example. The lamp terminal is also provided with non-lighted models. Rectangular A165@-J PCB terminals Lamp terminal Mounting nut Note: See page 96 for panel cutouts. Packing (t0.5) Lock ring Rectangular A165W@-T Reduced-voltage lighting, solder terminals (tab terminals #110) Direction-indication arrow Selector Case Lock ring Packing (t0.5) Mounting nut (for oil-resistant IP65 only) Switch Rectangular A165@-2S Screw-Less Clamp Switch dismounting lever Lock ring Mounting nut Packing (t0.5) (for oil-resistant IP65 only) 94 Terminal Arrangement Models with Solder Terminals without Reduced-voltage Lighting Lamp terminals are not provided with the Non-lighted Knob-type Selector Switches and Key-type Selector Switches. Lighted SPDT Switches Lighted DPDT Switches Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Dimensions of Terminal Holes Dimensions of Terminal Holes Lamp terminal Note: The L+ is not shown on the Switch. Lamp terminal Non-lighted SPDT Switches Note: The L+ is not shown on the Switch. Non-lighted DPDT Switches Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Side with TOP indicated Dimensions of Terminal Holes Side with TOP indicated Dimensions of Terminal Holes Models with PCB Terminals Lighted SPDT Switches Dimensions of PCB Terminals Model, rating, and lot number indication Lamp terminal (t=0.5) Lighted DPDT Switches Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Dimensions of PCB Terminals Side with TOP indicated PCB Cutouts (Bottom View) Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Side with TOP indicated PCB Cutouts (Bottom View) Lamp terminal (t=0.5) Side with TOP indicated Side with TOP indicated Eight, 1 dia. Eight, 1 dia. Two, 5 dia. Two, 5 dia. Note: For details of the terminal arrangement for Screw-Less Clamps, refer to the corresponding section for the A16. 95 Non-lighted Models with PCB Terminals Lamp terminals are not provided with the Non-lighted Knob-type Selector Switches and Key-type Selector Switches. Non-lighted SPDT Switches Dimensions of PCB Terminals Model, rating, and lot number indication Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Side with TOP indicated Non-lighted DPDT Switches Dimensions of PCB Terminals Side with TOP indicated PCB Cutouts (Bottom View) PCB Cutouts (Bottom View) Side with TOP indicated Side with TOP indicated Six, 1 dia. Three, 1 dia. Two, 5 dia. Two, 5 dia. Panel Cutouts Models with Solder Terminals Rectangular A165@-J Square A165@-A Round A165@-T (Top View) (Top View) 16+0.2 0 dia. 16+0.2 0 dia. 24 min. 19 min. 19 min. 19 min. Note: 1. Make sure the thickness of the mounting panel is 0.5 to 3.2 mm. 2. If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after coating. 96 Models with PCB Terminals Rectangular A165@-J 16 +0.2 0 dia. Square A165@-A Round A165@-T 24 min. (Top View) 9.10.05 24 min. 9.10.05 24 min. 14.70.05 dia. 16+0.2 0 dia. 24 min. 14.70.05 dia. 5.10.05 Rectangular A165W@-T 16 +0.2 0 dia. (Top View) 5.10.05 Rectangular A165@-2S 25 min. 16+0.2 0 dia. 25 min. 23 min. (Dimension A) 33 min. (Dimension A) Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm Note: 1. Ensure that the variation in the distance between the centers of neighboring mounting holes is less than 0.1 mm. 2. Make sure the thickness of the mounting panel is 0.5 to 3.2 mm. If, however, a Switch Guard or Dust Cover is used, the thickness of the mounting panel must be 0.5 to 2 mm. 3. If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after coating. Installation For details on mounting the Switch to a panel, and mounting and dismounting the Switch, refer to installation details for the A16 Pushbutton Switch. Panel Mounting Flange Rotation Refer to the Installation section for the A16. A165 Knob-type Selector Switch Mounting and Replacing the Pushbutton Refer to the Installation section for the A16. Fix the Switch screw and rotate the flange in 45 turns. Flange Lock ring Switch screw Precautions Refer to the Technical Information for Pushbutton Switches (Cat. No. A143) and the Precautions section for the A16. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A125-E1-03 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. 97 Key-type Selector Switch A165K Mounting Aperture of 16 mm * Modular construction * Oil-resistant IP65 models * UL and cUL approved. * Conforms to EN60947-5-1, IEC947-5-1 * Short mounting depth, less than 28.5 mm below panel * Wide range of switching capacity from standard to microload * Automatic and manual models available Model Number Structure Model Number Legend Completely Assembled The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Selector, Switch, and 2 Keys. (1) (2) (3) A 1 6 5 K - J 3ML - 2 (1) Shape of Selector Symbol Shape J A Rectangular Square T Round Color Black (2) Number of Notches/Resetting Method Symbol No. of notches Reset method 2ML 2MR Manual 2 notches 2M Automatic 2AL 3MC 3MR 3ML 3M 3AC 98 Key release position Left Right Left and right Left Center 3 notches Manual Right Left 3 notches Automatic Center Left, right, and center (3) Contact Configuration Symbol 1 2 Type SPDT DPDT 2S DPDT Terminal Solder Terminal Screw-Less Clamp Note: 1. Only DPDT contacts are available with 3-notch models 2. PCB terminals are available only with 2-notch models. Subassembled 1. Selector A165K-@@ 1 2 1. Flange Shape J: Rectangular A: Square T: Round 2. Number of Notches/Reset Method/Key Release Position 2ML: 2 notches/Manual/Left 2MR: 2 notches/Manual/Right 2M: 2 notches/Manual/Right and left 2AL: 2 notches/Automatic/Left 3MC: 3 notches/Manual/Center 3MR: 3 notches/Manual/Right 3ML: 3 notches/Manual/Left 3M: 3 notches/Manual/Right, left, and center 3AC: 3 notches/Automatic/Center 2. Switch (Same as for Knob-type Selector Switches) A16S-@-@@ 1 2 3 1. Number of Notches 2N: 2 notches 3N: 3 notches 2. Contacts 1: SPDT 2: DPDT 3. Terminals None: Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) 99 Ordering Information List of Models Ordering as a Set The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following tables. One set comprises the Selector and Switch. Solder Terminals A165K-J (Rectangular) Models IP65 Oil-resistant Number of notches 2 notches Output SPDT DPDT 3 notches Reset method Manual DPDT Key release position Left Model A165K-J2ML-1 Right A165K-J2MR-1 Left and right A165K-J2M-1 Automatic Left A165K-J2AL-1 Manual Left A165K-J2ML-2 Right A165K-J2MR-2 Left and right A165K-J2M-2 Automatic Left A165K-J2AL-2 Manual Center A165K-J3MC-2 Right A165K-J3MR-2 Left A165K-J3ML-2 Left, right, and center A165K-J3M-2 A165K-A (Square) Models IP65 Oil-resistant Number of notches 2 notches Output SPDT DPDT 3 notches 100 DPDT Reset method Manual Key release position Left Model A165K-A2ML-1 Right A165K-A2MR-1 Left and right A165K-A2M-1 Automatic Left A165K-A2AL-1 Manual Left A165K-A2ML-2 Right A165K-A2MR-2 Left and right A165K-A2M-2 Automatic Left A165K-A2AL-2 Manual Center A165K-A3MC-2 Right A165K-A3MR-2 Left A165K-A3ML-2 Left, right, and center A165K-A3M-2 A165K-T (Round) Models IP65 Oil-resistant Number of notches 2 notches Output SPDT DPDT Reset method Manual DPDT Model A165K-T2ML-1 Right A165K-T2MR-1 Left and right A165K-T2M-1 Automatic Left A165K-T2AL-1 Manual Left A165K-T2ML-2 Right A165K-T2MR-2 Left and right A165K-T2M-2 Left A165K-T2AL-2 Automatic 3 notches Key release position Left Manual Center A165K-T3MC-2 Right A165K-T3MR-2 Left A165K-T3ML-2 Left, right, and center A165K-T3M-2 101 Ordering Individually Selectors and Switches can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual Units. Also, store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs. Selectors Appearance Rectangular (A165K-J) Number of notches 2 notches Reset method Manual Key release position Model A165K-J2ML A165K-J2MR A165K-J2M 3 notches Automatic A165K-J2AL Manual A165K-J3MC A165K-J3MR A165K-J3ML A165K-J3M Square (A165K-A) 2 notches Automatic A165K-J3AC Manual A165K-A2ML A165K-A2MR A165K-A2M 3 notches Automatic A165K-A2AL Manual A165K-A3MC A165K-A3MR A165K-A3ML A165K-A3M Round (A165K-T) 2 notches Automatic A165K-A3AC Manual A165K-T2ML A165K-T2MR A165K-T2M 3 notches Automatic A165K-T2AL Manual A165K-T3MC A165K-T3MR A165K-T3ML A165K-T3M Automatic 102 A165K-T3AC Switches Appearance Classification Switch 2 notches Model SPDT Solder terminal A16S-2N-1 DPDT A16S-2N-2 3 notches DPDT A16S-3N-2 2 notches SPDT PCB terminal DPDT A16S-2N-1P A16S-2N-2P Switches with Screw-Less Clamp Appearance Classification Common to general DPDT load and micro load. Model 2 notches Non-lighted 3 notches Remarks A16-2S Common to ones for pushbutton switches. A16S-3N-2LS --- Accessories (Order Separately) Accessories Name Appearance Panel Plugs Classification Model Rectangular A16ZJ-3003 Square A16ZA-3003 Round A16ZT-3003 Remarks Used for covering the panel cutouts for future panel expansion. Degree of protection: IP40 Tools Name Appearance Model Applicable types Pushbutton Switch Knob-type Selector Switch Key-type Selector Switch Emergency Stop Switch Remarks Indicator Screw Fitting A16Z-3004 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Convenient for ganged installation. Tighten to a torque of 0.98 N*m Extractor A16Z-5080 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Convenient for extracting the Switches and Lamps. Key Appearance Model A165K-KEY Note: Two Keys are provided. 103 Specifications Approved Standards Agency Standards File No. UL, cUL (See note.) UL508 E41515 --- EN60947-5-1 --- Note: cUL: CSA, C22.2 No. 14 Approved Standard Ratings UL, cUL (File No. E41515) 5 A at 125 VAC, 3 A at 250 VAC (general use) 3 A at 30 VDC (resistive) EN60947-5-1 (Low Voltage Directive) 3 A at 250 VAC (AC12), 3 A at 30 VDC (DC12) Ratings Contacts AC resistive load 3 A at 250 VAC 5 A at 125 VAC DC resistive load Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC Rated values are obtained from tests conducted under the following conditions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 3 A at 30 VDC Load: Resistive load Mounting conditions: No vibration and no shock Temperature: 202C Operating frequency: 20 times/min Characteristics Item Key-type Selector Switch Allowable operating frequency Mechanical 20 operations/minute max. Electrical 10 operations/minute max. Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different polarity and also between each terminal and ground Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (malfunction within 1 ms) Shock resistance Destruction 500 m/s2 Malfunction 150 m/s2 max. (malfunction within 1 ms) Durability Mechanical 250,000 operations min. (durability of key: 10,000 operations min.) Electrical 100,000 operations min. Ambient temperature Operating: -10C to 55C (with no icing or condensation) Storage: -25C to 65C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85% Electric shock protection class Class II PTI (tracking characteristic) 175 Degree of contamination 3 (IEC947-5-1) Weight Approx. 26.5 g (in the case of a DPDT switch key) Screw-less Clamp Item Screw-less Clamp Recommended wire size 0.5 mm2 twisted wire or 0.8 mm-dia. solid wire Usable wires and ten- Twisted wire sile strength Solid wire 0.3mm2 0.5 mm2 0.75 mm 2 1.25 mm2 0.5 mm dia. 0.8 mm dia. 1.0 mm dia. --- 10 N 20 N 30 N 40 N Tensile strength Length of exposed wire 104 10 1 mm Operating Characteristics Type Key-type Selector Switch 2 notches Features Operating force (OF) max. 0.1 N*m Set position (SP) 905 3 notches 45+10/0 Operation Angle Two notches Three notches (75) (45) (45) Note: The angle used for automatic reset is shown in parentheses. Contact Form Name Contact DPDT NC COM NO SW1 SW2 Notch Contact SPDT Position DPDT SW Position SW1 SW2 2 notches 3 notches --- 105 Nomenclature Key Selector Flange Shape Rectangular (A165K-J) Number of Notches and Reset Method * 2 Notches Manual Automatic * 3 Notches Manual Mixed-operation Square (A165K-A) Round (A165K-T) Protective Structure * Oil-resistant IP65 Switch Switch Specifications * Standard Loads 5 A at 125 VAC 3 A at 250 VAC 3 A at 30 VDC Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC Terminal Type * Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) * PCB terminals 106 Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. Key-type Selector Switches Rectangular A165K-J Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) Note: See page 110 for panel cutouts. Packing (t0.5) Model, standard, lot No., serial number Mounting nut Lock ring Square A165K-A Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) Note: See page 110 for panel cutouts. Packing (t0.5) Model, standard, lot No., serial number Mounting nut Lock ring Round A165K-T Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) Note: See page 110 for panel cutouts. Packing (t0.5) Model, standard, lot No., serial number Mounting nut Lock ring 107 The following diagrams show the rectangular model as a representative example. Rectangular A165K-J PCB terminals Note: See page 110 for panel cutouts. Packing (t0.5) Mounting nut Lock ring Rectangular A165K@-2S Screw-Less Clamp Switch dismounting lever Lock ring Mounting ring Packing (t0.5) (for oil-resistant IP65 only) 108 Terminal Arrangement Models with Solder Terminals without Reduced-voltage Lighting Lamp terminals are not provided with the Non-lighted Knob-type Selector Switches and Key-type Selector Switches. Lighted SPDT Switches Lighted DPDT Switches Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Dimensions of Terminal Holes Dimensions of Terminal Holes Lamp terminal Non-lighted SPDT Switches Non-lighted DPDT Switches Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Side with TOP indicated Dimensions of Terminal Holes Note: The L+ is not shown on the Switch. Lamp terminal Note: The L+ is not shown on the Switch. Side with TOP indicated Dimensions of Terminal Holes Lighted Models with PCB Terminals Lighted SPDT Switches Dimensions of PCB Terminals Model, rating, and lot number indication Lamp terminal (t=0.5) Lighted DPDT Switches Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Dimensions of PCB Terminals Side with TOP indicated PCB Cutouts (Bottom View) Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Side with TOP indicated PCB Cutouts (Bottom View) Lamp terminal (t=0.5) Side with TOP indicated Side with TOP indicated Eight, 1 dia. Eight, 1 dia. Two, 5 dia. Two, 5 dia. Note: For details of the terminal arrangement for Screw-Less Clamps, refer to the corresponding section for the A16. 109 Non-lighted Models with PCB Terminals Lamp terminals are not provided with the Non-lighted Knob-type Selector Switches and Key-type Selector Switches. Non-lighted SPDT Switches Dimensions of PCB Terminals Model, rating, and lot number indication Non-lighted DPDT Switches Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Side with TOP indicated Dimensions of PCB Terminals Side with TOP indicated PCB Cutouts (Bottom View) PCB Cutouts (Bottom View) Side with TOP indicated Side with TOP indicated Six, 1 dia. Three, 1 dia. Two, 5 dia. Two, 5 dia. Panel Cutouts Models with Solder Terminals Rectangular A165@-J Square A165@-A Round A165@-T (Top View) (Top View) 16+0.2 0 dia. 16+0.2 0 dia. 24 min. 19 min. 19 min. 19 min. Note: 1. Make sure the thickness of the mounting panel is 0.5 to 3.2 mm. 2. If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after coating. 110 Models with PCB Terminals Rectangular A165K-J (Top View) 16 +0.2 0 dia. Square A165K-A Round A165K-T Rectangular A165K@-2S (Top View) (Top View) 24 min. +0.2 16 0 dia. 9.10.05 24 min. 16+0.2 0 dia. 25 min. 9.10.05 24 min. 14.70.05 dia. 14.70.05 dia. 5.10.05 24 min. 5.10.05 33 min. (Dimension A) Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm Note: 1. Ensure that the variation in the distance between the centers of neighboring mounting holes is less than 0.1 mm. 2. Make sure the thickness of the mounting panel is 0.5 to 3.2 mm. If, however, a Switch Guard or Dust Cover is used, the thickness of the mounting panel must be 0.5 to 2 mm. 3. If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after coating. Installation For details on mounting the Switch to a panel, and mounting and dismounting the Switch, refer to installation details for the A16 Pushbutton Switch. Panel Mounting Refer to the Installation section for the A16. Mounting and Replacing the Pushbutton Refer to the Installation section for the A16. Flange Rotation A165 Key-type Selector Switch Fix the Switch screw and rotate the flange in 45 turns. Flange Lock ring Switch screw Precautions Refer to the Technical Information for Pushbutton Switches (Cat. No. A143) and the Precautions section for the A16. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A126-E1-03 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. 111 Emergency Stop Switch A165E Separate Construction with Smallest Class of Depth in the World * Direct opening mechanism to open contacts in emergencies, such as when they are welded. * Conforms to EN418. * Includes a safety lock to prevent misuse. * Features separate construction that allows the Switch to be separated for easier wiring and one-piece-like construction that allows easier handling. * Models available with 3 contacts built into a single block (A165E-U). Note: Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on page 14, as well as the "Safety Precautions" on page 121. Model Number Structure Model Number Legend Completely Assembled Shipped as a set that includes the Operation Unit and light source. 1 2 3 A165E@-@-@ IP65 (Oil-resistant) 1. Operation Unit Shape and Functions Code Functions S Non-lighted LS Lighted Pushbutton 30 dia. M Push-lock, Non-lighted turn-reset LM Lighted Operation voltage None Non-lighted --- Rated voltage --- 24D 24 VDC 24 VDC Note: Models with separate construction (SPST-NC and DPST-NC) are for normal loads only. One-piece models (TPST-NC) are for either normal loads or microloads. 112 Description 01 SPST-NC 02 DPST-NC 03U TPST-NC (See note.) Note: TPST-NC models have one-piece construction with the contact unit. Only non-lighted models are available. Type LED Code 40 dia. 2. Light Source Code 3. Contacts Ordering Information List of Models Illumination Rated voltage LED 24 VDC Non-lighted --- LED 24 VDC Non-lighted Pushbutton color Pushbutton size Red 30 dia. Terminal Contact Solder terminal SPST-NC 40 dia. --30 dia. Model A165E-LS-24D-01 DPST-NC A165E-LS-24D-02 SPST-NC A165E-S-01 DPST-NC A165E-S-02 SPST-NC A165E-LM-24D-01 DPST-NC A165E-LM-24D-02 SPST-NC A165E-M-01 DPST-NC A165E-M-02 TPST-NC A165E-M-03U 40 dia. A165E-S-03U Note: The above models have a surface indication of "RESET." Models with "STOP" indication are also available. For further information, contact your OMRON representative. Individual Parts (for Switches with Separate Construction) Operation Units Appearance 30 dia. 40 dia. Sockets Illumination Model Non-lighted A165E-S Lighted A165E-LS Non-lighted A165E-M Lighted A165E-LM Appearance Contact form Model Non-lighted SPST-NC A165E-01 DPST-NC A165E-02 Lighted SPST-NC A165E-01L DPST-NC A165E-02L Contact form Model Socket Units Lamps Appearance Illumination Appearance LED color Red Rated voltage Standard 5 VDC Bright Illumination Model Lighted A16-5DR 12 VDC A16-12DR 24 VDC A16-24DR 5 VDC A16-5DSR 12 VDC A16-12DSR 24 VDC A16-24DSR SPST-NC A165E-R-24D-01 DPST-NC A165E-R-24D-02 Accessories (Order Separately) Item Yellow Plate Panel Plug Tightening Tool Extractor Appearance Type Model Precautions Yellow, 45 dia. A16Z-5070 Use this as an emergency stop nameplate. Used for covering the panel cutouts for future panel expansion. Degree of protection: IP40 Color: Black Rectangular A16ZJ-3003 Square A16ZA-3003 Round A16ZT-3003 --- A16Z-3004 Useful for repetitive mounting. Be careful not to tighten excessively. A16Z-5080 Convenient for extracting the Switch and Lamp. 113 Specifications Certified Standards Certification body Standards UL, cUL (See note.) File No. UL508, CSA C22.2 No.14 E41515 TUV Product Service EN60947-5-1, EN60947-5-5 Inquire CQC (CCC) GB14048.5 2003010303070678 Note: Certification for CSA C22.2 No. 14 is indicated by the mark. Certified Standard Ratings UL508, CSA C22.2 No.14, CCC(GB14048.5) Models with Separate Construction Rated voltage 125 VAC 250 VAC 30 VDC Resistive load 5A 3A 3A Rated voltage 114 Resistive load 1A 0.5 A 1A Rated voltage 250 VAC 30 VDC Resistive load 3A 3A Models with One-piece Construction Models with One-piece Construction 125 VAC 250 VAC 30 VDC TUV(EN60947-5-1) Models with Separate Construction Rated voltage 250 VAC 30 VDC Resistive load 0.5 A 1A Ratings Switch Ratings Rated voltage Resistive load Models with Separate Construction Models with One-piece Construction A165E series LED Ratings (only for Models with LEDs) Rated voltage 24 VDC Rated current 10 mA Operation voltage 24 VDC5% A165E@-U series 125 VAC 250 VAC 30 VDC 5A 3A 3A 1A 0.5 A 1A Minimum applicable load 150 mA at 5 VDC 1 mA at 5 VDC Characteristics Item Emergency Stop Switch Non-lighted A165E-S/A165E-M Allowable operating frequency Mechanical 20 operations/minute max. Electrical 10 operations/minute max. Lighted A165E-LS/A165-LM Non-lighted, One-piece construction A165E-U Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different polarity and also between each terminal and ground 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between lamp terminals (See note 1.) --- Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (malfunction within 1 ms) Shock resistance Destruction 500 m/s2 Malfunction 300 m/s2 max. (malfunction within 1 ms) Mechanical 100,000 operations min. Electrical 100,000 operations min. Durability 150 m/s2 max. (malfunction within 1 ms) Ambient temperature Operating: -10C to 55C (with no icing or condensation) Storage: -25C to 65C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85% Degree of protection IP65 Oil-resistant Electric shock protection class Class II PTI (tracking characteristic) 175 Degree of contamination 3 (EN60947-5-1) Weight Approx. 16 g (in case of DPST-NC Switches) IP65 (See note 2.) IP65 Oil-resistant (See note 2.) Note: 1. LED not mounted. Test them with the LED removed. 2. Degree of protection from the front of the panel. Operating Characteristics Features Characteristics Operating force (OF) max. 14.7 N Releasing force (RF) min. 0.1 N*m Pretravel (PT) 3.50.5 mm (30.5 mm In case of A165E@-U series) 115 Nomenclature (Models with Separate Construction) \ Illumination Colors * LED Illumination Red * Non-lighted Red Protective Structure and Terminal Type * Protective Structure Oil-resistant IP65 * Terminal Type Solder terminals (tab terminals #110) Illumination Method * LED Lamp * LED lamp Switch Specifications * Standard Loads 5 A at 125 VAC 3 A at 250 VAC 3 A at 30 VDC Note: A165E Emergency Stop Switch must be ordered as a set. No LED is installed for the non-lighted models. Push-lock, Turn-reset System Prevents Misuse Contact open Safety Lock Prevents Misuse Enables emergency stops only when the pushbutton is pressed intentionally and firmly. Even if an object or person touches the pushbutton by mistake, the contact will not be released unless the pushbutton reaches the lock position. Contact closed Lock position 116 Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. A165E-S 30 dia. 3+0.1 0 dia. Panel cutout dimensions A165E-LS Mounting ring Packing (T0.5) 7.8+0.3 0 dia. Non-lighted models 30 mm diameter 2. Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm. 16+0.2 0 dia. 10.85 22.10.8 30 dia. Lighted models 30 mm diameter Mounting ring 7.8+0.3 0 dia. Lock ring 3+0.1 0 dia. Note: 1. When applying a coating such as paint to the panel, dimensions after the coating must satisfy the specified dimensions. Lock ring Lock Panel cutout dimensions Packing (T0.5) Lock Note: 1. When applying a coating such as paint to the panel, dimensions after the coating must satisfy the specified dimensions. 2. Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm. 16+0.2 0 dia. 22.10.8 A165E-S-03U 22.7 30 dia. Non-lighted, one-body models 30 mm diameter Mounting ring 3+0.1 0 dia. 7.8+0.3 0 dia. 16+0.2 0 dia. Packing (T0.5) Lock ring Note: 1. When applying a coating such as paint to the panel, dimensions after the coating must satisfy the specified dimensions. 2. Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm. Panel cutout dimensions Mounting ring 117 A165E-M 40 dia. Non-lighted models 40 mm diameter Mounting ring Packing (T0.5) Lock ring Lock 2.6 1.4 18 12.1 7.8+0.3 0 dia. Panel cutout dimensions Note: 1. When applying a coating such as paint to the panel, dimensions after the coating must satisfy the specified dimensions. 2.8 3+0.1 0 dia. 16+0.2 0 dia. 15.8 12.3 0.5 M16x1 Switch 2. Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm. 10.80.5 200.8 21.10.8 28.50.8 A165E-LM Lighted models 40 mm diameter 40 dia. Mounting ring Packing (T0.5) Lock ring Lock Panel cutout dimensions 6.05 18 2.8 3+0.1 0 dia. 7.8+0.3 0 dia. 16+0.2 0 dia. 15.8 12.3 0.5 M16x1 Switch Note: 1. When applying a coating such as paint to the panel, dimensions after the coating must satisfy the specified dimensions. 2. Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm. A165E-M-03U One-body models 40 mm diameter 40 dia. 21.50.5 1 M16x1 Lock Panel cutout dimensions 118 7.8+0.3 0 dia. 16+0.2 0 dia. 3+0.1 0 dia. Packing (T0.5) Lock ring Mounting ring Note: 1. When applying a coating such as paint to the panel, dimensions after the coating must satisfy the specified dimensions. 2. Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm. Accessories Panel Plugs Yellow Plate (Vinyl Chloride) Select an appropriate Panel Plug according to the panel design and mount from the front side of the panel. Panel cutout dimensions are the same as those for the Switch. A16Z-5070 Rectangular Square Round Screw Fitting A16Z-3004 15.6 dia. 45 dia. t=1 18 dia. Lock Ring Rough surface 15.8 0.1 dia. 12 x 12 Rough surface 0 15 dia. -0.1 Terminal Arrangement SPST Switches DPST Switches TPST Switches NC2 NC1 Stopper NC3 Note: The L+ and L- terminals are not available with the non-lighted models. 119 Installation Mounting to the Panel After installing the Operation Unit, snap in the Switch from the back of the panel. 1. Installing the Switch Attach rubber packing or the Yellow Plate onto the Switch from its terminal side. Insert the Switch into the panel from the front. Install the lock ring and mounting nut from the terminal side and tighten. Adjust the slits on the hole of rubber packing and Yellow Plate to the protruding part of the Unit. Rubber packing is not necessary when the Yellow Plate is used. Tighten the nut to the torque of 0.29 to 0.49 N*m. Casing should be installed with its protruding part adjusted to the slit of the panel hole. Align the lock ring to the groove of the casing so that the edge is drawn to the panel side. Panel Mounting nut Lock Rubber packing (included with the product) or Yellow Plate (sold separately) Cutout Edge Lock ring Panel Lock hole Lock ring Rubber packing or Yellow Plate (sold separately) Mounting nut 2. Mounting the Switch 3. Removing the Switch Snap on the Switch to the Operation Unit. Insert the prongs of the A16Z-5080 Extractor between the Switch and the Operation Unit, grip the Switch, and pull to remove. Make sure that the Switch has the correct orientation when snapping it onto the Operation Unit. Align the white dot on the Operation Unit with the guide groove on the side of the Switch marked with an "L" as shown below, and push the Switch into the Operation Unit until it clicks into place. Confirm that the Switch is securely in place before using. Guide groove White dot Extractor (A16Z-5080) L marking 4. Installing the LED Lamp When mounting the Lamp, make sure it is facing the direction shown in the following diagram. Insert the Lamp while matching the protruding part of the Lamp and the small guides on the outer surface of the casing. Narrow guide Protruding part 120 Wide guide Safety Precautions Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on page 14. Precautions for Correct Use LEDs Mounting The LED current-limiting resistor is built-in, so internal resistance is not required. Always make sure that the power is turned OFF before mounting, removing, or wiring the Switch, or performing maintenance. Electrical shock or fire may result if the power is not turned OFF. The tightening torque is 0.29 to 0.49 N*m. 24 VDC Rated voltage Internal limiting resistor 2000 Wiring Operating Torque Be sure to use electrical wires that are a size appropriate for the applied voltage and carry current. Perform soldering according to the conditions given below. If the soldering is not properly performed, abnormal heating may result, possibly resulting in fire. 1. Hand soldering: 30 W, within 5 s 2. Dip soldering: 240C, within 3 s Wait for one minute after soldering before exerting any external force on the solder. Use non-corrosive resin fluid as the flux. Make sure that the electric cord is wired so that it does not touch the Unit. If the electric cord will touch the Unit, then electric wires with a heat resistance of 100C min. must be used. After wiring the Switch, maintain an appropriate clearance and creepage distance. Do not exceed an operating torque of 0.49 N*m in the direction of rotation. Do not pull the operating button or apply excessive force to any side of the button. Otherwise it may be damaged. Operating Environment The IP65 model is designed with a degree of protection so that it will not sustain damage if it is subjected to water from any direction to the front of the panel. Others The oil-resistant IP65 uses NBR rubber and is resistant to general cutting oil and cooling oil. Some particular oils cannot be used with the oil-resistant IP65, however, so contact your OMRON representative for details. When painting or coating the panel, make sure that the specified panel dimensions apply to the panel after painting or coating. Due to the structure of the switch, severe shock or vibration may cause malfunctions or damage to the switch. Also, most switches are made from resin and will be damaged if they come into contact with sharp objects. Particularly scratches on the Operation Unit may create visual and operational obtrusions. Handle the switches with care, and do not throw or drop them. Using the Microload Voltage (V) Insert a contact protection circuit, if necessary, to prevent the reduction of life expectancy due to extreme wear on the contacts caused by loads where inrush current occurs when the contact is opened and closed. The A165E-@U allows both a standard load (125 V at 1 A, 250 V at 0.5 A) and a microload. If a standard load is applied, however, the microload area cannot be used. If the microload area is used with a standard load, the contact surface will become rough, and the opening and closing of the contact for a microload may become unreliable. The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability level of 60% ( 60) (conforming to JIS C5003). The equation, 60 = 0.5 x 10-6/time indicates that the estimated malfunction rate is less than 1/2,000,000 with a reliability level of 60%. Dropping or striking Dropping objects or placing heavy objects on a switch 0.15 mA Operating a switch with a hard or sharp object Area of use Invalid area Hammer Screwdriver 1 mA Current (mA) ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A120-E1-06 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. 121 Indicator M16 Cylindrical 16-dia. Indicator * Same basic design as the A16 Pushbutton Switch. * UL and cUL approved (File No. E41515). Model Number Structure Model Number Legend Completely Assembled The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Display, Case, Lamp, and Socket. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) M 1 6 5 - T R - 24D - S (5) Terminal Type Symbol Terminal type No symbol Solder terminals S Screw-Less Clamp (1) Degree of Protection Symbol No symbol 5 (4) Light Source Protection IP40 IP65 oil-resistant (2) Shape of Display Symbol Shape (3) Color of Display Symbol Color Symbol 12 Rectangular R A Square G T Round Y Yellow 5D PY Pure yellow 12D W White 24D A Blue J Red Green Type 5 24 Operating voltage Rated voltage 5 VAC/VDC 6 VAC/VDC Incandescent 12 VAC/VDC lamp 24 VAC/VDC LED 14 VAC/VDC 28 VAC/VDC 5 5% VDC 5 VDC 12 5% VDC 12 VDC 24 5% VDC 24 VDC Voltage Reduction Unit (24-V Built-in LED) Symbol T1 T2 Type LED Operating voltage Rated voltage 90 to 121 VAC/VDC 110 VAC/VDC 180 to 242 VAC/VDC 220 VAC/VDC Solder terminals are available only with 100-V models. 122 Ordering Information List of Models Ordering as a Set The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following tables. One set comprises the Display, Case, Lamp, and Socket. M16@-J (Rectangular) Models Solder Terminal Models Appearance Lighting Operating voltage IP40 IP65 oil-resistant LED without Voltage Reduction Unit 5 VDC M16-J@-5D M165-J@-5D 12 VDC M16-J@-12D M165-J@-12D 24 VDC M16-J@-24D M165-J@-24D Incandescent lamp 5 VDC/VAC M16-J@-5 M165-J@-5 12 VDC/VAC M16-J@-12 M165-J@-12 24 VDC/VAC M16-J@-24 M165-J@-24 Display color symbol (See note.) R: red Y: yellow G: green A: blue W: white PY: Pure yellow M16@-A (Square) Models Solder Terminal Models Appearance Lighting LED without Voltage Reduction Unit Incandescent lamp Operating voltage IP40 IP65 oil-resistant 5 VDC M16-A@-5D M165-A@-5D 12 VDC M16-A@-12D M165-A@-12D 24 VDC M16-A@-24D M165-A@-24D 5 VDC/VAC M16-A@-5 M165-A@-5 12 VDC/VAC M16-A@-12 M165-A@-12 24 VDC/VAC M16-A@-24 M165-A@-24 Display color symbol (See note.) R: red Y: yellow G: green A: blue W: white PY: Pure yellow M16@-T (Round) Models Solder Terminal Models Appearance Lighting LED without Voltage Reduction Unit Incandescent lamp Operating voltage IP40 IP65 oil-resistant 5 VDC M16-T@-5D M165-T@-5D 12 VDC M16-T@-12D M165-T@-12D 24 VDC M16-T@-24D M165-T@-24D 5 VDC/VAC M16-T@-5 M165-T@-5 12 VDC/VAC M16-T@-12 M165-T@-12 24 VDC/VAC M16-T@-24 M165-T@-24 Display color symbol (See note.) R: red Y: yellow G: green A: blue W: white PY: Pure yellow Note: Enter the desired color symbol for the Display in @. 123 Ordering Individually Displays, Cases, Lamps, and Sockets can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual parts. Also, store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs. Display (Refer to page 125.) Rectangular Square Round Note: Use IP40 Displays in combination with IP40 Sockets and use IP65 Displays in combination with IP65 Sockets. Case (Refer to page 125.) Note: Display Units, which are combinations of Displays and Cases, are also available. Lighted Models Lamp (Refer to page 125.) LED Incandescent Lamp Socket (Refer to page 126.) Solder Terminals (Without Voltage Reduction Unit) Note: Socket Units, which are combinations of Lamps and Sockets, are also available. 124 Display For LED-lighted Models Sealing IP40 Appearance Rectangular IP65 oil-resistant Square Round Rectangular Square Round A165L-TR Color of Display Red A16L-JR A16L-AR A16L-TR A165L-JR A165L-AR Yellow A16L-JY A16L-AY A16L-TY A165L-JY A165L-AY A165L-TY Pure yellow A16L-JPY A16L-APY A16L-TPY A165L-JPY A165L-APY A165L-TPY Green A16L-JGY A16L-AGY A16L-TGY A165L-JGY A165L-AGY A165L-TGY White A16L-JW A16L-AW A16L-TW A165L-JW A165L-AW A165L-TW Blue A16L-JA A16L-AA A16L-TA A165L-JA A165L-AA A165L-TA Incandescent Lamps (With the exception of green, the Units are the same as for LEDs.) Sealing IP40 Appearance Rectangular IP65 oil-resistant Square Round Rectangular Square Round A165L-TR Color of Display Red A16L-JR A16L-AR A16L-TR A165L-JR A165L-AR Yellow A16L-JY A16L-AY A16L-TY A165L-JY A165L-AY A165L-TY Pure yellow A16L-JPY A16L-APY A16L-TPY A165L-JPY A165L-APY A165L-TPY Green A16L-JG A16L-AG A16L-TG A165L-JG A165L-AG A165L-TG White A16L-JW A16L-AW A16L-TW A165L-JW A165L-AW A165L-TW Blue A16L-JA A16L-AA A16L-TA A165L-JA A165L-AA A165L-TA Lamp LED Color Operating voltage 5 VDC Red A16-5DSR 12 VDC A16-12DSR 24 VDC A16-24DSR Yellow A16-5DSY A16-12DSY A16-24DSY Green A16-5DSG A16-12DSG A16-24DSG White (See note.) A16-5DSW A16-12DSW A16-24DSW Blue A16-5DA A16-12DA A16-24DA Note: Use the white LED when the required illumination color is white or pure yellow. Incandescent Lamp Operating voltage Model 5 VAC/VDC A16-5 12 VAC/VDC A16-12 24 VAC/VDC A16-24 Case Appearance Classification IP40 IP65 oil-resistant Rectangular Model number A16-CJM Square A16-CAM Round A16-CTM Rectangular A165-CJM Square A165-CAM Round A165-CTM 125 Socket Appearance Classification Model number Solder terminals M16-0 PCB terminals M16-0P Screw-Less Clamp M16-S Solder terminals Solder terminals Voltage-reduction lighting Screw-Less Clamp 100 V M16-T1 100 V M16-T1-S 200 V M16-T2-S Specifications Approved Standards Agency UL, cUL (See note.) Standards UL508 File No. E41515 Note: cUL: CSA, C22.2 No. 14 Ratings Super-bright LED Rated voltage 5 VDC Incandescent Lamp Rated current Operating voltage 30 mA (red: 15 mA) 5 VDC 5% Built-in limiting resistance 33 (blue: 51 , red: 68 ) 12 VDC 15 mA 12 VDC 5% 270 (blue: 270 , red 560 ) 24 VDC 10 mA 24 VDC 5% 1,600 (blue: 1.8 k, red: 2 k) Note: The values in parentheses are for blue or red Pushbuttons. Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage 6 VAC/VDC 60 mA 5 VAC/VDC 14 VAC/VDC 40 mA 12 VAC/VDC 28 VAC/VDC 24 mA 24 VAC/VDC Neon Lamp Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage 110 VAC 1.5 mA 100 VAC 10% 220 VAC 1.5 mA 200 VAC 10% Characteristics Ambient operating temperature -10C to 55C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient operating humidity 35% to 85% Ambient storage temperature -25C to 65C Note: Characteristics not provided above are the same as those for the A16. Screw-less Clamp Item Screw-less Clamp Recommended wire size 0.5 mm2 twisted wire or 0.8 mm-dia. solid wire Usable wires and ten- Twisted wire sile strength Solid wire 0.3 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.75 mm 2 1.25 mm2 0.5 mm dia. 0.8 mm dia. 1.0 mm dia. --- 10 N 20 N 30 N 40 N Tensile strength Length of exposed wire 126 10 1 mm Dimensions Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. 2. Refer to page 129 for details of panel cutout dimensions. Rectangular Square M16-J M16-A Packing (t0.5) Solder terminals Packing (t0.5) Solder terminals 14.6 dia.18 dia. 14.6 dia. 18 dia. Lamp terminals Lamp terminals Mounting nut Lock ring Mounting nut Lock ring Round M16-T Packing (t0.5) M16 x 1 Solder terminals 18 dia. 15.1 dia. 14.6 dia. 18 dia. Lamp terminals Terminal Hole Dimensions Lamp terminals 14.6 dia. 18 dia. Mounting nut Lock ring 127 Rectangular The rectangular model is given here as a representative example. Lamp terminals are provided even for non-lighting applications. M16@-P PCB terminals 28.3 9.5 26.4 6 23.1 Panel Cutouts 21.1 10.8 16+0.2 0 dia. 4 24 min. 2.5 18.4 20.4 6.3 0.5 24 min. Lock ring Mounting ring 18 4.85 12.4 18.6 15.1 0.5 Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm 21 Packing (t0.5) (for oil-resistant IP65 only) 24 Rectangular M16@-T1, T2 Voltage-reduction lighting, solder terminals Panel Cutouts Direction-indication arrow Display Marking face Case Packing (t0.5) (for oil-resistant IP65 only) 16+0.2 0 dia. 25 min. 23 min. (Dimension A) Lock ring Mounting ring Socket Recommended panel thickness: 0.5 to 3.2 mm Rectangular M16@-S Screw-Less Clamp Socket dismounting lever Lock ring Mounting ring Packing (t0.5) (for oil-resistant IP65 only) 128 Terminal Arrangement Solder Terminals Screw-Less Clamp Bottom View Voltage-reduction Lighting Bottom View Black Bottom View Side with TOP indicated Side with TOP indicated Note: The L+ is not shown on the Socket Unit. Red Note: Voltage-reduction lighting models with Screw-Less Clamps (A16L-@T1-2S, A16L-@T2-2S) incorporate voltage-reduction circuits. Panel Cutouts Solder Terminals Solder Terminals Screw-Less Clamp Rectangular M16@-J Square M16@-A Round M16@-T Rectangular M16@-S (Top View) (Top View) (Top View) 16+0.2 0 dia. 16+0.2 0 dia. 16+0.2 0 dia. 24 min. 25 min. 19 min. 19 min. 19 min. 32 min. (Dimension A) Note: 1. Make sure the thickness of the mounting panel is 0.5 to 3.2 mm. If, however, a Switch Guard or Dust Cover is used, the thickness of the mounting panel must be 0.5 to 2 mm. 2. If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after coating. Installation Refer to the Installation section for the A16. 129 Precautions Refer to the Technical Information for Pushbutton Switches (Cat. No. A143) and the Precautions section for the A16. Correct Use Mounting Wiring When mounting the Case onto the Socket Unit, ensure that the orientation is correct. Perform mounting with the * mark on the Case and the TOP mark on the Socket Unit facing in the same direction. When using stranded wire, gather the ends of the strands together before wiring. TOP mark When wiring, insert the wire until it comes into contact with something. After wiring is completed, pull on the wires to confirm that they are connected securely. After wiring, ensure that continuous pressure is not applied to the terminals. Refer to internal connections diagrams and confirm the terminal numbers before performing wiring. * mark Socket Unit Case Screw-Less Clamps Mounting Procedure 1. Strip a length of 10 mm off the end of the wire (allowable range: 101 mm). 2. Bunch wire strands together and straighten them. 3. Insert the wire into the insertion hole while pressing the release button at the side of the hole. (Using a precision screwdriver is recommended.) 4. Let go of the release button to lock the wire into place. 5. After locking, pull on the wire gently to confirm that it is securely locked. Removing Procedure Remove wires by pulling them while pressing the release button. Note: When reusing wires that have already been locked, cut off the end of the wire and strip the wire again before using. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A127-E1-03 130 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. Buzzer M2BJ-B 16-mm Diameter Panel-Mounted Buzzer Unit Four models offer eight different types of sounds, plus two modes newly added to the high-sound models Intermittent or continuous sound selected by jumper setting Three supply voltages: 6 VAC/VDC and 12 to 24 VAC/VDC Jumper storage provided at bottom of Unit Complements the A16 range of Pushbuttons, Selector Switches, and Key Switches. Ordering Information List of Models Item Standard sound High sound M2BJ-BH M2BJ-B Sound Supply pp y voltage lt Note: w/jumper Intermittent Intermittent (short) Intermittent (high-pitched) Intermittent (short, high-pitched) Intermittent (high-pitched) Intermittent (short) w/o jumper Continuous Intermittent (long) Continuous (high-pitched) Intermittent (long, high-pitched) Continuous Intermittent (long) 6 VAC/VDC M2BJ-B06 M2BJ-B06A M2BJ-B06B M2BJ-B06C M2BJ-BH06D M2BJ-BH06E 12 to 24 VAC/VDC M2BJ-B24 M2BJ-B24A M2BJ-B24B M2BJ-B24C M2BJ-BH24D M2BJ-BH24E 12 to 24 VDC M2BJ-B24-D --- M2BJ-B24B-D --- M2BJ-BH24D-D M2BJ-BH24E-D High-sound models incorporate an LED, which lights when the Buzzer sounds. 131 M2BJ-B M2BJ-B Specifications Standard-sound Models 6-V Models Model M2BJ-B06 M2BJ-B06A Rated voltage 6 VAC/VDC Sound pressure (See note.) Continuous sound: 80 dB (phons) min. Driving frequency 20.5 kHz Intervals 190 times/minute10% Current consumption p DC 7 mA max. AC 20 mA max. M2BJ-B06B 40.5 kHz Long: 55 times/minute10% Short: 700 times/minute10% 190 times/minute10% Long: 55 times/minute10% Short: 700 times/minute10% 20 mA max. Inrush current 1 A max. Life expectancy 1,000 hours min. Insulation resistance 100 M min. (between ground and current-carrying parts) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 minute (between grounds) Ambient temperature Operating: -10C to 55C (no icing or condensation) Storage: -25C to 65C (no icing or condensation) Humidity 35% to 85% Weight Approx. 9 g Note: M2BJ-B06C The figure for sound pressure given above is for measurement at a distance of 0.1 m at the rated voltage. 12 to 24-V Models Model M2BJ-B24 M2BJ-B24A Rated voltage 12 to 24 VAC/VDC Sound pressure (See note.) Continuous sound: 80 dB (phons) min. Driving frequency 20.5 kHz Intervals 190 times/minute 10% Current consumpt ion M2BJ-B24B M2BJ-B24C M2BJ-B24-D M2BJ-B24B-D 12 to 24 VDC 40.5 kHz Long: 55 times/minute 10% Short: 700 times/minute 10% 190 times/minute 10% 20.5 kHz, 40.5 kHz Long: 55 times/minute 10% Short: 700 times/minute 10% 190 times/minute10% DC 7 mA max. AC 20 mA --- Inrush current 1 A max. --- Life expectancy 1,000 hours min. Insulation resistance 100 M min. (between ground and current-carrying parts) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 minute (between grounds) Ambient temperature Operating: -10C to 55C (no icing or condensation) Storage: -25C to 65C (no icing or condensation) Humidity 35% to 85% Weight Approx. 9 g Note: 132 20 mA max. 7 mA max. The figure for sound pressure given above is for measurement at a distance of 0.1 m at the rated voltage. 20 mA max. M2BJ-B M2BJ-B High-sound Models (LED is incorporated) Model Rated voltage M2BJ-BH06D M2BJ-BH24D M2BJ-BH06E M2BJ-BH24E 6 VAC/VDC 12 to 24 VAC/VDC 6 VAC/VDC 12 to 24 VAC/VDC Sound pressure (See note.) 70 to 100 dB (phons) Driving frequency 2.80.5 kHz Intervals Approx. 190 times/min. Current consumption ti DC 50 mA max. AC Long: Approx. 55 times/min. Short: Approx. 700 times/min. M2BJ-BH24D-D M2BJ-BH24E-D 12 to 24 VDC Approx. 190 times/min. Long: Approx. 55 times/min. Short: Approx. 700 times/min. 100 mA max. --- Inrush current 1 A max. --- Life expectancy 1,000 hours min. Insulation resistance 100 M min. (between ground and current-carrying parts) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 minute (between grounds) Ambient temperature Operating: -10C to 55C (no icing or condensation) Storage: -25C to 65C (no icing or condensation) Humidity 35% to 85% Weight Approx. 13 g Note: The sound pressure can be adjusted. The figure for sound pressure given above is for measurement at a distance of 0.1 m at the rated voltage. Operation Contact Form All Models (Standard and High-sound Models) Jumper Terminal Hole Dimensions Terminal Arrangement (Bottom view) Power supply Note: There is no +/- polarity. 133 M2BJ-B M2BJ-B Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. M2BJ-B Standard-sound Models 24 Sound outlet Panel cutout (Top view) Jumper (for switching intermittent sound) M2BJ-BH High-sound Models Panel cutout (Top view) Turn-lock metal 18 dia. 20 16 +0.2 0 dia. Control knob (Groove width 0.6 x length 1.7 x depth 0.7) Mounting ring Turn-lock metal 26 min. Short-circuit terminal (for switching sound) M16 x 1 20 min. 14.8 dia. Note: Recommended panel thickness: 1.0 to 3.2 mm. M2BJ-BH24D-DA External Signal Selection Model An external signal selection model is also available. With this model, it is possible to switch between continuous and intermittent sound using an external signal instead of the jumper. SW: When A direction is ON (terminals 1, 2 ON): intermittent sound When B direction is ON (terminals 2, 3 ON): continuous sound Note: 134 Ensure that voltage is not applied simultaneously between terminals 1, 2, and 3. M2BJ-B M2BJ-B Precautions Correct Use Application Precautions When power is supplied, there is an inrush current of up to 1 A. Confirm that this will not adversely affect operation or damage any devices before using the M2BJ in application. There is no inrush current with DC-only models (M2BJ-jjj-D). To produce continuous sounds, attach the bracket to the case guide so that the triangle on the bracket faces direction B. Case guide Wiring Perform soldering promptly and correctly at 30 W within 5 seconds or at a temperature of 240C within 3 seconds. Wait for one minute after soldering before exerting any external force on the solder. If flux is required, use non-corrosive rosin liquid. Ensure that the flux does not penetrate the inside of the case. In order to improve the reliability of the soldering and to prevent pattern burnout, loop the wire through the terminal hole before soldering. In order to fit the terminal holes, use lead wires with a nominal crosssectional area of 0.25 mm2 max. Operating Environment Do not use the Buzzer in environments where foreign substances may enter the sound outlet. Otherwise, the Buzzer may not sound. Bracket PC board Volume Adjustment Mechanism (M2BJ-BH Only) Adjust the volume by turning the control knob on the face of the Buzzer using a screwdriver. Turn to the right to increase the volume and turn to the left to decrease the volume. Turn the control knob with a torque of 0.98 to 2.94 mNm. LED Short-circuiting Jumper (M2BJ-BTH) The Buzzer sounds continuously or intermittently depending on how the short-circuiting bracket is attached to the case guide. When the bracket is attached with the triangle on it facing direction A (PC board side), the Buzzer sounds intermittently. Control knob Case guide Direction B Direction A Bracket ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A046-E1-04 135 Pushbutton Switch A22 Install in 22-dia. or 25-dia. Panel Cutout * Easy mounting and removal of Switch Unit. * Increase wiring efficiency with three-row mounting of Switch Blocks. * Finger protection mechanism on Switch Unit provided as a standard feature. * Use 25-dia. ring to install in 25-dia. panel cutouts. * Mounted using either open-type (fork-type) or closed-type (round-type) crimp terminals. * Wide range of shapes and colors. * IP65 oil resistance (non-lighted models) IP65 (lighted models) * EN60947-5-1 * UL and cUL approved (File No. E41515) Model Number Structure Model Number Legend Completely Assembled Shipped as a set which includes the Pushbutton, Lamp (lighted type only), and Switch. 1 2 3 4 5 6 A22@-@@-@-@@ 1 Lighted/Non-lighted Code Description No symbol Non-lighted L Lighted 2 Flange Shape Non-lighted Code Code Code Description Round/Flat T Round/Projection G Round/Full-guard H Round/Half-guard C Square/Projection D Square/Full-guard S Round/Mushroom (30-dia. head) M Round/Mushroom (40-dia. head) Description SPST-NO R Red 10 G Green 01 SPST-NC Y Yellow 11 SPST-NO + SPST-NC W White 20 DPST-NO A Blue 02 DPST-NC B Black (for non-lighted type only) Description F Lighted 136 5 Contacts 3 Illumination Color Note: Refer to page 149 for contact ratings. 4 Light Source Without Voltage Reduction Unit Code Operating Voltage No symbol Non-lighted 6D LED 6 VDC 6A 6 VAC 12A 12 VAC/VDC 24A 5 T Round/Projection 12 G Round/Full-guard 24 H Round/Half-guard H1 C Square/Projection D Square/Full-guard 24 VAC/VDC Incandescent lamp 5 VAC/VDC 12 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 100 VAC/VDC T1 With Voltage Reduction Unit LED 100 VAC (See note 1) T2 200 VAC (See note 2) 6 Switch Action Code M Description Momentary A Alternate Note: 1. Operational voltage: 95 to 115 VAC 2. Operational voltage: 190 to 230 VAC 3. The LED lamp (24 VAC/VDC) can be lit by directly applying 100 VAC/VDC (200 VAC/VDC) to the lamp terminal. 4. LED incorporates the 24-VAC/VDC type to the Voltage Reduction Unit models. Subassembled The Pushbutton, Lamp, or Switch can be ordered separately. Use them in combination for models that are not available as assembled Units. These can also be used as inventory for maintenance parts. 1. Pushbutton 1 2 3 A22@-@@ 2 Flange Shape 1 Lighted/Non-lighted Code Description Code None Non-lighted L 3 Illumination Color Non-lighted Lighted Code Description Description R Red F Round/Flat G Green T Round/Projection Y Yellow G Round/Full-guard W White H Round/Half-guard A Blue C Square/Projection B Black (for non-lighted type only) D Square/Full-guard S Round/Mushroom (30-dia. head) M Round/Mushroom (40-dia. head) T Round/Projection G Round/Full-guard H Round/Half-guard C Square/Projection D Square/Full-guard Lighted 2. Lamp 1 2 A22-@@ 1 Operating Voltage (Rated Voltage) Code 2 Illumination Color Incandescent lamp Code Description None Incandescent lamp Description 5 5 VAC (6 VAC) R Red 12 12 VAC (14 VAC) G Green 24 24 VAC (28 VAC) Y Yellow A Blue LED lamp 6D 6 VDC (6 VDC) 6A 6 VAC (6 VAC) 12A 12 VAC/VDC (12 VAC/VDC) 24A 24 VAC/VDC (24 VAC/VDC) 137 3. Switch (Standard Load) 1 2 3 4 A22@-@@-@ 1 Lighted/Non-lighted Code Description Code Description 4 Voltage Reduction Unit (Lighted Type Only) Code Description None Non-lighted M Momentary None Without Voltage Reduction Unit L A Alternate T1 100 VAC (See note 1) T2 200 VAC (See note 2) Lighted Note: 1. Operational voltage: 95 to 115 VAC 2 Contacts Code 138 3 Switch Action Description 10 SPST-NO 01 SPST-NC 11 SPST-NO + SPST-NC 20 DPST-NO 02 DPST-NC 2. Operational voltage: 190 to 230 VAC Ordering Information List of Models Ordering as a Set Non-lighted (Round Type) Appearance Round/Flat type A22-F Round/Projection type A22-T Round/Full-guard type A22-G Round/Half-guard type A22-H Round/Small-size Mushroom type (30-dia. head) A22-S Round/Medium-size Mushroom type (40-dia head) A22-M Output Momentary operation (self-resetting) Alternate operation (self-holding) SPST-NO A22-F@-10M A22-F@-10A SPST-NC A22-F@-01M A22-F@-01A SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-F@-11M A22-F@-11A DPST-NO A22-F@-20M A22-F@-20A DPST-NC A22-F@-02M A22-F@-02A SPST-NO A22-T@-10M A22-T@-10A SPST-NC A22-T@-01M A22-T@-01A SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-T@-11M A22-T@-11A DPST-NO A22-T@-20M A22-T@-20A DPST-NC A22-T@-02M A22-T@-02A SPST-NO A22-G@-10M A22-G@-10A SPST-NC A22-G@-01M A22-G@-01A SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-G@-11M A22-G@-11A DPST-NO A22-G@-20M A22-G@-20A DPST-NC A22-G@-02M A22-G@-02A SPST-NO A22-H@-10M A22-H@-10A SPST-NC A22-H@-01M A22-H@-01A SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-H@-11M A22-H@-11A DPST-NO A22-H@-20M A22-H@-20A DPST-NC A22-H@-02M A22-H@-02A SPST-NO A22-S@-10M --- SPST-NC A22-S@-01M SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-S@-11M DPST-NO A22-S@-20M DPST-NC A22-S@-02M SPST-NO A22-M@-10M SPST-NC A22-M@-01M SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-M@-11M DPST-NO A22-M@-20M DPST-NC A22-M@-02M Illumination color Insert one of the following letters into the box @. R (red) Y (yellow) G (green) W (white) A (blue) B (black) 139 Non-lighted (Square Type) Appearance Square/Projection type A22-C Square/Guard type A22-D Output Momentary operation (self-reset) Alternate operation (self-holding) SPST-NO A22-C@-10M A22-C@-10A SPST-NC A22-C@-01M A22-C@-01A SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-C@-11M A22-C@-11A DPST-NO A22-C@-20M A22-C@-20A DPST-NC A22-C@-02M A22-C@-02A SPST-NO A22-D@-10M A22-D@-10A SPST-NC A22-D@-01M A22-D@-01A SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-D@-11M A22-D@-11A DPST-NO A22-D@-20M A22-D@-20A DPST-NC A22-D@-02M A22-D@-02A Illumination color Insert one of the following letters into the box @. R (red) Y (yellow) G (green) W (white) A (blue) B (black) Lighted (Round Type) Appearance Round/Projection type LED lighting (without Voltage Reduction Unit) A22L-T Output SPST-NO Lighting LED SPST-NC SPST-NO + SPST-NC DPST-NO DPST-NC Round/Projection type SPST-NO LED voltagereduction lighting (with Voltage Reduction Unit) SPST-NC A22L-T LED Operating voltage Momentary operation (self-resetting) Alternate operation (self-holding) 6 VDC A22L-T@-6D-10M A22L-T@-6D-10A 6 VAC A22L-T@-6A-10M A22L-T@-6A-10A 12 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-12A-10M A22L-T@-12A-10A 24 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-24A-10M A22L-T@-24A-10A 6 VDC A22L-T@-6D-01M A22L-T@-6D-01A 6 VAC A22L-T@-6A-01M A22L-T@-6A-01A 12 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-12A-01M A22L-T@-12A-01A 24 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-24A-01M A22L-T@-24A-01A 6 VDC A22L-T@-6D-11M A22L-T@-6D-11A 6 VAC A22L-T@-6A-11M A22L-T@-6A-11A 12 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-12A-11M A22L-T@-12A-11A 24 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-24A-11M A22L-T@-24A-11A 6 VDC A22L-T@-6D-20M A22L-T@-6D-20A A22L-T@-6A-20A 6 VAC A22L-T@-6A-20M 12 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-12A-20M A22L-T@-12A-20A 24 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-24A-20M A22L-T@-24A-20A 6 VDC A22L-T@-6D-02M A22L-T@-6D-02A 6 VAC A22L-T@-6A-02M A22L-T@-6A-02A 12 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-12A-02M A22L-T@-12A-02A 24 VAC/VDC A22L-T@-24A-02M A22L-T@-24A-02A 100 VAC A22L-T@-T1-10M A22L-T@-T1-10A 200 VAC A22L-T@-T2-10M A22L-T@-T2-10A 100 VAC A22L-T@-T1-01M A22L-T@-T1-01A 200 VAC A22L-T@-T2-01M A22L-T@-T2-01A SPST-NO + SPST-NC 100 VAC A22L-T@-T1-11M A22L-T@-T1-11A 200 VAC A22L-T@-T2-11M A22L-T@-T2-11A DPST-NO 100 VAC A22L-T@-T1-20M A22L-T@-T1-20A 200 VAC A22L-T@-T2-20M A22L-T@-T2-20A DPST-NC 100 VAC A22L-T@-T1-02M A22L-T@-T1-02A 200 VAC A22L-T@-T2-02M A22L-T@-T2-02A 24 VAC/VDC A22L-H@-24A-10M A22L-H@-24A-10A Round/Half-guard type SPST-NO LED lighting (without Voltage Reduction Unit) SPST-NC A22L-H@-24A-01M A22L-H@-24A-01A SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22L-H@-24A-11M A22L-H@-24A-11A DPST-NO A22L-H@-24A-20M A22L-H@-24A-20A DPST-NC A22L-H@-24A-02M A22L-H@-24A-02A A22L-H 140 Illumination color Insert one of the following letters into the box @. R (red) Y (yellow) G (green) W (white) A (blue) Appearance Output Round/Half-guard type SPST-NO LED voltagereduction lighting (with Voltage Reduction Unit) SPST-NC SPST-NO + SPST-NC DPST-NO A22L-H Round/Full-guard type LED lighting (without Voltage Reduction Unit) A22L-G DPST-NC SPST-NO SPST-NC SPST-NO + SPST-NC DPST-NO DPST-NC Round/Full-guard type SPST-NO LED voltagereduction lighting (with Voltage Reduction Unit) SPST-NC SPST-NO + SPST-NC DPST-NO DPST-NC A22L-G Lighting LED Operating voltage Momentary operation (self-resetting) Alternate operation (self-holding) 100 VAC A22L-H@-T1-10M A22L-H@-T1-10A 200 VAC A22L-H@-T2-10M A22L-H@-T2-10A 100 VAC A22L-H@-T1-01M A22L-H@-T1-01A 200 VAC A22L-H@-T2-01M A22L-H@-T2-01A 100 VAC A22L-H@-T1-11M A22L-H@-T1-11A 200 VAC A22L-H@-T2-11M A22L-H@-T2-11A 100 VAC A22L-H@-T1-20M A22L-H@-T1-20A 200 VAC A22L-H@-T2-20M A22L-H@-T2-20A 100 VAC A22L-H@-T1-02M A22L-H@-T1-02A 200 VAC A22L-H@-T2-02M A22L-H@-T2-02A 6 VDC A22L-G@-6D-10M A22L-G@-6D-10A 6 VAC A22L-G@-6A-10M A22L-G@-6A-10A 12 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-12A-10M A22L-G@-12A-10A 24 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-24A-10M A22L-G@-24A-10A 6 VDC A22L-G@-6D-01M A22L-G@-6D-01A 6 VAC A22L-G@-6A-01M A22L-G@-6A-01A 12 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-12A-01M A22L-G@-12A-01A 24 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-24A-01M A22L-G@-24A-01A 6 VDC A22L-G@-6D-11M A22L-G@-6D-11A 6 VAC A22L-G@-6A-11M A22L-G@-6A-11A 12 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-12A-11M A22L-G@-12A-11A 24 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-24A-11M A22L-G@-24A-11A 6 VDC A22L-G@-6D-20M A22L-G@-6D-20A 6 VAC A22L-G@-6A-20M A22L-G@-6A-20A 12 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-12A-20M A22L-G@-12A-20A 24 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-24A-20M A22L-G@-24A-20A 6 VDC A22L-G@-6D-02M A22L-G@-6D-02A 6 VAC A22L-G@-6A-02M A22L-G@-6A-02A 12 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-12A-02M A22L-G@-12A-02A 24 VAC/VDC A22L-G@-24A-02M A22L-G@-24A-02A 100 VAC A22L-G@-T1-10M A22L-G@-T1-10A 200 VAC A22L-G@-T2-10M A22L-G@-T2-10A 100 VAC A22L-G@-T1-01M A22L-G@-T1-01A 200 VAC A22L-G@-T2-01M A22L-G@-T2-01A 100 VAC A22L-G@-T1-11M A22L-G@-T1-11A 200 VAC A22L-G@-T2-11M A22L-G@-T2-11A 100 VAC A22L-G@-T1-20M A22L-G@-T1-20A 200 VAC A22L-G@-T2-20M A22L-G@-T2-20A 100 VAC A22L-G@-T1-02M A22L-G@-T1-02A 200 VAC A22L-G@-T2-02M A22L-G@-T2-02A Illumination color Insert one of the following letters into the box @. R (red) Y (yellow) G (green) W (white) A (blue) 141 Lighted (Square Type) Appearance Square/Projection type LED lighting (without Voltage Reduction Unit) A22L-C Output SPST-NO A22L-C@-24A-01M A22L-C@-24A-01A SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22L-C@-24A-11M A22L-C@-24A-11A DPST-NO A22L-C@-24A-20M A22L-C@-24A-20A DPST-NC A22L-C@-24A-02M A22L-C@-24A-02A SPST-NC SPST-NO + SPST-NC DPST-NO Square/Full-guard type LED lighting (without Voltage Reduction Unit) Alternate operation (self-holding) SPST-NC LED voltagereduction lighting (with Voltage Reduction Unit) DPST-NC 24 VAC/VDC Momentary operation (self-resetting) A22L-C@-24A-10A SPST-NO LED Operating voltage A22L-C@-24A-10M Square/Projection type A22L-C Lighting 100 VAC A22L-C@-T1-10M A22L-C@-T1-10A 200 VAC A22L-C@-T2-10M A22L-C@-T2-10A 100 VAC A22L-C@-T1-01M A22L-C@-T1-01A 200 VAC A22L-C@-T2-01M A22L-C@-T2-01A 100 VAC A22L-C@-T1-11M A22L-C@-T1-11A 200 VAC A22L-C@-T2-11M A22L-C@-T2-11A 100 VAC A22L-C@-T1-20M A22L-C@-T1-20A 200 VAC A22L-C@-T2-20M A22L-C@-T2-20A 100 VAC A22L-C@-T1-02M A22L-C@-T1-02A 200 VAC A22L-C@-T2-02M A22L-C@-T2-02A 24 VAC/VDC A22L-D@-24A-10M A22L-D@-24A-10A SPST-NC A22L-D@-24A-01M A22L-D@-24A-01A SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22L-D@-24A-11M A22L-D@-24A-11A DPST-NO A22L-D@-24A-20M A22L-D@-24A-20A DPST-NC A22L-D@-24A-02M A22L-D@-24A-02A SPST-NO A22L-D Square/Full-guard type SPST-NO LED voltagereduction lighting (with Voltage Reduction Unit) SPST-NC SPST-NO + SPST-NC DPST-NO A22L-D 142 DPST-NC 100 VAC A22L-D@-T1-10M A22L-D@-T1-10A 200 VAC A22L-D@-T2-10M A22L-D@-T2-10A 100 VAC A22L-D@-T1-01M A22L-D@-T1-01A 200 VAC A22L-D@-T2-01M A22L-D@-T2-01A 100 VAC A22L-D@-T1-11M A22L-D@-T1-11A 200 VAC A22L-D@-T2-11M A22L-D@-T2-11A 100 VAC A22L-D@-T1-20M A22L-D@-T1-20A 200 VAC A22L-D@-T2-20M A22L-D@-T2-20A 100 VAC A22L-D@-T1-02M A22L-D@-T1-02A 200 VAC A22L-D@-T2-02M A22L-D@-T2-02A Illumination color Insert one of the following letters into the box @. R (red) Y (yellow) G (green) W (white) A (blue) Ordering Individually Non-lighted Models Pushbutton Lighted Models (without Voltage Reduction Unit) Lighted Models (with Voltage Reduction Unit) Pushbutton Pushbutton Lamp Incandescent lamp Switch Lamp LED Switch (without Voltage Reduction Unit) LED Switch (with Voltage Reduction Unit) 143 Pushbutton Non-lighted Color IP65 oil-resistant models Flat type Projection type Full-guard type Half-guard type Red A22-FR A22-TR A22-GR A22-HR Green A22-FG A22-TG A22-GG A22-HG Yellow A22-FY A22-TY A22-GY A22-HY White A22-FW A22-TW A22-GW A22-HW Blue A22-FA A22-TA A22-GA A22-HA Black A22-FB A22-TB A22-GB A22-HB Square/Projection type Square/Full-guard type Round/Mushroom type (30-dia. head) Round/Mushroom type (40-dia. head) A22-MR Color IP65 oil-resistant models Red A22-CR A22-DR A22-SR Green A22-CG A22-DG A22-SG A22-MG Yellow A22-CY A22-DY A22-SY A22-MY White A22-CW A22-DW A22-SW A22-MW Blue A22-CA A22-DA A22-SA A22-MA Black A22-CB A22-DB A22-SB A22-MB Lighted Color IP65 Projection type Full-guard type Half-guard type A22L-HR Red A22L-TR A22L-GR Green A22L-TG A22L-GG A22L-HG Yellow A22L-TY A22L-GY A22L-HY White A22L-TW A22L-GW A22L-HW Blue A22L-TA A22L-GA A22L-HA Note: Common to incandescent lamps and LED lamps. Color IP65 Square/Projection Square/Full-guard type Red A22L-CR A22L-DR Green A22L-CG A22L-DG Yellow A22L-CY A22L-DY White A22L-CW A22L-DW Blue A22L-CA A22L-DA 144 Lamp LED Lamp Operating voltage Appearance AC/DC DC AC AC and DC 6V 12 V LED light 24 V 24 V Super-bright Model Red A22-6DR --- --- --- Green A22-6DG --- --- --- Yellow (See note 2.) A22-6DY --- --- --- Blue A22-6DA --- --- ----- Red A22-6AR --- --- Green A22-6AG --- --- --- Yellow (See note 2.) A22-6AY --- --- --- Blue A22-6AA --- --- --- Red --- A22-12AR A22-24AR A22-24ASR Green --- A22-12AG A22-24AG A22-24ASG Yellow (See note 2.) --- A22-12AY A22-24AY A22-24ASY Blue --- A22-12AA A22-24AA A22-24ASA Note: 1. For voltage-reduction lighting, use the A22-24A@. 2. Used when the Pushbutton color is yellow or white. Incandescent Lamp Operating voltage 5 VAC/VDC A22-5 12 VAC/VDC A22-12 24 VAC/VDC A22-24 Switch (Standard Load) Non-lighted Contacts Switch operation Momentary Alternate Model SPST-NO A22-10M SPST-NC A22-01M SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-11M DPST-NO A22-20M DPST-NC A22-02M SPST-NO A22-10A SPST-NC A22-01A SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-11A DPST-NO A22-20A DPST-NC A22-02A 145 Lighted Switch operation Contacts Voltage reduction circuits With Voltage Reduction Unit Without Voltage Reduction Unit Momentary Alternate 110 VAC 220 VAC SPST-NO A22L-10M A22L-10M-T1 A22L-10M-T2 SPST-NC A22L-01M A22L-01M-T1 A22L-01M-T2 SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22L-11M A22L-11M-T1 A22L-11M-T2 DPST-NO A22L-20M A22L-20M-T1 A22L-20M-T2 DPST-NC A22L-02M A22L-02M-T1 A22L-02M-T2 SPST-NO A22L-10A A22L-10A-T1 A22L-10A-T2 SPST-NC A22L-01A A22L-01A-T1 A22L-01A-T2 SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22L-11A A22L-11A-T1 A22L-11A-T2 DPST-NO A22L-20A A22L-20A-T1 A22L-20A-T2 DPST-NC A22L-02A A22L-02A-T1 A22L-02A-T2 Note: 1. The above diagrams show the DPST-NO contact models as representative examples. 2. For voltage-reduction lighting, use the A22-24A@. Accessories (Order Separately) Common to A22, A22S/W, A22K, M22, and A22E Item Switch Blocks Appearance Classification SPST-NO SPST-NC DPST-NO DPST-NC Lamp Sockets Legend Plate Frames Standard size A22-10S Standard load A22-01 Microload A22-01S Standard load A22-20 Microload A22-20S Standard load A22-02 Microload A22-02S 110 VAC A22-T1 220 VAC A22-T2 A22-TN For momentary models A22-3200 For alternate models A22-3210 With Snap-in Legend Plate (Without text) White A22Z-3321 Red A22Z-3322 Black A22Z-3323 Without Snap-in Legend Plate Large size Model A22-10 Microload Direct lighting Voltage-reduction lighting Mounting Latches Standard load With Snap-in Legend Plate (Without text) Remarks Provided as standard. Order Switch Blocks only when adding or replacing them. Used when changing the lighting method. (LED only) Provided as standard. Order Mounting Latches only when mounting Switch Blocks or Lamp Sockets that are purchased individually. Snap-in Legend Plate is acrylic. A22Z-3320 White A22Z-3331 Red A22Z-3332 Black A22Z-3333 Without Snap-in Legend Plate A22Z-3330 Lock Ring Round A22Z-3360 The body is equipped with a Lock Ring. This Lock Ring is used when a more secure lock feature is required. Metallic Bezel Rings For flat or projection models A22Z-3580 Replace with the standard model. Material: nickel-plated zinc For full-guard models A22Z-3582 146 Item Appearance Sealing Caps Caps A22 M22 Color Caps For A22 For M22 Classification Model For flat models A22Z-3600F For projection models A22Z-3600T For full-guard models A22Z-3600G For projection, full-guard, or half- A22Z-3490 guard models For round models A22Z-3495 Red A22Z-30TR Green A22Z-30TG Yellow A22Z-30TY White A22Z-30TW Blue A22Z-30TA Three-throw Spacer Hole Plug Round Control Boxes (Enclosures) One hole Exclusively for A22 Exclusively for A22 Two holes Exclusively for A22 Material: polycarbonate resin Used for changing the Pushbutton color of the (round) Pushbutton Switches. A22Z-3003 Used when mounting three Nonlighted Switches. (See page 164.) A22Z-3530 Can be plugged into pre-cut panel holes for future expansion. The color is black. A22Z-B101 For those designed exclusively for A22, DPST-NO or DPST-NC Switches cannot be used. Material: Polycarbonate resin Compatible with A22Z-B201 A3T One hole, yellow box (for emergency stop) Remarks Used to prevent dust or water from entering the Operation Unit (Pushbutton, etc.). Color: opaque Material: silicon A22Z-B101Y Compatible with A22Z-B201Y A3T A22Z-B102 Compatible with A22Z-B202 A3T Three holes Exclusively for A22 A22Z-B103 Compatible with A22Z-B203 A3T Connectors Applicable cable diameter (mm) 7 to 9 dia. A22Z-3500-1 9 to 11 dia. A22Z-3500-2 Plastic connector used to extend a cable from the Switch Box. (See page 162.) 25-dia. Ring --- A22Z-R25 Use when mounting to a panel with a 25-dia. hole. For details, refer to page 153. Since this is not attached to the main body, order separately. 30-dia. Resin Attachment Round A22Z-A30 Use when mounting to a panel with a 30-dia. hole. For details, refer to page 155. Lock Plate --- A22Z-3380 Use to fix the lever on the Switch. Simple Protective Cover --- A11Z-3700 Prevents foreign matter entering into the Switch from the back of the panel. 147 Item Snap-in Legend Plates Standard size Appearance Classification Without text A22Z-3443B Red A22Z-3443R White A22Z-3443W Transparent White text on m red background STOP White text on black background Large size For Emergency Stop Switch Character Films Without text Model Black | Remarks Attached to the Standard-size Legend Plate Frame. Material: Acrylic (See page 154.) A22Z-3443C A22Z-3443R-2 A22Z-3443R-4 A22Z-3443B-1 START A22Z-3443B-3 ON A22Z-3443B-5 OFF A22Z-3443B-6 UP A22Z-3443B-7 DOWN A22Z-3443B-8 POWER ON A22Z-3443B-9 OFF-ON A22Z-3443B-10 Black A22Z-3453B Red A22Z-3453R White A22Z-3453W Transparent A22Z-3453C 60-dia. round plate with black let- A22Z-3466-1 ters on a yellow background 90-dia. round plate with black let- A22Z-3476-1 ters on a yellow background No print (Round) A22Z-3460 Character print | (Round) A22Z-3460-1 A22Z-3460-2 START A22Z-3460-3 STOP A22Z-3460-4 Attached to the Large-size Legend Plate Frame Material: Acrylic (See page 154.) "EMERGENCY STOP" is engraved on the plate. Used as an Emergency Stop Switch Legend Plate After printing on a film, affix to the indicator plate of the Lighted Pushbutton Switch. (The back is coated with adhesive.) No print (Square) A22Z-3480 Lamp Extractor --- A22Z-3901 Rubber tool used to easily replace Lamps Tightening Wrench --- A22Z-3905 Tool used to tighten nuts from the back of the panel Cap Tightening Tool --- A22Z-3908 Used for replacing the cap of the Half-guard Pushbutton Switch. Cap Puller --- A3PJ-5080 Used for removing the cap from the Pushbutton of the Square Lighted Pushbutton Switch. 148 Specifications Common to A22, A22S/W, A22K, and A22E Approved Standards Recognized organization Standards UL (See note.) File No. UL508 E41515 TUV Product Service EN60947-5-1 Inquire CQC (CCC) 2003010303070635 GB14048.5 Note: UL-certification for CSA C22.2 No. 14 and bears the mark. Approved Standard Ratings UL, cUL (File No. E41515) 6 A at 220 VAC, 10 A at 110 VAC EN60947-5-1 (Low Voltage Directive) 3 A at 220 VAC CCC (GB14048.5) 3 A at 240 VAC, 1.5 A at 24 VDC Ratings Contacts (Standard Load) Rated Rated carry voltage current 10 LED Indicators without Voltage Reduction Unit Rated current (A) AC15 AC12 DC13 DC12 (inductive (resistive (inductive (resistive load) load) load) load) Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage 6 VDC 60 mA (20 mA) 6 VDC5% 6 VAC 60 mA (20 mA) 6 VAC/VDC5% 110 VAC 5 10 12 VAC/VDC 30 mA (10 mA) 12 VAC/VDC5% 220 VAC 3 6 24 VAC/VDC 15 mA (10 mA) 24 VAC/VDC5% 380 VAC 2 3 440 VAC 1 2 24 VDC --- 24 VAC 10 --- 10 --- --- Note: Values in parentheses are for blue Pushbuttons. 1.5 10 110 VDC 0.5 2 220 VDC 0.2 0.6 380 VDC 0.1 0.2 Super-bright LED Indicator Rated voltage 24 VAC/VDC Rated current 15 mA Note: 1. Rated current values are determined according to the testing conditions. The above ratings were obtained by conducting tests under the following conditions. (1) Ambient temperature: 202C (2) Ambient humidity: 655% (3) Operating frequency: 20 operations/minute 2. Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 VDC Incandescent Lamp Contacts (Microload) Rated applicable load Minimum applicable load 50 mA at 24 VDC (Resistive load) 1 mA at 5 VDC Rated voltage Operating voltage 24 VAC/VDC 5% Rated current Operating voltage 6 VAC/VDC 200 mA 5 VAC/VDC 14 VAC/VDC 80 mA 12 VAC/VDC 28 VAC/VDC 40 mA 24 VAC/VDC 130 VAC/VDC 20 mA 100 VAC/VDC Voltage-reduction Lighting Rated voltage Operational voltage 110 VAC 95 to 115 VAC 220 VAC 190 to 230 VAC Applicable lamp (BA8S/13@ gold) LED Lamp (A22-24A@) 149 Characteristics Item Pushbutton Switches Non-lighted models: A22-F A22-T A22-G A22-S A22-C A22-D A22-H A22-M Lighted models: A22L-T A22L-G A22L-H A22L-D A22L-C Emergency Stop Switches Non-lighted model: A22E Lighted model: A22EL Knob-type Selector Switches Non-lighted model: A22S Lighted model: A22W Key-type Selector Switch Non-lighted model: A22K Allowable op- Mechanical erating frequency Electrical 30 operations/minute max. Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity 2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different polarity and also between each terminal and ground Vibration resistance Malfunction (See note 2.): 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance Destruction 1,000 m/s2 Malfunction (See note 2.) 1,000 m/s max. 600 m/s max. Durability Mechanical Electrical Momentary operation: 60 operations/minute max. 1,000 m/s2 2 2 30 operations/minute max. Manual reset: 30 operations/minute max. Automatic reset: 30 operations/minute max. 30 operations/minute max. 1,000 m/s2 1,000 m/s2 2 1,000 m/s2 2 2 1,000 m/s2 1,000 m/s2 max. 250 m/s max. 1,000 m/s max. 600 m/s max. Momentary operation: 5,000,000 operations min. 300,000 operations min. 500,000 opera- 100,000 op- 500,000 operations min. erations min. tions min. 500,000 operations min. 300,000 opera- 300,000 op- 500,000 opera- 100,000 op- 500,000 operations min. erations min. tions min. erations min. tions min. Ambient temperature (See note 1.) Operating: -20C to 70C Storage: -40C to 70C Operating: -20C to 70C Storage: -40C to 70C Operating: -20C to 55C Storage: -40C to 70C Operating: -20C to 70C Storage: -40C to 70C Operating: -20C to 55C Storage: -40C to 70C Operating: -20C to 70C Storage: -40C to 70C Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85% Degree of protection IP65 (oil-resistant) IP65 (oil-resistant) IP65 IP65 (oil-resistant) IP65 IP65 (oil-resistant) Electric shock protection class Class II PTI (tracking characteristic) 175 Degree of contamination 3 (IEC947-5-1) Note: 1. With no icing or condensation. 2. Malfunction within 1 ms. 150 Operating: -20C to 55C Storage: -40C to 70C IP65 Operating Characteristics (for SPST-NO/SPST-NC) Item Total travel force (TTF) max. Pushbutton Switches Emergency Stop Switches Lighted Nonlighted Pushbutton Switches Push-lock turnreset system Manual reset Automatic reset A22-F A22-G A22-C A22-S A22-T A22-H A22-D A22-M A22L-T A22L-H A22L-D A22L-G A22L-C A22E, A22EL A22S, A22W A22S, A22W 29.4 N 44.1 N Knob-type Selector Switches 0.34 N*m (See note.) 0.25 N*m for two notches (See note.) Key-type Selector Switch Manual reset Automatic reset A22K 0.34 N*m (See note.) 0.25 N*m for two notches (See note.) 0.34 N*m for three notches (See note.) 0.34 N*m for three notches (See note.) Total travel (TT) 5.5 mm max. 101 mm Approx. 90 for two notches (Approx. 45 for three notches) Approx. 90 for two notches (Approx. 45 for three notches) Resetting force (RF) min. --- 0.25 N*m max. (See note.) 0.34 N*m max. (See note.) 0.34 N*m max. (See note.) --- --- Note: Rotation torque for Emergency Stop Pushbutton, Knob-type Selector, and Key-type Selector Switches. Nomenclature Pushbutton Lock Ring * Available Colors Non-lighted: Red, green, yellow, white, blue, black Lighted: Red, green yellow, white, blue Lamp * Light Source LED lamp Incandescent lamp Switch * Contacts SPST-NO, SPST-NC, SPST-NO + SPST-NC, DPST-NO, DPST-NC (Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 VDC) The above illustration shows a lighted model. * Lighting Method Non-lighted Lighted (without Voltage Reduction Unit) Lighted (with Voltage Reduction Unit) 151 Dimensions Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. 2. The following illustrations are for momentary operation. Lighted/Non-lighted Pushbutton Switches Flat Type For SPST-NO (SPST-NC) Switches A22-F For DPST-NO (DPST-NC) Monoblock-contact Switches 29.7 dia. 29.7 dia. (See note 1.) 54.7 (See note 1.) Round/Half-guard Type Round/Projection Type A22-H, A22L-H A22-T, A22L-T 23.9 dia. 29.7 dia. 54.7 (See note 1.) Round/Full-guard Type 54.7 (See note 1.) A22-G, A22L-G 40-dia. Mushroom Type A22-M 29.7 dia. 40 dia. 54.7 (See note 1.) 54.7 (See note 1.) Square/Projection Type Square/Full-guard Type A22-C, A22L-C A22-D, A22L-D 29.8 x 29.8 25.6 x 25.6 29.8 x 29.8 54.7 (See note 1.) 54.7 (See note 1.) Note: 1. Alternate operation models are 9.3 mm longer. 2. Lighted models have the same dimensions as shown above, whether they are with or without Voltage Reduction Units. 152 Accessories Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. Legend Plate Frames A22Z-332@ A22Z-333@ 28 dia. 28 dia. 28 dia. 28 dia. 22.20.3 0.1 dia. 22.20.3 0.1 dia. Lock Ring 25-dia. Ring A22Z-3360 A22Z-R25 22 dia. 24.8 dia. 27 dia. 22.2 dia. 30 dia. Color Cap Hole Plug (Round) A22L-30T@ A22Z-3530 23.4 dia. 10.2 30 dia. Sealing Caps For Flat Models A22Z-3600F For Projection Models A22Z-3600T 2r 26 dia. 1r 32 dia. 32 dia. 22.2 dia. 22.2 dia. 33 dia. 33 dia. For Full-guard Models A22Z-3600G 31.5 dia. 22.2 dia. 32.5 dia. 153 Three-throw Spacer 13.7 dia. A22Z-3003 12.9 dia. 14.2 dia. Metallic Bezel Rings For Flat/Projection Models A22Z-3580 For Full-guard Models A22Z-3582 28.7 dia. 24+0.2 -0 dia. 28.7 dia. 24+0.2 -0 dia. 29.70.3 dia. Snap-in Legend Plates 29.70.3 dia. For Standard Models A22Z-3443@-@ For Large Models A22Z-3453@ For Emergency-stop Models A22Z-3476-1 (90 dia.) A22Z-3466-1 (60 dia.) 60 dia. 90 dia. Black letters Black letters Yellow Yellow 22.2 dia. 22.2 dia. Character Film For Round Models A22Z-3460-@ For Square Models A22Z-3480 t0.22 +0.1 19.4-0.2 dia. t0.22 154 21.5 x 21.50.2 0.3 Tightening Wrench A22Z-3901 A22Z-3905 19.2 dia. 21.2 dia. 25 dia. Lamp Extractor 30 dia. 11 dia. 8.5 dia. 8 dia. 30-dia. Resin Attachment Cap Tightening Tool A22Z-A30 A22Z-3908 5 dia. 34.7 dia. 22.2 dia. Lock Plate Cap Puller A22Z-3380 A3PJ-5080 7.3 dia. Simple Protective Cover A22Z-3700 22.5 dia. 30 x 30 0.3 recess 155 Control Box (Enclosure) A22Z-B10@ A22Z-B101 (One Hole) A22Z-B101Y Cable Port Hole (Top View) Four, 4x38 tapping screws 22.1+0.3 -0.1 dia. 21 dia. (Lead cable hole) 161 dia. (Lead cable hole) Two mounting holes (10x36) 0.6-mm concave surface A22Z-B102 (Two Holes) Four, 4x38 tapping screws Cable Port Hole (Top View) Two, 22.1+0.3 -0.1 dia. 21 dia. (Lead cable hole) (10x36) 0.6-mm concave surface 161 dia. (Lead cable hole) Two mounting holes A22Z-B103 (Three Holes) Cable Port Hole (Top View) Four, 4x38 tapping screws Three, 22.1+0.3 -0.1 dia. 21 dia. (Lead cable hole) 161 dia. (Lead cable hole) (10x36) 0.6-mm concave surface Panel Mounting Hole 156 Two mounting holes A22Z-B201 (One Hole) A22Z-B201Y Cable Port Hole (Top View) Four, M4 Phillips binding screws 22.1 dia. 21 dia. (both sides) Cover (gray) Two, 21 dia. Case (black) Two, 19 dia. (base) (10x36) 0.6-mm concave surface Two mounting holes A22Z-B202 (Two Holes) Four, M4 Phillips binding screws Cable Port Hole (Top View) Two, 22.1 dia. Cover (gray) 21 dia. (both sides) Two, 21 dia. Case (black) (10x36) 0.6-mm concave surface Two mounting holes Two, 19 dia. (base) A22Z-B203 (Three Holes) Four, M4 Phillips binding screws Cable Port Hole (Top View) Three, 22.1 dia. Cover (gray) 21 dia. (both sides) Two, 21 dia. Case (black) (10x36) 0.6-mm concave surface Two mounting holes Two, 19 dia. (base) Panel Mounting Hole Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Non-lighted (SPST-NO + SPST-NC) Lighted (SPST-NO + SPST-NC) Non-lighted (DPST-NO + DPST-NC) Switch Blocks M3.5 screw Switch Blocks Lamp socket Switch Blocks 157 Terminal Connection Type Terminal connection Bottom view Non-lighted (SPST-NO + SPST-NC) 1 3 2 4 Bottom view Non-lighted (DPST-NO + DPST-NC) 11 13 21 23 22 24 12 14 Bottom view Lighted without Voltage Reduction Unit (SPST-NO + SPST-NC) 3 X1 1 (+) X 4 X2 2 (-) Lighted with Voltage Reduction Unit (SPST-NO + SPST-NC) Bottom view 1 X1 3 X 2 X2 4 Panel Cutouts 22.3+0.40 dia. 25+0.50 dia. Note: 1. When applying coating such as paint to the panel, the dimensions should be those after the application of coating. Lock ring is provided as a standard item. 2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm. 3. Use an A22Z-R25 Ring when mounting to a panel with 25-mm holes. 158 Installation Common to A22, A22S/W, A22K, M22, and A22E Mounting to the Panel Panel Hole Dimensions 2. The following panel hole dimensions apply when the Large-size Legend Plate Frame is mounted, and when crimp terminals are connected to the Switch Block terminals. 22 dia. 25 dia. B For 25-dia. holes, always use 25-dia. Rings. (Since the cutout dimensions are large, IP65 cannot be guaranteed unless 25-dia. Rings are used.) If outer surface treatment such as coating is performed for the panel, the panel dimensions after outer surface treatment must meet the specified panel dimensions. Note: Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm. Pitches A and B between the centers of the mounting holes are as follows: For 1. above: Matrix Installation Switch Blocks 1. The following panel hole dimensions apply when Switch Unit and the Standard-size Legend Plate Frame and Lock Ring are mounted, and lead wires are connected directly to the Switch Block. A22-10, A22-10S, A22-01, A22-01S A 45 mm min. A22-20, A22-20S, A22-02, A22-02S, A22-11, 55 mm min. A22-11S For 2. above: Type of crimp terminal Bare crimp terminals A Crimp terminals with insulating sheath Switch Blocks B A22-10, A22-10S, A22-01, A22-01S 51 mm min. A22-20, A22-20S, A22-02, A22-02S, A22-11, A22-11S 61 mm min. A22-10, A22-10S, A22-01, A22-01S 60 mm min. A22-20, A22-20S, A22-02, A22-02S, A22-11, A22-11S 70 mm min. Note: 1. The above dimensions are the minimum dimensions for when the wires described under Applicable Wire Size on page 165 are used. If a different wires are used, the wiring dimensions may be different so determine an appropriate pitch before setup. 2. With pushbuttons of external dimensions greater than 30 mm, set the pitch according to the dimensions. (When using matrix installation for the A22-M@, mount with a pitch of 40 mm instead of 30 mm in the diagram above.) 3. When using a pushbutton with external dimensions exceeding 30 mm, use a pitch appropriate for the pushbutton. 159 Mounting the Operation Unit on the Panel Mounting the Switch on the Pushbutton Unit Insert the Operation Unit (Pushbutton, etc.) from the front surface of the panel, insert the Lock Ring and the mounting nut from the terminal side, then tighten the nut. Before tightening, check that the rubber washer is present between the Pushbutton Unit and the panel. Insert the Pushbutton Unit into the Switch Unit, aligning the arrow mark inscribed on the Case with the lever on the Switch Blocks, then move the lever in the direction indicated by the arrow in the following figure. When using a Legend Plate Frame, put one rubber washer each between the Legend Plate Frame and the panel and between the Operation Unit and the Legend Plate Frame. (One rubber washer will be provided when one Legend Plate Frame is ordered.) Operation Unit Align the Lock Ring with the groove in the casing, then insert the Lock Ring so that its edge is located on the panel side. Arrow mark Tighten the mounting nut at a torque of 0.98 to 1.96 N*m. Lever When using a Lock Ring, replace with the supplied Lock Ring, insert the projecting part into the lock slot, and then tighten the mounting nut. Rubber washer Hold here Mounting nut Panel Projecting part Lock Ring Removing the Switch Lock Ring Panel When the panel cutout dimension is 25 dia., remove the supplied rubber washer and mount the 25-dia. Ring as shown below. (Since the A22Z-R25 is not attached to the main body, order separately.) Operation Unit Move the lever in the direction indicated by the arrow in the following figure, then pull the Pushbutton Unit or the Switch Blocks. Since the lever has a hole with an inside diameter of 6.5 mm, the lever can be moved in the specified direction by inserting a screwdriver into the hole and then moving the screwdriver. Screwdriver 22 dia. 25-dia. Ring (A22Z-R25) 22.3 dia. 25 dia. Panel Lock Ring 25 dia. 22.3 dia. Mounting nut Mounting/Replacing the Color Cap Projection, Fall-guard Grip and rotate the Color Cap with your fingers. 160 Half-guard Indicators Put the tips of the Cap Tightening Tool (A22Z-3908) into the Color Cap slot and turn the Tool. Mounting the Color Cap: Mount the Color Cap on the flange and firmly push the Color Cap. When the Color Cap is inserted, check whether it operates properly. When replacing the Lamp, remove the Color Cap and diffusion plate with fingers or Cap Puller. Attach the Character Film properly so that it fits inside the protruding part of the diffusion plate. Then, match the diffusion plate to the square flange and insert the Cap. Flange Assembling the Cap Lighted Pushbutton Switch Diffusion plate Character Film Mount the Color Cap so that the protrusions inside the cap fit into the grooves in the Pushbutton Unit. Color Cap Emergency Stop Switch Insert the protrusion of the Tightening Wrench (A22Z-3905) into the Cap slot and then turn to remove the Cap. Protrusion Cap Grooves in the cap Color Cap Indicator Installing/Replacing the Lamp Mount the Color Cap so that the protrusions inside the Pushbutton Unit fit into the grooves in the cap. Installing/Replacing from the Panel Surface Insert the Lamp Extractor (A22Z-3901) into the lamp, then rotate the Extractor while pressing it. Grooves Protrusion inside cap Cap Color Cap Square Pushbutton/Indicator Removing the Color Cap: Insert the protruding tip of the Cap Puller (A3PJ-5080) into the Cap slot, hold the plate spring, and pull them to remove the Color Cap. Installing/Replacing on the Switch Grip the lamp with your fingers, then rotate the lamp while pressing it against the Switch. Plate spring 161 Control Box (Enclosure) Installing/Removing the Switch Blocks Mounting the Switch The Standard-size Legend Plate Frame can be mounted. Mount the Frame as shown in the following diagram. Mount the Switch in the same way as for an ordinary panel. Snap-in Legend Plate Installing the Switch Blocks Hook the small protrusion on the Switch Block into the groove on the Mounting Latch on the other side of the lever, then push up the Switch Block in the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Lever Mounting Latch Creating a Cable Port Hole Place the tip of a screwdriver on the surface where the cable port hole is to be created with the cover attached and strike the screwdriver to punch a hole. Attempts to punch a hole on the other side of the case will damage the Box. Protrusion Switch Block Removing the Switch Blocks Insert a screwdriver between the Mounting Latch and the Switch Block, then push down the screwdriver in the direction indicated by the arrow in the following figure. Use either of the following screwdrivers. Flat-head 3 to 6 mm screwdriver Phillips 3 to 6 mm screwdriver Securing the Connector Cable 1. Insert the connector into the cable port hole in the Box and secure with the fixing nut inside the box. 2. Open a hole in the thin rubber section of the rubber ring. 3. Pass the tightening cap through the cable, insert the cable into the connector, and tighten the hexagonal nut to secure the cable. Fixing nut Rubber washer Connector Tightening cap Cable Inside Outside Box Cable diameter Connector 7 to 9 dia. A22Z-3500-1 9 to 11 dia. A22Z-3500-2 162 Screwdriver Wiring Wiring Round Crimp Terminals Loosen the terminal screw from the Switch Unit until it completely comes off the groove, insert a screwdriver as shown in the following figure, then push up the washer in the direction indicated by the arrow to temporarily secure it. Now, a round crimp terminal can be connected. After inserting the terminal, tighten the screws to complete wiring. Mounting and Dismounting Snap-in Legend Press and secure the Snap-in Legend Plate onto the Legend Plate Frame. The direction of the characters will vary with the mounting direction of the control panel if the Switch is a knob or key selector model. Legend Plate Frame Washer Snap-in Legend Plate Concave surface Screw Screwdriver To easily remove the Snap-in Legend Plate from the Legend Plate Frame mounted to the panel, insert a Tool with a thin tip into the space between the Snap-in Legend Plate and the Legend Plate Frame. Engraving Engrave the characters on the surface on the Cap. Make sure that the characters are aligned parallel to the imaginary line connecting the two protruding portions to the left and right of the Cap. The characters must not be engraved deeper than 0.5 mm. Apply an alcohol-based paint coating, such as melamine, alkyd, or acrylic resin paint coating, to the engraved characters. Protruding portions on Cap Affixing Character Film Hold the Cap, remove the cardboard on the Film, and attach the Film to the Cap. Make sure that the protruding portions of the Cap engage the cutout portions of the Film and that the characters are aligned parallel to the imaginary line connecting the two protruding portions to the left and right of the Cap. The Snap-in Legend Plate is easily removed by pressing the Snap-in Legend Plate from the back of the Legend Plate Frame. The Legend Plate Frame is made of acrylic resin, which is easily damaged by shock. Be sure to handle the Legend Plate Frame with care. Remove the cardboard. Protruding portions on Cap 163 Engraving Method Material: Acrylic Engrave the characters directly on the matted side of the Snap-in Legend Plate. The characters must be engraved no deeper than 0.5 mm. Apply alcohol-based paint coating to the engraved characters. If the Snap-in Legend Plate is transparent, engrave the mirror-written characters on the back of the Snap-in Legend Plate and apply paint coating to the characters. Then apply paint coating of a different color to the remaining part of the Snap-in Legend Plate. Mounting Three-throw Spacer (A22Z-3003) Press and secure the two protruding portions of the Three-throw Spacer to the two indented portions of the inner side of the control panel. 164 Precautions Common to A22, A22S/W, A22K, M22, and A22E Operating Environment !WARNING Do not apply a voltage between the incandescent lamp and the terminal that is greater than the rated voltage. If the incandescent lamp is broken, the Operation Units may pop out. Always turn OFF the power and wait for 10 minutes before replacing the incandescent lamp. If the lamp is replaced immediately after the power is turned OFF, the remaining heat may cause burns. The IP65 model is designed with a degree of protection so that it will not sustain damage if it is subjected to water from any direction to the front of the panel. Using the Microload Insert a contact protection circuit, if necessary, to prevent the reduction of life expectancy due to extreme wear on the contacts caused by loads where inrush current occurs when the contact is opened and closed. Mounting Always make sure that the power is turned OFF before mounting, removing, or wiring the Switch, or performing maintenance. Do not tighten the mounting ring more than necessary using tools such as pointed-nose pliers. Doing so will damage the mounting ring. The tightening torque is 0.98 to 1.96 N*m. The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability level of 60% ( 60) (conforming to JIS C5003). The equation, 60 = 0.5 x 10-6/operations indicates that the estimated malfunction rate is less than 1/2,000,000 operations with a reliability level of 60%. Voltage (V) Correct Use Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm. Wiring 0.16 mA 1.6 mA 100 mA After wiring the Switch, maintain an appropriate clearance and creepage distance. When DC-specific LEDs are used, wire the Switch so that the X1 terminal is positive. Microload area Standard load area Terminal screws must be Phillips or slotted M3.5 screws with a square washer. The tightening torque is 1.08 to 1.27 N*m. Invalid area Single wires, stranded wires, and crimp terminals can be connected to the Switch. 1 mA Applicable Wire Size 10 mA Current (mA) Stranded wire: 2 mm2 max. Solid wire: 1.6 dia. max. LED The LED current-limiting resistor is built-in, so internal resistance is not required. Bare Crimp Terminals 8 mm max. 16.0 mm max. 8 dia. max. 16.0 mm max. If commercially available LEDs are used, select the ones that meet the following conditions: Base: BA9S/13@ Overall length: 26 mm max. Crimp Terminals with Insulating Sheath 8 mm max. 20.2 mm max. 8 dia. max. 20.2 mm max. Power consumption: 2.6 W max. Others If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating. Do not subject the Switch to extreme shock or vibration. Doing so will cause malfunctions and damage to the Switch. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A128-E1-03 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. 165 Knob-type Selector Switch A22S/W Install in 22-dia. or 25-dia. Panel Cutout * Easy mounting and removal of Switch Unit. * Increase wiring efficiency with three-row mounting of Switch Blocks. * Finger protection mechanism on Switch Unit provided as a standard feature. * Use 25-dia. ring to install in 25-dia. panel cutouts. * Mounted using either open-type (fork-type) or closed-type (round-type) crimp terminals. * IP65 oil resistance (non-lighted models) IP65 (lighted models) * EN60947-5-1 * UL and cUL approved (File No. E41515). Model Number Structure Model Number Legend Completely Assembled Shipped as a set which includes the Selector, Lamp (lighted models only), and Switch. 1 2 3 4 5 A22@-@@-@-@ 1 Lighted/Non-lighted Code Description 5 Contacts 3 Illumination Color Code Description Code SPST-NO (See note 1.) Red 01 SPST-NC (See note 1.) G Green 11 SPST-NO + SPST-NC Y Yellow 20 DPST-NO A Blue 02 DPST-NC Non-lighted None Black (for non-lighted models only) W Lighted R 2 Number of Notches/Reset Method Code Description 2M 2 notches/Manual 2A 2 notches/Automatic 3M 3 notches/Manual 3A 3 notches/Automatic Note: 1. For models with 2 notches 2. The contacts are rated for standard loads. For microloads, refer to Accessories section for the A22. 4 Light Source Without Voltage Reduction Unit Code Operating Voltage None Non-lighted 6D LED 6 VAC 12A 12 VAC/VDC 5 12 24 24 VAC/VDC Incandescent lamp With Voltage Reduction Unit None Non-lighted T1 6 VDC 6A 24A 166 Description 10 S 5 VAC/VDC 12 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC T2 LED 100 VAC (See note 2.) 200 VAC (See note 3.) Note: 1. The LED lamp (24 VAC/VDC) can be lit by directly applying 100 VAC/VDC (200 VAC/VDC) to the lamp terminal. LED incorporates the 24-VAC/VDC models. 2. Operational voltage: 95 to 115 VAC 3. Operational voltage: 190 to 230 VAC Subassembled The Selector, Lamp, or Switch can be ordered separately. Use them in combination for models that are not available as assembled Units. These can also be used as inventory for maintenance parts. 1. Selector 1 2 3 A22@-@@ 2 Number of Notches/Reset Method 1 Lighted/Non-lighted Code Description 3 Illumination Color Code Description S Non-lighted 2M 2 notches/Manual None Black (for non-lighted models only) W Lighted 2A 2 notches/Automatic R Red 3M 3 notches/Manual G Green 3A 3 notches/Automatic Y Yellow A Blue Code Description 2. Lamp 1 2 A22-@@ 1 Operating Voltage (Rated Voltage) Code 2 Illumination Color Incandescent lamp Code Description None Incandescent lamp Description 5 5 VAC (6 VAC) R Red 12 12 VAC (14 VAC) G Green 24 24 VAC (28 VAC) Y Yellow A Blue LED lamp 6D 6 VDC (6 VDC) 6A 6 VAC (6 VAC) 12A 12 VAC/VDC (12 VAC/VDC) 24A 24 VAC/VDC (24 VAC/VDC) 3. Switch (General-purpose Load) 1 2 3 A22@-@M-@ 1 Lighted/Non-lighted Code Description None Non-lighted L Lighted 2 Contacts Code 3 Voltage Reduction Unit (Lighted Models Only) Description Code Description 10 SPST-NO (2-notch only) None Without Voltage Reduction Unit 01 SPST-NC (2-notch only) T1 100 VAC (See note 1) 11 SPST-NO + SPST-NC T2 200 VAC (See note 2) 20 DPST-NO 02 DPST-NC Note: 1. Operational voltage: 95 to 115 VAC 2. Operational voltage: 190 to 230 VAC 167 Ordering Information List of Models Ordering as a Set Non-lighted Appearance Knob-type Selector Switch Number of notches 2 notches Resetting method Manual Automatic A22S 3 notches Manual Automatic 168 Output Model SPST-NO A22S-2M-10 SPST-NC A22S-2M-01 SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22S-2M-11 DPST-NO A22S-2M-20 DPST-NC A22S-2M-02 SPST-NO A22S-2A-10 SPST-NC A22S-2A-01 SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22S-2A-11 DPST-NO A22S-2A-20 DPST-NC A22S-2A-02 SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22S-3M-11 DPST-NO A22S-3M-20 DPST-NC A22S-3M-02 SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22S-3A-11 DPST-NO A22S-3A-20 DPST-NC A22S-3A-02 Color of Selector Black Lighted (Without Voltage Reduction Unit) Appearance Knob-type Selector Switch Number of notches 2 notches Resetting method Manual Output SPST-NO LED lighting (without Voltage Reduction Unit) SPST-NC SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22W DPST-NO DPST-NC Automatic SPST-NO SPST-NC SPST-NO + SPST-NC DPST-NO DPST-NC 3 notches Manual SPST-NO + SPST-NC DPST-NO DPST-NC Operating voltage Model 6 VDC A22W-2M@-6D-10 6 VAC A22W-2M@-6A-10 12 VAC/VDC A22W-2M@-12A-10 24 VAC/VDC A22W-2M@-24A-10 6 VDC A22W-2M@-6D-01 6 VAC A22W-2M@-6A-01 12 VAC/VDC A22W-2M@-12A-01 24 VAC/VDC A22W-2M@-24A-01 6 VDC A22W-2M@-6D-11 6 VAC A22W-2M@-6A-11 12 VAC/VDC A22W-2M@-12A-11 24 VAC/VDC A22W-2M@-24A-11 6 VDC A22W-2M@-6D-20 6 VAC A22W-2M@-6A-20 12 VAC/VDC A22W-2M@-12A-20 24 VAC/VDC A22W-2M@-24A-20 6 VDC A22W-2M@-6D-02 6 VAC A22W-2M@-6A-02 12 VAC/VDC A22W-2M@-12A-02 24 VAC/VDC A22W-2M@-24A-02 6 VDC A22W-2A@-6D-10 6 VAC A22W-2A@-6A-10 12 VAC/VDC A22W-2A@-12A-10 24 VAC/VDC A22W-2A@-24A-10 6 VDC A22W-2A@-6D-01 6 VAC A22W-2A@-6A-01 12 VAC/VDC A22W-2A@-12A-01 24 VAC/VDC A22W-2A@-24A-01 6 VDC A22W-2A@-6D-11 6 VAC A22W-2A@-6A-11 12 VAC/VDC A22W-2A@-12A-11 24 VAC/VDC A22W-2A@-24A-11 6 VDC A22W-2A@-6D-20 6 VAC A22W-2A@-6A-20 12 VAC/VDC A22W-2A@-12A-20 24 VAC/VDC A22W-2A@-24A-20 6 VDC A22W-2A@-6D-02 6 VAC A22W-2A@-6A-02 12 VAC/VDC A22W-2A@-12A-02 24 VAC/VDC A22W-2A@-24A-02 6 VDC A22W-3M@-6D-11 6 VAC A22W-3M@-6A-11 12 VAC/VDC A22W-3M@-12A-11 24 VAC/VDC A22W-3M@-24A-11 6 VDC A22W-3M@-6D-20 6 VAC A22W-3M@-6A-20 12 VAC/VDC A22W-3M@-12A-20 24 VAC/VDC A22W-3M@-24A-20 6 VDC A22W-3M@-6D-02 6 VAC A22W-3M@-6A-02 12 VAC/VDC A22W-3M@-12A-02 24 VAC/VDC A22W-3M@-24A-02 Illumination color Insert one of the following letters into the box @. R (red) Y (yellow) G (green) A (blue) 169 Appearance Knob-type Selector Switch Number of notches 3 notches Resetting method Automatic Output SPST-NO + SPST-NC LED lighting (without Voltage Reduction Unit) DPST-NO DPST-NC A22W Operating voltage Model 6 VDC A22W-3A@-6D-11 6 VAC A22W-3A@-6A-11 12 VAC/VDC A22W-3A@-12A-11 24 VAC/VDC A22W-3A@-24A-11 6 VDC A22W-3A@-6D-20 6 VAC A22W-3A@-6A-20 12 VAC/VDC A22W-3A@-12A-20 24 VAC/VDC A22W-3A@-24A-20 6 VDC A22W-3A@-6D-02 6 VAC A22W-3A@-6A-02 12 VAC/VDC A22W-3A@-12A-02 24 VAC/VDC A22W-3A@-24A-02 Illumination color Insert one of the following letters into the box @. R (red) Y (yellow) G (green) A (blue) Lighted (With Voltage Reduction Unit) Appearance Knob-type Selector Switch Number of notches 2 notches Resetting method Manual LED voltage-reduction lighting (with Voltage Reduction Unit) Output SPST-NO SPST-NC Automatic A22W-2M@-T2-10 100 VAC A22W-2M@-T1-01 A22W-2M@-T2-01 A22W-2M@-T1-11 200 VAC A22W-2M@-T2-11 DPST-NO 100 VAC A22W-2M@-T1-20 200 VAC A22W-2M@-T2-20 SPST-NO 100 VAC A22W-2M@-T1-02 200 VAC A22W-2M@-T2-02 100 VAC A22W-2A@-T1-10 200 VAC A22W-2A@-T2-10 100 VAC A22W-2A@-T1-01 200 VAC A22W-2A@-T2-01 SPST-NO + SPST-NC 100 VAC A22W-2A@-T1-11 200 VAC A22W-2A@-T2-11 DPST-NO 100 VAC A22W-2A@-T1-20 200 VAC A22W-2A@-T2-20 100 VAC A22W-2A@-T1-02 200 VAC A22W-2A@-T2-02 SPST-NO + SPST-NC 100 VAC A22W-3M@-T1-11 200 VAC A22W-3M@-T2-11 DPST-NO 100 VAC A22W-3M@-T1-20 200 VAC A22W-3M@-T2-20 DPST-NC Automatic A22W-2M@-T1-10 100 VAC DPST-NC Manual 100 VAC 200 VAC SPST-NO + SPST-NC SPST-NC 3 notches Model 200 VAC DPST-NC A22W Operating voltage 100 VAC A22W-3M@-T1-02 200 VAC A22W-3M@-T2-02 SPST-NO + SPST-NC 100 VAC A22W-3A@-T1-11 200 VAC A22W-3A@-T2-11 DPST-NO 100 VAC A22W-3A@-T1-20 200 VAC A22W-3A@-T2-20 DPST-NC 100 VAC A22W-3A@-T1-02 200 VAC A22W-3A@-T2-02 Note: When ordering, specify the symbol that indicates color of the Selector in the @ of the model number. 170 Selector symbol (color) Insert one of the following letters into the box @. R (red) Y (yellow) G (green) A (blue) Ordering Individually Non-lighted Models Selector Lighted Models (without Voltage Reduction Unit) Selector Selector Lamp Lamp Incandescent lamp Switch Lighted Models (with Voltage Reduction Unit) LED Switch (without Voltage Reduction Unit) LED Switch (with Voltage Reduction Unit) 171 Selectors Non-lighted (Color: Only Black is Available) Notches 2 notches 3 notches Reset method Notches Standard lever IP65 (oil-resistant) 2 notches A22S-2M Manual Automatic A22S-2A Manual A22S-3M Reset method Reset method Selector color Red Manual Automatic A22S-3A Automatic Notches Lighted Standard lever IP65 (oil-resistant) 3 notches Manual Automatic 2 notches 3 notches Manual A22S-C2M Automatic A22S-C2A Manual A22S-C3M Automatic A22S-C3A Standard lever IP65 A22W-2MR Green A22W-2MG Yellow A22W-2MY Blue A22W-2MA Red A22W-2AR Green A22W-2AG Yellow A22W-2AY Blue A22W-2AA Red A22W-3MR Green A22W-3MG Yellow A22W-3MY Blue A22W-3MA Red A22W-3AR Green A22W-3AG Yellow A22W-3AY Blue A22W-3AA Note: Either incandescent lamps or LED lamps can be used with the above models. Lamps LED Lamp Operating voltage Appearance AC/DC DC AC AC and DC 6V 12 V LED light 24 V Model Red A22-6DR --- --- --- Green A22-6DG --- --- --- Yellow (See note 2.) A22-6DY --- --- --- Blue A22-6DA --- --- --- Red A22-6AR --- --- --- Green A22-6AG --- --- --- Yellow (See note 2.) A22-6AY --- --- --- Blue A22-6AA --- --- --- Red --- A22-12AR A22-24AR A22-24ASR Green --- A22-12AG A22-24AG A22-24ASG Yellow (See note 2.) --- A22-12AY A22-24AY A22-24ASY Blue --- A22-12AA A22-24AA A22-24ASA Note: 1. For voltage-reduction lighting, use the A22-24A@. 2. Used when the Selector color is yellow or white. Incandescent Lamp Operating voltage 5 VAC/VDC A22-5 172 24 V Super-bright 12 VAC/VDC A22-12 24 VAC/VDC A22-24 Switches (General-purpose Load) Non-lighted Contacts Switch operation Automatic SPST-NO Model A22-10M SPST-NC A22-01M SPST-NO + SPSTNC A22-11M DPST-NO A22-20M DPST-NC A22-02M Lighted Switch operation Contacts Voltage-reduction circuit Without Voltage Reduction Unit Automatic With Voltage Reduction Unit 110 VAC 220 VAC SPST-NO A22L-10M A22L-10M-T1 A22L-10M-T2 SPST-NC A22L-01M A22L-01M-T1 A22L-01M-T2 SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22L-11M A22L-11M-T1 A22L-11M-T2 DPST-NO A22L-20M A22L-20M-T1 A22L-20M-T2 DPST-NC A22L-02M A22L-02M-T1 A22L-02M-T2 Note: For voltage-reduction lighting, use the A22-24A@. Accessories (Order Separately) The A22S/W uses the same accessories as the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the section for the A22. 173 Specifications With the exception of the following items, the specifications are the same as for the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the Specifications section for the A22. Operation Angle Two notches Three notches Note: 1. The angle used for automatic reset is shown in parentheses. 2. FP: Free Position Contacts 2-notch Type Knob position SPST-NO SPST-NC SPST-NO + SPST-NC SPST-NO + SPST-NC DPST-NO DPST-NO DPST-NC 3-notch Type Knob position 174 DPST-NC Nomenclature Selector * Number of Notches 2 notches/3 notches * Applicable Colors Non-lighted: Black Lighted: Red, green yellow, blue Lock Ring Lamp * Light Source LED lamp Incandescent lamp Switch * Contacts SPST-NO, SPST-NC, SPST-NO + SPST-NC, DPST-NO, DPST-NC (Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 VDC) * Lighting Method Non-lighted Lighted (without Voltage Reduction Unit) Lighted (with Voltage Reduction Unit) Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. Knob-type Selector Switch (Lighted/Non-lighted) A22S/A22W 30 dia. A22S-C 30 dia. 175 Accessories (Common to A22, A22S/W, A22K, M22, and A22E) The A22S/W uses the same accessories as the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the corresponding section for the A22. Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Non-lighted (SPST-NO + SPST-NC) Lighted (SPST-NO + SPST-NC) Terminal Connection Type Connection diagram Non-lighted Bottom view 1 3 2 4 Switch Blocks Bottom view Lighted without Voltage Reduction Unit 3 X1 1 (+) X M3.5 screw 4 X2 2 Lamp socket Switch Blocks (-) Lighted with Voltage Reduction Unit Bottom view 1 X1 3 X 2 X2 4 Note: The above terminal connection diagrams are examples for SPST-NO + SPST-NC. Panel Cutouts (Top View) 22.3+0.4 0 dia. 25+0.5 0 dia. Note: 1. When applying coating such as paint to the panel, the dimensions should be those after the application of coating. Lock Ring is provided as a standard item. 2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm. 3. Use an A22Z-R25 Ring when mounting to a panel with 25-mm holes. Installation The A22S/W uses the same installation method as the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the Installation section for the A22. Precautions The precautions for the A22S/W are the same as those for the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the Precautions section for the A22 and the Technical Information for Pushbutton Switches (Cat. No. A143). ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A129-E1-03 176 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. 3Key-type Selector Switch A22K Install in 22-dia. or 25-dia. Panel Cutout * Easy mounting and removal of Switch Unit. * Increase wiring efficiency with three-row mounting of Switch Blocks. * Finger protection mechanism on Switch Unit provided as a standard feature. * Use 25-dia. ring to install in 25-dia. panel cutouts. * Mounted using either open-type (fork-type) or closed-type (round-type) crimp terminals. * IP65 oil resistance * EN60947-5-1 * UL and cUL approved (File No. E41515). Model Number Structure Model Number Legend Completely Assembled Shipped as a set which includes the Selector and Switch. 1 2 A22K-@-@ 2 Contacts 1 Number of Notches/Reset Method Code 2ML Notches 2 notches Reset method 3ML 3 notches Description 10 SPST-NO (See note.) SPST-NC (See note.) Left 01 11 SPST-NO + SPST-NC Automatic Left 20 DPST-NO Manual Left 02 DPST-NC 3M Left and right 3MC Center 3AC Code Left and right Manual 2M 2AL Key release position Automatic Note: For models with 2 notches Contact Rating is standard load. (Refer to the Specification section for the A22.) Center 177 Subassembled The Selector, Lamp, or Switch can be ordered separately. Use them in combination for models that are not available as assembled Units. These can also be used as inventory for maintenance parts. 1. Selector 1 A22K-@ 1 Number of Notches/Reset Method Code Notches 2ML 2 notches Reset method Manual 2M Left Left and right Automatic 2AL 3ML Key release position 3 notches Manual 3M Left Left Left and right 3MC Center Automatic 3AC Center 2. Switch Non-lighted 1 A22-@M 1 Contacts Code 178 Description 10 SPST-NO (2-notch models only) 01 SPST-NC (2-notch models only) 11 SPST-NO + SPST-NC 20 DPST-NO 02 DPST-NC Ordering Information List of Models Ordering as a Set Appearance Key-type Selector Switch Number of notches 2 notches Reset method Manual Output SPST-NO Key release position Model A22K-2ML-10 Color of Selector Black A22K-2M-10 SPST-NC A22K-2ML-01 A22K-2M-01 A22K SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22K-2ML-11 A22K-2M-11 DPST-NO A22K-2ML-20 A22K-2M-20 DPST-NC A22K-2ML-02 A22K-2M-02 Automatic 3 notches Manual SPST-NO A22K-2AL-10 SPST-NC A22K-2AL-01 SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22K-2AL-11 DPST-NO A22K-2AL-20 DPST-NC A22K-2AL-02 SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22K-3ML-11 A22K-3M-11 A22K-3MC-11 DPST-NO A22K-3ML-20 A22K-3M-20 A22K-3MC-20 DPST-NC A22K-3ML-02 A22K-3M-02 A22K-3MC-02 Automatic SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22K-3AC-11 DPST-NO A22K-3AC-20 DPST-NC A22K-3AC-02 Note: Two Keys are provided. 179 Ordering Individually Selector Switch Two Keys are provided. Selector (Color: Only Black is available) Appearance Number of notches 2 notches Reset method Key release position Model A22K-2ML Manual A22K-2M 3 notches Automatic A22K-2AL Manual A22K-3ML A22K-3M A22K-3MC A22K-3AC Automatic Note: Two keys are provided. Switch Appearance Classification Lighted Model Socket (without voltage-re- SPST-NO duction circuit) SPST-NC A22-10M A22-01M SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-11M DPST-NO A22-20M DPST-NC A22-02M Note: DPST-NO + DPST-NC combination is also possible. Accessories Appearance Model A22K-K Note: Two keys are provided. Accessories The A22K uses the same accessories as the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the corresponding section for the A22. 180 Specifications With the exception of the following items, the specifications are the same as for the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the Specifications section for the A22. Operation Angle 2 notches 3 notches Note: 1. The angles in parentheses are for automatic-reset models. 2. FP: Free position Contacts 2-notch Type Knob position SPST-NO SPST-NC SPST-NO + SPST-NC SPST-NO + SPST-NC DPST-NO DPST-NO DPST-NC 3-notch Type Knob position DPST-NC 181 Nomenclature Selector * Number of Notches 2 notches/3 notches * Key Release Position 2 notches 3 notches Lock Fitting Note: Two Keys are provided. Switch * Contacts SPST-NO, SPST-NC, SPST-NO + SPST-NC, DPST-NO, DPST-NC Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. Key-type Selector Switch A22K 30 dia. Accessories The A22K uses the same accessories as the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the corresponding section for the A22. Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Non-lighted (SPST-NO + SPST-NC) M3.5 screw Switch Blocks 182 Terminal Connection Type Panel Cutouts (Top View) Terminal connection Bottom view Non-lighted 1 3 22.3+0.4 0 dia. 2 4 Note: The above terminal connection diagrams are examples for SPST-NO + SPST-NC. 25+0.5 0 dia. Note: 1. When applying coating such as paint to the panel, the dimensions should be those after the application of coating. Lock fitting is provided as a standard item. 2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm. 3. Use an A22Z-R25 Ring when mounting to a panel with 25mm holes. Installation The A22K uses the same installation method as the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the Installation section for the A22. Precautions The precautions for the A22K are the same as those for the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the Precautions section for the A22 and the Technical Information for Pushbutton Switches (Cat. No. A143). ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A130-E1-03 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. 183 Emergency Stop Switch A22E Install in 22-dia. or 25-dia. Panel Cutout * Direct opening mechanism to open the circuit when the contact welds . * Safety lock mechanism prevents operating errors. * Easy mounting and removal of Switch Blocks using a lever. * Mount three Switch Units in series to improve wiring efficiency. * Finger protection mechanism on Switch Unit provided as a standard feature. * Install using either round, or forked crimp terminals. * Oil-resistant to IP65 (non-lighted models)/IP65 (lighted models) Note: Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on page 14, as well as the "Safety Precautions" on page 201. Model Number Structure Model Number Legend Completely Assembled Shipped as a set which includes the Operation Unit, Lamp (lighted models only), and Switch. 1 2 3 4 5 A22E@-@-@-@-@ 1. Lighted/Non-lighted Code Description 3. Light Source 5. Configuration 4. Contacts Without Voltage Reduction Unit Code Description Code Configuration None Non-lighted Code 01 SPST-NC None Switch only L None Non-lighted 11 SPST-NO + SPST-NC B 6D 02 DPST-NC Lighted (See note.) Note: Lighted Emergency Stop Switches are available only for the medium (M). pushlock turn-reset models. 2. Head Size Code Size MP Medium 40 dia. Large 60 dia. Small 30 dia. Medium 40 dia. Large 60 dia. Small 30 dia. Medium 40 dia. LP S M L SK MK 184 Operating Voltage LED 6 VDC 6A 6 VAC 12A 12 VAC/VDC 24A 24 VAC/VDC With Voltage Reduction Unit Description Push-pull None Non-lighted T1 T2 Push-lock turn-reset Push-lock key reset LED 100 VAC 200 VAC Note: 1 The LED lamp (24 VAC/VDC) can be lit by directly applying 110 VAC/VDC (220 VAC/VDC) to the lamp terminal. LED incorporates the 24-VAC/VDC models. 2. Equipped with 24-VAC/DC LED. Switch with Integrated Control Box Subassembled The Pushbutton, Lamp, or Switch can be ordered separately. Use them in combination for models that are not available as assembled Units. These can also be used as inventory for maintenance parts. Unit Combinations Non-lighted Operation Unit Lighted (without Voltage Reduction Unit) Operation Unit Switch Lamp Switch (without Voltage Reduction Unit) * LED * Incandescent Lighted (with Voltage Reduction Unit) Lamp Operation Unit Switch (with Voltage Reduction Unit) * LED 1. Operation Unit Lighted/Non-lighted 1 2 A22E@-@ 1 Lighted/Non-lighted Code 2 Head Size Description Code None Non-lighted L Lighted (See note.) Note: Lighted Emergency Stop Switches are available only for the 40-dia. pushlock turn-reset models. Description MP 40 dia. LP 60 dia. S 30 dia. M 40 dia. L 60 dia. SK 30 dia. MK 40 dia. Push-pull Push-lock, turn-reset Push-lock key reset 2. Lamp 1 2 A22-@@ 1 Operating Voltage (Rated Voltage) Incandescent Code LED 6D 6 VDC (6 VDC) 6A 6 VAC (6 VAC) 12A 12 VAC/VDC (12 VAC/VDC) 24A 24 VAC/VDC (24 VAC/VDC) 2 Illumination Color Code R Description Red 185 3. Switch Lighted/Non-lighted 1 2 3 A22@-@M-@ 1 Lighted/Non-lighted Code 2 Contacts Description Code 3 Voltage Reduction Unit (Lighted Models Only) Description Code Description None Non-lighted 01 SPST-NC None Without Voltage Reduction Unit L 11 SPST-NO + SPST-NC T1 110 VAC 02 DPST-NC T2 220 VAC Lighted Note: Equipped with 24-VAC/DC LED. Ordering Information List of Models Completely Assembled Non-lighted Models Appearance 40-dia. head Medium Push-pull A22E-MP 60-dia. head Large Push-pull A22E-LP 30-dia. head Small Push-lock Turn-reset A22E-S 40-dia. head Medium Push-lock Turn-reset A22E-M 60-dia. head Large Push-lock Turn-reset A22E-L 30-dia. head Small Push-lock Key-reset A22E-SK 40-dia. head Medium Push-lock Key-reset A22E-MK 186 Output Color of cap Push-lock turn-reset system SPST-NC A22E-MP-01 SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-MP-11 DPST-NC A22E-MP-02 SPST-NC A22E-LP-01 SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-LP-11 DPST-NC A22E-LP-02 SPST-NC A22E-S-01 SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-S-11 DPST-NC A22E-S-02 DPST-NC + SPST-NO A22E-S12 TPST-NC A22E-S-03 SPST-NC A22E-M-01 SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-M-11 DPST-NC A22E-M-02 DPST-NC + SPST-NO A22E-M-12 TPST-NC A22E-M-03 SPST-NC A22E-L-01 SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-L-11 DPST-NC A22E-L-02 SPST-NC A22E-SK-01 SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-SK-11 DPST-NC A22E-SK-02 SPST-NC A22E-MK-01 SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-MK-11 DPST-NC A22E-MK-02 Red Lighted Models Appearance Output Lighting SPST-NC 40-dia. head Push-lock Turn-reset without voltage Reduction Unit Rated voltage LED SPST-NO/SPST-NC DPST-NC SPST-NC 40-dia. head Push-lock Turn-reset with Voltage ReducSPST-NO/SPST-NC tion Unit DPST-NC Push-lock turnreset system 6 VDC A22EL-M-6D-01 6 VAC A22EL-M-6A-01 12 VAC/VDC A22EL-M-12A-01 24 VAC/VDC A22EL-M-24A-01 Red 6 VDC A22EL-M-6D-11 6 VAC A22EL-M-6A-11 12 VAC/VDC A22EL-M-12A-11 24 VAC/VDC A22EL-M-24A-11 6 VDC A22EL-M-6D-02 6 VAC A22EL-M-6A-02 12 VAC/VDC A22EL-M-12A-02 24 VAC/VDC A22EL-M-24A-02 110 VAC A22EL-M-T1-01 220 VAC A22EL-M-T2-01 110 VAC A22EL-M-T1-11 220 VAC A22EL-M-T2-11 110 VAC A22EL-M-T1-02 220 VAC A22EL-M-T2-02 Color of cap Switch with Integrated Control Box Appearance Output Model SPST-NC A22E-M-01B SPST-NO/SPST-NC A22E-M-11B DPST-NC A22E-M-02B Operation Units Non-lighted Sealing capability and size IP65 oil-resistant models Small (30 dia.) Push-pull Push-lock, Turn-reset Push-lock, key-reset (push-lock, turn-reset) Medium (40 dia.) Large (60 dia.) --- A22E-MP A22E-LP A22E-S A22E-M A22E-L A22E-SK A22E-MK --- 187 Lighted Sealing capability and size IP65 Medium (40 dia.) Push-lock, Turn-reset A22EL-M Lamp LED Appearance LED light Red Rated voltage Standard 6 VDC Bright Model A22-6DR 6 VAC A22-6AR 12 VAC/VDC A22-12AR 24 VAC/VDC A22-24AR 24 VAC/VDC A22-24ASR Note: For voltage-reduction lighting, use the A22-24AR. Incandescent Appearance Rated voltage Model 6 VDC A22-5 14 VAC A22-12 28 VAC A22-24 130 VAC A22-H1 Switch (Standard Load) Without Voltage Reduction Unit Classification Appearance Lighted Non-lighted Switch Action Momentary Momentary Contacts For standard loads SPST-NO A22-10M A22L-10M SPST-NC A22-01M A22L-01M SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22-11M A22L-11M DPST-NO A22-20M A22L-20M DPST-NC A22-02M A22L-02M Lighted (110 VAC) Lighted (220 VAC) With Voltage Reduction Unit Classification Appearance Switch Action Momentary Momentary Contacts For standard loads SPST-NO A22L-10M-T1 A22L-10M-T2 SPST-NC A22L-01M-T1 A22L-01M-T2 SPST-NO + SPST-NC A22L-11M-T1 A22L-11M-T2 DPST-NO A22L-20M-T1 A22L-20M-T2 DPST-NC A22L-02M-T1 A22L-02M-T2 Note: 1. The above illustrations are for the DPST-NO contact. 2. When using with a Voltage Reduction Unit, use the A22-24AR. 188 Accessories (Order Separately) Item Switch Blocks Lamp Sockets Appearance Classification Model SPST-NO A22-10 SPST-NC A22-01 DPST-NO, one-piece A22-20 DPST-NC, one-piece A22-02 Remarks Provided as standard. Order Switch Blocks only when adding or replacing them. Direct lighting A22-TN Voltage-reduc- 100 VAC tion lighting 220 VAC A22-T1 Used when changing the lighting method. Mounting Latches --- A22-3200 Provided as standard. Order Mounting Latches only when mounting Switch Blocks or Lamp Sockets that are purchased individually. Lock Ring Rounded shape A22Z-3360 The body is equipped with a Lock Fitting. This Lock Fitting is used when a more secure lock feature is required. (Refer to page 194.) Hole Plug Round A22Z-3530 Can be plugged into pre-cut panel holes for future expansion. The color is black. Control Boxes (Enclosures) One hole, yellow box (for emergency stop) A22Z-B101Y Material: Polycarbonate resin Operation Keys --- A22K-K Two keys are provided. Connectors Applicable cable diameter (mm) 7 to 9 dia. A22Z-3500-1 Plastic connector used to extend a cable from the Switch Box. 9 to 11 dia. A22Z-3500-2 A22-T2 25-dia. Ring --- A22Z-R25 Can be fit into a 25-dia. hole in the panel. Since this is not attached to the main body, order separately. (Refer to page 194.) 30-dia. Resin Attachment --- A22Z-A30 Can be fit into a 30-dia. hole in the panel. (Refer to page 194.) Legend Plates for Emergency Stop 60-dia. black letters on yellow A22Z-3466-1 back-ground "EMERGENCY STOP" is indicated on the plate. 90-dia. black letters on yellow A22Z-3476-1 back-ground 60-dia. black letters on yellow A22Z-3466-2 back-ground "EMERGENCY OFF" is indicated on the plate. Lamp Extractor --- A22Z-3901 Rubber tool used to replace Lamps easily Tightening Tool --- A22Z-3905 Tool used to tighten nuts from the back of the panel and to attach caps to lighted models. Lock Plate --- A22Z-3380 Use to fix the lever on the Switch. 189 Item Appearance Classification Model Remarks E-stop Shroud (See note.) --- A22Z-EG1 The SEMI S2-compatible Shroud and legend plate for EMERGENCY OFF come as a set. Use with an A22E Emergency Stop Switch. E-stop Shroud (See note.) --- A22Z-EG2 SEMI-S2/SEMATECH Application Guide for SEMI 2S-compatible Shroud. Used together with an A22E Emergency Stop Pushbutton. Note: These E-stop Shrouds are designed for use only in semiconductor manufacturing equipment. Do not use them for any other application. Specifications Certified Standards Certification body UL (See note 2.) Standards File No. UL508 E41515 Inquire TUV Product Service EN60947-5-1, EN60947-5-5 (certified direct opening mechanism) CQC (CCC) GB14048.5 2003010303070635 KOSHA (See note 3.) EN60947-5-1 2004-220 Note: 1. Only models with NC contacts have a direct opening mechanism. 2. UL-certification for CSA C22.2 No. 14 and bears the mark. 3. Some models have been certified. Contact your OMRON sales representative. Certified Standard Ratings * UL, cUL (File No.E41515) 6A at 220 VAC, 10 A at 110 VAC * TUV (EN60947-5-1) (Low Voltage Directive) 3 A at 220VAC * CCC (GB14048.5) 3 A at 240 VAC, 1.5 A at 24 VDC Ratings Contacts (Standard Load) Rated Rated carry voltage current 10 LED Indicators without Voltage Reduction Unit Rated current (A) AC15 (inductive load) AC12 (resistive load) 10 10 DC13 (inductive load) DC12 (resistive load) Rated current 60 mA Operating voltage 6 VDC5% 6 VAC 60 mA 6 VAC/VDC5% 110 VAC 5 10 12 VAC/VDC 30 mA 12 VAC/VDC5% 220 VAC 3 6 24 VAC/VDC 15 mA 24 VAC/VDC5% 380 VAC 2 3 24 VAC 440 VAC 1 2 24 VDC --- --- --- --- 1.5 10 110 VDC 0.5 2 220 VDC 0.2 0.6 380 VDC 0.1 0.2 Note: 1. Rated current values are determined according to the testing conditions. The above ratings were obtained by conducting tests under the following conditions. (1) Ambient temperature: 202C (2) Ambient humidity: 655% (3) Operating frequency: 20 operations/minute 2. Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 VDC 190 Rated voltage 6 VDC Characteristics Item Emergency Stop Switches Non-lighted model: A22E Allowable operating frequency Mechanical 30 operations/minute max. (See note 3.) Electrical 30 operations/minute max. (See note 3.) Lighted model: A22EL Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity 2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different polarity and also between each terminal and ground Vibration resistance Shock resistance Durability Malfunction (See note 2.): 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Mechanical 1,000 m/s2 Malfunction (See note 2.) 250 m/s2 max. Mechanical Momentary operation: 300,000 operations min. (See note 3.) Electrical 300,000 operations min. (See note 3.) Ambient temperature (See note 1.) Operating: -20C to 70C Storage: -40C to 70C Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85% Degree of protection IP65 (oil-resistant) (See note 4.) Electric shock protection class Class II PTI (tracking characteristic) 175 Degree of contamination 3 (IEC60947-5-1) Note: 1. 2. 3. 4. Operating: -20C to 55C Storage: -40C to 70C IP65 (See note 4.) With no icing or condensation. Malfunction within 1 ms. Setting and resetting once is counted as one operation. The degree of protection from the front of the panel. 191 Nomenclature Pushbutton Push-lock Turn-reset System Available Color: Red Non-lighted Lighted Lamp * Light source LED Lamp Incandescent Lamp Switch * Contact Ratings 10 A at 110 VAC (resistive load) 10 A at 24 VDC (resistive load) * Lighting Method Non-lighted Lighted (without Voltage Reduction Unit) Lighted (with Voltage Reduction Unit) (The above figures are examples of the lighted model.) Safety Lock Mechanism to Prevent Misuse Lock position This Switch can be intentionally used to stop equipment in an emergency. Even if an object or person touches the Pushbutton by mistake, the contact will not be released unless the Pushbutton reaches the lock position. This Switch uses a finger protection mechanism to prevent electrical shocks. Moreover, it is provided with a mechanism to prevent terminal screws from coming off and also allows connection to either round or forked crimp terminals. Finger protection Mechanism for preventing terminal screws from coming off (loosening the screws do not cause them to come off) 192 Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. Non-lighted Models A22E-MP A22E-LP Medium Push-pull (40-dia.) Large Push-pull (60-dia. ) 60 dia. 40 dia. A22E-S A22E-M Small Push-lock, Turn-reset (30-dia. ) Medium Push-lock, Turn-reset (40-dia. ) 1.5 2 30 dia. 40 dia. 1.8 18.5 41.2 32 A22E-L Large Push-lock, Turn-reset (60-dia.) 60 dia. 1.8 A22E-SK A22E-MK Small Push-lock, Key-reset (30-dia.) Medium Push-lock, Key-reset (40-dia.) 30 dia. 34 22 1.8 40 dia. 22 1.8 193 Lighted Models A22EL-M Medium Push-lock, Turn-reset (40-dia. ) 40 dia. 18.5 41.2 32 Dimensions for Accessories Hole Plug Round A22Z-3530 30-dia. Resin Attachment A22Z-A30 6 6.1 3.8 20.5 34.7 dia. 2.8 30 dia. 1 13 22.2 dia. 2.5 Legend Plates for Emergency Stop A22Z-3476-1 (90) A22Z-3466-1 (60) A22Z-3466-2 (60) 90 dia. 60 dia. Black letter Black letters Yellow Yellow 22.2 dia. Yellow 22.2 dia. OFF 22.2 dia. Tightening Wrench A22Z-3905 11 dia. 8.5 dia. 30 dia. 8 dia. Material: Chloroprene rubber 25-dia. Ring A22Z-R25 22 dia. 24.8 dia. 27 dia. Lock Ring A22Z-3360 22.2 dia. 30 dia. 194 t1 Material: NBR (black) 19.2 dia. 21.2 dia. 25 dia. Lamp Extractor A22Z-3901 Material: Iron, zinc plated GE ER N CY Black letters EM 60 dia. Lamp LED A22-6@, 12@, 24@ Incandescent Lamp A22-5, 12, 24, H1 20.41.5 10 1 dia. 9.5 dia. 10.6 dia. 28 max. BA9S/13 Model indication BA9S/13 Control Box A22Z-B101Y (1 hole) Cable Draw-out Hole (Top View) 4-4 x 38 tapping screw 56 69.5 Two, 21 dia. Side lead draw-out hole 20 41 68 36 41 2.80.1 22.1 0.3 0.1 dia. 161 dia. (Side lead draw-out hole) 10 (10 x 36) 0.6 depression 20.50.1 75 32 39 Two, mounting holes Lock Plate A22Z-3380 7.3 dia. E-stop Shroud A22Z-EG1 52.2 max. 38 75 63 75 min. (Determined by the height of the Switch surface in the lock position.) 2.8 90 dia. 78 dia. 20.5 R5 Note 1: The dimensions of the Shroud conform to the specifications of the SEMATECH Application Guide for SEMI S2-93. 2: These Shrouds are designed for use only in semiconductor manufacturing equipment. Do not use them for any other application. 3: The Shroud is not provided with the Switch. 30 40 22.2 dia. Switch Unit 33 dia. A22E-M Panel 2.5 +0.5 -1.5 EMERGENCY OFF inscription plate (t=0.1) 8 Rubber packing (t=0.5) Sunken section, 0.2 Switch guard Panel Cutout Dimensions 22.3+0.4 0 24.20.2 2 1 R1.7 +0.1 0 Rubber packing (t=0.5) Mounting panel Locking ring Allowable panel thickness: 1 to 3 mm 195 E-stop Shroud A22Z-EG2, A22Z-EG21, A22Z-EG22 105 dia. 98 dia. 3 35 12 79 dia. 2.8 20.6 22.2 dia. M90 Detents inside (One on each side) R2 With 1 Spacer Spacer The number of spacers depends on the model (See note 2.) Mounting a 1-pole Switch Unit (See note 5.) With 2 Spacers Mounting a 2-pole Switch Unit (See note 5.) Spacers Panel Cutout Dimensions 90.3+0.4 0 dia. DPST-NC One-piece Contact Unit NC Contact Unit Position of detent notch Position of detent notch 5.5+0.2 0 10 13 20 23 Panel 95+0.2 0 Panel Panel Panel 88 max. Note: 1. These Shrouds are designed for use only in semiconductor manufacturing equipment. Do not use them for any other application. 2. The number of Spacers that are combined depends on the model. Model No. of Spacers A22Z-EG2 0 A22Z-EG21 1 A22Z-EG22 2 Terminal Arrangement Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Non-lighted Lighted Switch Blocks M3.5 screws Switch Blocks 196 Lamp Socket 105 max. 3. Tighten to a torque of 1.96 to 2.94 Nm. 4. The allowable panel thicknesses are as follows: Without Spacers: t=1.3 to 22.5 mm With 1 Spacer: t=1.3 to 12.5 mm With 2 Spacers: t=1.3 to 2.5 mm 5. These are the dimension from the front of the panel when the Switch Unit is attached. Terminal Connection Type Terminal connection (BOTTOM VIEW) SPST-NO + SPST-NC Non-lighted 1 1 3 4 2 Lighted without Voltage Reduction Unit DPST-NC 2 2 X1 1 1 X1 1 3 (+) X X 4 X2 2 1 (-) X1 3 1 X1 X 2 2 X2 2 (-) Lighted with Voltage Reduction Unit 1 (+) X2 1 X 4 2 X2 2 Note: The above terminal connection diagrams are examples for SPST-NO + SPST-NC and DPST-NC. Panel Cutouts R0.8 max. 3.2+0.2 0 24.1+0.4 0 22.3+0.4 0 dia. 22.3+0.4 0 dia. With Lock Fitting 25+0.5 0 dia. Without Lock Fitting A Lock Ring is provided as a standard feature. Note: 1. When painting or coating the panel, make sure that the specified panel dimensions apply to the panel after painting or coating. 2. Use an A22Z-R25 Ring when mounting to a panel with a 25mm diameter hole. Installation Mounting to the Panel Preparing the Panel Mounting the Operation Unit on the Panel * The panel dimensions are shown below. * The panel thickness must be 1 to 5 mm. 3.2+0.2 0 Insert the Operation Unit (Pushbutton) from the front surface of the panel, insert the Lock Ring and the mounting nut from the terminal side, then tighten the nut. Before tightening, check that the rubber washer is present between the Operation Unit and the panel. R0.8 max. When using a Legend Plate Frame, put one rubber washer each between the Legend Plate Frame and the panel and between the Operation Unit and the Legend Plate Frame. (One rubber washer will be provided when one Legend Plate Frame is ordered.) 24.1+0.4 0 22.3+0.4 0 dia. With Lock Ring 22.3+0.4 0 dia. 25+0.5 0 dia. Without Lock Ring * Always use a 25-mm-dia. Lock Ring for a 25-mm-dia. hole. IP65 degree of protection will be lost if the 25-mm-dia. Lock Ring is not used because of the larger size of a 25-mm-dia. hole. * When painting or coating the panel, make sure that the specified panel dimensions apply to the panel after painting or coating. Align the Lock Ring with the groove in the casing, then insert the Lock Ring so that its edge is located on the panel side. Tighten the mounting nut at a torque of 0.98 to 1.96 N*m. When using a Lock Ring, replace with the supplied Lock Ring, insert the projecting part into the lock slot, and then tighten the mounting nut. 197 Rubber washer Panel Projecting part Hold here Mounting nut 2. The following diagram provides the dimensions for mounting Large Legend Plates with crimp terminals connected to Switch terminals. 30 Lock Ring B Lock Ring Panel 1. When the panel cutout dimension is 25 dia., remove the supplied rubber washer and mount the 25-dia. Ring as shown below. (Since the A22Z-R25 is not attached to the main body, order separately.) Operation Unit Dimensions A and B between mounting hole centers are given in the following tables. For 1., Above Switch model 22 dia. 25-dia. Ring (A22Z-R25) Dimension A A22-10, A22-10S, A22-01, A22-01S 45 mm min. A22-20, A22-20S, A-22-02, A22-02S, A22-11, A22-11S 55 mm min. 22.3 dia. For 2., Above 25 dia. Panel Lock Ring Type of crimp terminal 25 dia. 2. When the panel cutout dimension is 30 dia., the A22Z-A30 Attachment is not attached to the main body, order separately. Operation Unit Rubber washer (mounted to Operation Unit) 30-dia. Resin Attachment (A22Z-A30) Rubber washer (included) Mounting panel Lock Ring Dimension B Naked crimp terminals A22-10, A22-10S, A22-01, A22-01S 51 mm min. Crimp terminals with insulating sheaths A22-10, A22-10S, A22-01, A22-01S 60 mm min. 22.3 dia. Mounting nut Switch model A22-20, A22-20S, A22-02, A22-02S, 61 mm min. A22-11, A22-11S A22-20, A22-20S, A22-02, A22-02S, 70 mm min. A22-11, A22-11S Note: 1. The above dimensions are the minimum dimensions when using the applicable wiring materials listed on page 201. If any other materials are used, check the suitability of dimensions in advance. 2. When using pushbuttons exceeding 30 mm, adjust dimension A or B accordingly. (When mounting the A22-M@ in a matrix, "30 mm" would have to be increased to 40 mm. Mounting the Switch on the Operation Unit Insert the Operation Unit into the Switch Unit, aligning the arrow mark inscribed on the Case with the lever on the Switch Blocks, then move the lever in the direction indicated by the arrow in the following figure. Mounting Ring Matrix Mounting 1. The following diagram provides the dimensions for mounting individual Switches, Legend Plates, and Lock Rings with leads connected directly to Switch terminals. Operation Unit 30 Arrow mark Lever A Removing the Switch 198 Move the lever in the direction indicated by the arrow in the following figure, then pull the Operation Unit or the Switch Blocks. Control Box (Enclosure) Since the lever has a hole with an inside diameter of 6.5 mm, the lever can be moved in the specified direction by inserting a screwdriver into the hole and then moving the screwdriver. Mounting the Switch Screwdriver The Standard-size Legend Plate Frame can be mounted. Mount the Frame as shown in the following diagram. Mount the Switch in the same way as for an ordinary panel. Snap-in Legend Plate Assembling the Cap Creating a Cable Port Hole Emergency Stop Switch Place the tip of a screwdriver on the surface where the cable port hole is to be created with the cover attached and strike the screwdriver to punch a hole. Attempts to punch a hole on the other side of the case will damage the Box. Insert the protrusion of the Tightening Wrench (A22Z-3905) into the Cap slot and then turn to remove the Cap. Installing/Replacing the Lamp Installing/Replacing from the Panel Surface Insert the Lamp Extractor (A22Z-3901) into the lamp, then rotate the Extractor while pressing it. Securing the Connector Cable 1. Insert the connector into the cable port hole in the Box and secure with the fixing nut inside the box. 2. Open a hole in the thin rubber section of the rubber ring. 3. Pass the tightening cap through the cable, insert the cable into the connector, and tighten the hexagonal nut to secure the cable. Lock nut Rubber washer Connector Tightening cap Cable Installing/Replacing on the Switch Grip the indicator with your fingers, then rotate the indicator while pressing it against the Switch. Inside Outside Box Cable diameter Connector 7 to 9 dia. A22Z-3500-1 9 to 11 dia. A22Z-3500-2 199 Installing/Removing the Switch Blocks Wiring Installing the Switch Blocks Loosen the terminal screw from the Switch Unit until it completely comes off the groove, insert a screwdriver as shown in the following figure, then push up the washer in the direction indicated by the arrow to temporarily secure it. Now, a round crimp terminal can be connected. After inserting the terminal, tighten the screws to complete wiring. Hook the small protrusion on the Mounting Latch into the groove on the other side of the lever, then push up the Switch Block in the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Wiring Round Crimp Terminals Washer Lever Mounting Latch Screw Protrusion Switch Block Removing the Switch Blocks Insert a screwdriver between the Mounting Latch and the Switch Block, then push down the screwdriver in the direction indicated by the arrow in the following figure. Use either of the following screwdrivers. Flat-head screwdriver Phillips screwdriver 3 to 6 mm 3 to 6 mm dia. Screwdriver 200 Screwdriver Safety Precautions Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on page 14. Voltage (V) !Caution Do not apply a voltage exceeding the rated voltage across the incandescent lamp terminals. The lamp may be destroyed and the operation unit may fly out. 0.16 mA 100 mA 1.6 mA 30 24 Precautions for Correct Use Microload area Area of use Standard load area Mounting 12 Always make sure that the power is turned OFF before mounting, removing, or wiring the Switch, or performing maintenance. Electric shock may occur. Do not tighten the mounting ring more than necessary using tools such as pointed-nose pliers. Doing so will damage the mounting ring. The tightening torque is 0.98 to 1.96 N*m. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm. Wiring When DC-specific LEDs are used, wire the Switch so that the X1 terminal is positive. Terminal screws must be Phillips or slotted M3.5 screws with a square washer. The tightening torque is 1.08 to 1.27 N*m. Single wires, stranded wires, and crimp terminals can be connected to the Switch. Applicable Wiring Materials: Twisted strands: 2 mm2 max. Solid wire: 1.6 mm dia. Naked Crimp Terminals 8 mm dia. max. 8 mm max. 16.0 mm max. Crimp Terminals with Insulating Sheaths 16.0 mm max. 8 mm max. 20.2 mm max. 8 mm dia. max. Invalid area 5 0 0.1 1 mA 10 mA 1 10 100 1,000 Current (mA) LEDs The LED current-limiting resistor is built-in, so internal resistance is not required. If commercially available LEDs are used, select the ones that meet the following conditions: Base: BA9S/13@ Overall length: 26 mm max. Power consumption: 2.6 W max. Others The oil-resistant IP65 uses NBR rubber and is resistant to general cutting oil and cooling oil. Some particular oils cannot be used with the oil-resistant IP65, however, so contact your OMRON representative for details. If the panel is to be finished with coating, etc., make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating. Do not subject the Switch to extreme shock or vibration. Doing so will cause malfunctions and damage to the Switch. Do not let sharp objects come into contact with the Switches that are made of resin. Doing so will damage the Switches, causing scratches on the outside of the Pushbuttons, and malfunction. When handling the Switches, do not throw or drop them. 20.2 mm max. After wiring the Switch, maintain an appropriate clearance and creepage distance. Do not allow the Switch to drop and hit the ground. Operating Environment The IP65 model is designed with a protective structure so that it will not sustain damage if it is subjected to water from any direction to the front of the panel. Using the Microload Contact failure may occur is a Switch designed for a standard load is used to switch a microload. Use Switches within the application ranges shown in the following graph. Even within the application range, insert a contact protection circuit, if necessary, to prevent the reduction of life expectancy due to extreme wear on the contacts caused by loads where inrush current occurs when the contact is opened and closed. The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability level of 60% ( 60) (conforming to JIS C5003). The equation, 60 = 0.5 x 10-6/time indicates that the estimated malfunction rate is less than 1/2,000,000 with a reliability level of 60%. Do not place or drop heavy objects on the Switch. Do not operate the Switch with hard or sharp objects. Hammer Screwdriver ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A119-E1-06 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. 201 Indicator M22 22-dia. and 25-dia. Round Indicator Series * Easy mounting and removal of Socket Unit. * Use 25-dia. ring to install in 25-dia. panel cutouts. * Finger protection mechanism on Lamp provided as a standard feature. * UL and cUL approved (File No. E41515) Model Number Structure Model Number Legend Completely Assembled Shipped as a set which includes the Display, Lamp, and Socket Unit. 1 2 3 M22-@@-@ 1 Display Shape Code Description 2 Illumination Color Code Description 3 Light Source Code Operating voltage F Round/Flat R Red Without Voltage Reduction Unit C Square/Projection G Green 6D Y Yellow 6A W White 12A 12 VAC/VDC A Blue 24A 24 VAC/VDC 5 12 LED 6 VDC 6 VAC Incandescent lamp 24 5 VAC/VDC 12 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC With Voltage Reduction Unit T1 T2 LED 100 VAC 200 VAC Note: The LED lamp (24 VAC/VDC) can be lit by directly applying 110 VAC/VDC (220 VAC/ VDC) to the lamp terminal. LED incorporates the 24-VAC/VDC type. 202 Subassembled The Display, Lamp, or Socket Unit can be ordered separately. Use them in combination for models that are not available as assembled Units. These can also be used as inventory for maintenance parts. 1. Display 1 2 M22-@@ 1 Flange Shape Code 2 Cap Color Description Code Description F Round/Flat R Red C Square/Projection G Green Y Yellow W White A Blue 2. Lamp 1 2 A22-@@ 1 Operating Voltage (Rated Voltage) 2 Illumination Color Code Incandescent Code Description Description None Incandescent lamp 5 5 VAC (6 VAC) R Red 12 12 VAC (14 VAC) G Green 24 24 VAC (28 VAC) Y Yellow LED A Blue 6D 6 VDC (6 VDC) 6A 6 VAC (6 VAC) 12A 12 VAC/VDC (12 VAC/VDC) 24A 24 VAC/VDC (24 VAC/VDC) 3. Socket Unit 1 M22-00-@ 1 Voltage Reduction Unit Code Description None Without Voltage Reduction Unit T1 110 VAC T2 220 VAC 203 Ordering Information List of Models Completely Assembled Indicator Appearance Lighting LED Round/Flat without Voltage Reduction Unit M22-F Round/Flat with Voltage Reduction Unit Operating voltage 6 VDC Model M22-F@-6D 6 VAC M22-F@-6A 12 VAC/VDC M22-F@-12A 24 VAC/VDC M22-F@-24A 100 VAC M22-F@-T1 200 VAC M22-F@-T2 M22-F Square/Projection without Voltage Reduction Unit M22-C Square/Projection with Voltage Reduction Unit M22-C 204 6 VDC M22-C@-6D 6 VAC M22-C@-6A 12 VAC/VDC M22-C@-12A 24 VAC/VDC M22-C@-24A 100 VAC M22-C@-T1 200 VAC M22-C@-T2 Illumination color Insert one of the following letters into the box @. R (red) Y (yellow) G (green) W (white) A (blue) Subassembled Display Lamp LED Lamp Incandescent lamp LED Socket Unit Socket Unit Without Voltage Reduction Unit With Voltage Reduction Unit Display Appearance IP65 oil-resistant Color of Display Round/Flat M22-F Square/Projection M22-C Model Red M22-FR Green M22-FG Yellow M22-FY White M22-FW Blue M22-FA Red M22-CR Green M22-CG Yellow M22-CY White M22-CW Blue M22-CA 205 Lamp LED Operating voltage Appearance AC/DC AC DC AC and DC 6V 12 V LED light 24 V 24 V Super-bright Model Red A22-6DR --- --- --- Green A22-6DG --- --- --- Yellow (see note 2) A22-6DY --- --- --- Blue A22-6DA --- --- --- Red A22-6AR --- --- --- Green A22-6AG --- --- --- Yellow (see note 2) A22-6AY --- --- --- Blue A22-6AA --- --- --- Red --- A22-12AR A22-24AR A22-24ASR Green --- A22-12AG A22-24AG A22-24ASG Yellow (see note 2) --- A22-12AY A22-24AY A22-24ASY Blue --- A22-12AA A22-24AA A22-24ASA Note: 1. For voltage-reduction lighting, use the A22-24A@. 2. Used when the Display color is yellow or white. Incandescent Operating voltage 6 VAC/VDC 12 VAC/VDC A22-5 A22-12 24 VAC/VDC A22-24 Socket Unit Voltage-reduction circuits Without Voltage Reduction Unit With Voltage Reduction Unit Without Voltage Reduction Unit With Voltage Reduction Unit (100 VAC) With Voltage Reduction Unit (200 VAC) M22-00 M22-00-T1 M22-00-T2 Note: For voltage-reduction lighting, use the A22-24A@. Accessories (Order Separately) The M22 uses the same accessories as the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the corresponding section for the A22. 206 Specifications Approved Standards Recognized organization UL, cUL (See note.) Standards UL508 File No. E41515 Note: cUL: CSA C22.2 No. 14 Approved Standard Ratings UL, cUL (File No. E41515) 2-6W, 120 V max. Ratings LED Lamp Rated voltage Incandescent Lamp Rated current Operating voltage Rated voltage Rated current Operating voltage 60 mA (20 mA) 6 VDC5% 6 VAC/VDC 200 mA 5V 6 VAC 60 mA (20 mA) 6 VAC5% 14 VAC/VDC 80 mA 12 V 12 VAC/VDC 30 mA (10 mA) 12 VAC/VDC5% 28 VAC/VDC 40 mA 24 V 24 VAC/VDC 15 mA (10 mA) 24 VAC/VDC5% 130 VAC/VDC 20 mA 100 V 6 VDC Note: The values in parentheses are for blue Indicators. Voltage-reduction Lighting Super-bright LED Indicator Rated voltage 24 VAC/VDC Rated current 15 mA Rated voltage Operating voltage 24 VAC/VDC5% Operational voltage 110 VAC 95 to 115 VAC 220 VAC 190 to 230 VAC Applicable lamp (BA9S/13@ gold) LED lamp (A22-24@) Characteristics Item Indicator M22 Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity 2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different polarity and also between each terminal and ground Vibration resistance Shock resistance Malfunction (See note 2.): 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Destruction 1,000 m/s2 Malfunction (See note 2.) 600 m/s2 max. Ambient temperature (See note 1.) Operating: -20C to 55C Storage: -40C to 70C Ambient humidity Operating: 35C to 85C Degree of protection IP65 Electric shock protection class Class II PTI (tracking characteristic) 175 Degree of contamination 3 (IEC947-5-1) Note: 1. With no icing or condensation. 2. Malfunction within 1 ms. 207 Nomenclature Display * Available Colors Red, green yellow, white, blue Lock Ring Lamp * Light Source LED lamp Incandescent lamp Socket Unit * Lighting Method Lighted (without Voltage Reduction Unit) Lighted (with Voltage Reduction Unit) 208 Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. Indicators Round/Flat Square/Projection M22-F M22-C 29.8 x 29.8 25.6 x 25.6 29.7 dia. Accessories The M22 uses the same accessories as the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the corresponding section for the A22. Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) With/Without Voltage Reduction Unit M3.5 screw Lamp Socket Terminal Connection Without Voltage Reduction Unit Bottom view Panel Cutouts (Top View) With Voltage Reduction Unit Top view 22.3+0.4 0 dia. 25+0.5 0 dia. Note: 1. When applying coating such as paint to the panel, the dimensions should be those after the application of coating. Lock Ring is provided as a standard item. 2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm. 3. Use an A22Z-R25 Ring when mounting to a panel with 25mm holes. Installation The M22 uses the same installation method as the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the Installation section for the A22. Precautions The precautions for the M22 are the same as those for the A22. Refer to the relevant information in the Precautions section for the A22 and the Technical Information for Pushbutton Switches (Cat. No. A143). ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A131-E1-03 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. 209 Lighted Pushbutton Switch A3A Compact Switch Allows Signal and Power Switching with the Same Model Compact, high-capacity push-button switch that has contacts with a 3-mm gap and is ideal as a power switch. Capable of switching within the range of 1 mA, 5 VDC to 6 A, 125 VAC. Requires only 14.5 mm behind the panel. Options include the following: * Round or square * Momentary or alternate * Surface illumination or non-lighted RC UL and CSA approved. Ordering Information Model Number Legend (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) A 3 A A - 9 0 K 1 - 00E R (5) Color (1) Shape Symbol Pushbutton (Non-lighted Models) Protection A Square T Round Symbol (2) Terminal Type Symbol 0 Solder 1 PCB (3) Switch Symbol Operation Contact type A (See note) Momentary SPDT B (See note) Alternate 3 A at 125 VAC, 2 A at 30 VDC SPST-NO 6 A at 125 VAC, 2 A at 250 VAC, 4 A at 30 VDC K Momentary L Alternate (4) Illumination Symbol Operation 00 Non-lighted 00E Surface illumination Color L Light gray R Red (See note) Y Yellow (See note) G Green (See note) A Blue B Black D Dark gray H Gray LED (Surface Illumination Models) Symbol Color R Red Y Yellow G Green Note: Common to both lighted and nonlighted models. 210 A3A A3A List of Models SPST-NO Appearance Square q Terminal Solder A3AA 9jj1 00j A3AA-9jj1-00j A3AA-9jj1-00Ej Action Momentary Alternate PCB Momentary Alternate Round Solder A3AT 9jj1 00j A3AT-9jj1-00j A3AT-9jj1-00Ej Momentary Alternate PCB Momentary Alternate Note: Illumination Model Color Non-lighted A3AA-90K1-00j ((Non-lighted) g ) Surface illumination A3AA-90K1-00Ej R: red Non-lighted A3AA-90L1-00j Y: yellow Surface illumination A3AA-90L1-00Ej G: green Non-lighted A3AA-91K1-00j L: light gray (see note) Surface illumination A3AA-91K1-00Ej A: blue (see note) Non-lighted A3AA-91L1-00j B: black (see note) Surface illumination A3AA-91L1-00Ej Non-lighted A3AT-90K1-00j Surface illumination A3AT-90K1-00Ej Non-lighted A3AT-90L1-00j Surface illumination A3AT-90L1-00Ej Non-lighted A3AT-91K1-00j Surface illumination A3AT-91K1-00Ej Non-lighted A3AT-91L1-00j Surface illumination A3AT-91L1-00Ej D: dark gray (see note) H: gray (see note) (Lighted) R: red Y: yellow G green G: The above models each have a SPST-NO contact that can switch 6 A at 125 VAC, 2 A at 250 VAC, and 4 A at 30 VDC. When ordering any of the above models, replace j of the model number with a code to indicate the pushbutton color of the model (i.e., replace j with R, Y, G, L, A, B, D, H, and L). The pushbutton of an A3A does not illuminate if the color of the pushbutton is dark gray, gray, light gray, blue, or black. SPDT Appearance Square A3AA-9jj1-00j A3AA 9jj1 00Ej A3AA-9jj1-00Ej Terminal Solder Action Momentary y Alternate PCB Momentary y Alternate Round A3AT 9jj1 00j A3AT-9jj1-00j A3AT-9jj1-00Ej Solder Momentary y Alternate PCB Momentary y Alternate Note: Illumination Model Color Non-lighted A3AA-90A1-00j R: red Surface illumination A3AA-90A1-00Ej Y: yellow Non-lighted A3AA-90B1-00j G: green Surface illumination A3AA-90B1-00Ej L: light gray (see note) Non-lighted A3AA-91A1-00j A: blue (see note) Surface illumination A3AA-91A1-00Ej B: black (see note) Non-lighted A3AA-91B1-00j Surface illumination A3AA-91B1-00Ej Non-lighted A3AT-90A1-00j Surface illumination A3AT-90A1-00Ej Non-lighted A3AT-90B1-00j Surface illumination A3AT-90B1-00Ej Non-lighted A3AT-91A1-00j Surface illumination A3AT-91A1-00Ej Non-lighted A3AT-91B1-00j Surface illumination A3AT-91B1-00Ej D: dark gray (see note) H: gray (see note) (Lighted) R: red Y: yellow G: green The above models each have a SPDT contact that can switch 3 A at 125 VAC and 2 A at 30 VDC. When ordering any of the above models, replace j of the model number with a code to indicate the pushbutton color of the model (i.e., replace j with R, Y, G, L, A, B, D, H, and L). The pushbutton of an A3A does not illuminate if the color of the pushbutton is dark gray, gray, light gray, blue, or black. 211 A3A A3A Accessories (Order Separately) Flange Select according to panel color. Shape Name Flange Classification Square, 12.7 x 12.7 Flange alone Round, 12.7 dia. Model Black A3A-241 Light gray A3A-242 Black A3A-251 Light gray A3A-252 Leaf spring Square, 12.7 x 12.7 A3A-200 Flange and leaf spring (one each) Round, 12.7 dia. Note: Black A3A-211 Light gray A3A-212 Black A3A-221 Light gray A3A-222 An A3A with solder terminals is provided with a round or square black flange and leaf spring for the switching mechanism of the A3A. A round black flange is provided with each A3A having solder terminals and a round pushbutton. A square black flange is provided with each A3A having solder terminals and a square pushbutton. Specifications Contact Ratings Type Contact form High capacity Note: SPST-NO Resistive load 6 A at 125 VAC 2 A at 250 VAC 4 A at 30 VDC 1. Minimum allowable load: 5 VDC 1 mA (Resistive) 2. The ratings given above are for testing under the following conditions: 1. Ambient temperature: 20 2C 2. Ambient humidity: 65 5% 3. Operating frequency: 20 times/minute LED Ratings Item Surface illumination Red Forward voltage VF Standard value 2.0 V Maximum value 3V Standard value 10 mA Maximum value Permissible loss PD Reverse voltage VR Forward current IF Note: Green 2.1 V 20 mA 25 mA 25 mA Absolute max. value 60 mW 75 mW 75 mW Absolute max. value 3V 1. The above built-in LEDs do not have a resistor. Connect to each of the above built-in LEDs a resistor that satisfies the above conditions. 2. Refer to the VF - IF characteristic graphs on page 219. 212 Yellow 2.1 V A3A A3A Characteristics Operating frequency Mechanical: Momentary action: Alternate action: 120 operations/minute max. 60 operations/minute max. (See note 1.) Electrical: 20 operations/minute max. Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC) Contact resistance 100 m max. (initial value) Dielectric strength 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between each terminal and ground 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between LED terminals (See note 2.) Vibration resistance Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (See note 3.) Shock resistance Destruction: 500 m/s2 Malfunction: 150 m/s2 (See note 3.) Life expectancy Mechanical: Momentary action: Alternate action: 1,000,000 operations min. 50,000 operations min. (See note 1.) Electrical: 50,000 operations min. Weight Approx. 3.2 g Ambient temperature Operating: -10C to 55C (with no icing) Storage: -25C to 65C Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85% Degree of protection IP00 Electric shock protection class Class II PTI (proof tracking index) 175 Pollution degree 3 (IEC947-5-1) Note: 1. With alternate-action models, a setting and resetting is regarded as one operation. 2. The figure for the dielectric strength between LED terminals in the above table is for when the LED is not installed in the Switch. 3. The figures for malfunctions in the above table are for malfunctions of at least 1 ms. Approved Standards UL (File No. E41515)/CSA (File No. LR45258) SPST-NO: 6 A at 125 VAC, 2 A at 250 VAC, 4 A at 30 VDC SPDT: 3 A at 125 VAC, 2 A at 30 VDC Operating Characteristics OF max. 2.45 N RF min. 0.15 N TT Approx. 2 mm PT max. 1.5 mm LTA min. (See note.) 0.5 mm Note: The above lock stroke figure applies to A3A alternate operation models only. 213 A3A A3A Nomenclature Pushbutton Square (A3AA) Color cap Round (A3AT) Diffusion sheet (milky white) Color Non-lighted Model Red, yellow, light gray, gray, dark gray, green blue, black Surface Illumination Model Flange Red, yellow, green Switch Leaf spring Ratings (Standard load) 6 A at 125 VAC 2 A at 250 VAC 4 A at 30 VDC Minimum applicable load: 1 mA at 5 VDC (resistive load) Terminals Solder terminal PCB terminal Contact Form Contact Type Contact form Contact type SPST-NO NO NC SPDT COM Note: NO NO 1. The above is for the A3AA. 2. An A3A with solder terminals is provided with a black flange and leaf spring for the switching mechanism, however an A3A with PCB terminals is not provided with them. If a black flange and leaf spring are required for an A3A with PCB terminals, order them from your OMRON representative. 214 A3A A3A Dimensions Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. 2. The illustrations below show switches with solder terminals, without a flange or leaf spring. Non-lighted Model Square Pushbutton SPDT SPST-NO Square push-button 8.9 x 8.9 Round Pushbutton Round push-button 15.2 Three, t0.4 terminals Two, t0.4 terminals 8.9 dia. Surface Illumination Model Square Pushbutton SPST-NO SPDT Square push-button 8.9 x 8.9 Surface illumination Round Pushbutton Round push-button 15.2 Three, t0.4 terminals Two, t0.4 terminals 8.9 dia. Surface illumination Two, t0.3 LED terminals Two, t0.3 LED terminals Accessories (Order Separately) Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. Leaf Spring A3A-200 Flange (Square) A3A-24j Flange (Round) A3A-25j 12.7 dia. 9.1 dia. 12.7 9.1 9.1 12.7 t = 0.3 1.0 1.0 215 A3A A3A Panel Cutouts Square Pushbutton Panel Mounting Dimensions 11.5 +0.2 0 Flange Panel (See note.) 11.5 +0.2 0 Leaf spring 14.5 max. Round Pushbutton 11.5 +0.2 0 Note: dia. 1. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 1.6 mm 2. The diagram shows the lighted SPST-NO model. For Side-by-side Mounting Mounting Horizontal multiple mounting Square pushbutton Round pushbutton 15.3 min. +0.2 11.5 0 11.5 3.8 min 11.5 dia. +0.2 -0 +0.2 -0 Vertical multiple mounting 15.3 min. 11.5 11.5 +0.2 0 dia. +0.2 -0 12.7 min. 216 A3A A3A Terminals Solder terminal SPSTNO Non-lighted Models PCB terminal Switch terminal: t0.4 Non-lighted Models Lighted Models Switch terminal: t0.4 Lamp terminal: t0.3 Lighted Models Switch terminal: t0.4 Lamp terminal: t0.3 Switch terminal: t0.4 Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) 0.8 0.8 x 2 Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) LED terminal LED terminal PCB Dimensions (Bottom View) Holes for models with illuminating push-button Terminal for models with an illuminating push-button (0.67) Terminal for models with an illuminating push-button 10.16 4.48 (1.87) Four, 1 dia. holes 10.16 10.16 SPDT Non-lighted Models Switch terminal: t0.4 Non-lighted Models Lighted Models Switch terminal: t0.4 LED terminal: t0.3 Switch terminal: t0.4 Switch terminal: t0.4 Lamp terminal: t0.3 Lighted Models Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) LED terminal PCB Dimensions (Bottom View) Five, 1-dia. holes Holes for models with illuminating push-button Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) LED terminal 1.95 217 A3A A3A Installation Mounting and Replacing the Pushbutton Mounting Direction for the Pushbutton and Switch * Insert the catches of the Pushbutton into the grooves of the Switch and push down on the Pushbutton until it is fixed securely to the Switch. * With lighted models, the LED is built into the Switch and cannot be replaced. Catches on the Pushbutton Grooves in the Switch Note: Be sure to fit the leaf spring exactly into the groove, and do not allow it to slip out of the groove. Mount Flange on Panel Insert the flange from the front surface of the panel. Flange Panel Guide The flange has two opposing guides to facilitate its insertion into the panel cutout hole. Be sure the flange does not remain tilted with respect to the panel surface after being installed. Cross Section Flange LED terminals Removing the Pushbutton (Non-lighted Models Only) * To remove the Pushbutton, hold both the Pushbutton and the Switch on the longer sides and pull the Pushbutton away from the Switch. (If the catches on the Pushbutton are bent outwards, it may result in malfunction.) Panel (t = 1 to 1.6 mm) Note: The mounting direction of the flange determines the orientation of the Switch. Fit Flange with Switch While holding the flange, insert the opposing supports into the gaps between the leaf spring and Switch on the longer sides of the housing, and fit the rectangular hole of the flange with the projections of the switch housing. Support Catch * When replacing the Pushbutton, if the cap is held on the sides with catches, internal components (e.g., plate) may come loose. Be sure to hold the Pushbutton by the sides without catches (i.e., the longer sides of the Switch) when removing. Panel Projection Note: Completely remove any burrs on the panel cutout surface; otherwise, the flange and Switch will not attach solidly. Removing Switch Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver or tweezers into the flange support exposed on the rear of the panel. Pry up on each side to pull out the Switch. Mounting Switch on a Panel Panel Mount Leaf Spring Press the leaf spring into the fitted groove on the upper surface of the Switch. For an easier fitting, first fit one side of the leaf spring, then press the other side into the fitting groove. Flat-bladed screwdriver or tweezers Leaf spring Leaf spring fitting groove Switch 218 Note: Do not pry up the flange support more than necessary or the switch holding portions may be damaged. A3A A3A Precautions LED Characteristics (VF - IF Characteristics) Ta: Ambient Temperature Red Mounting When opening a hole on a panel to mount an A3A to the panel, make sure that the hole has no burr. When mounting a flange to the switching mechanism of an A3A, make sure that the flange and the casing of the switching mechanism are engaged securely. Wiring When soldering the terminals of an A3A, refer to the following. 1. For manual soldering: Use a soldering iron with the terminals at a temperature of 350C maximum within three seconds. 2. Do not impose any external force on the terminals for one minute after the terminals are soldered. Do not pull the terminals of any A3A with a force exceeding 5.34 N, otherwise the joint part of the A3A may be damaged. When soldering the terminals of an A3A, apply non-corrosive rosin flux to the terminals. After soldering the terminals of an A3A, do not wash the A3A with any solvent. When mounting an A3A to a PCB and soldering the terminals of the A3A to the PCB, make sure that the flux will not rise above the surface of the PCB. Ta = 25C Forward Current: Ir (mA) When operating an A3A, make sure that the A3A has a pushbutton. Do not operate the A3A with a screwdriver or tweezers without mounting a pushbutton to the A3A, otherwise the A3A may malfunction. Forward Voltage: Vr (V) Green Ta = 25C Forward Current: Ir (mA) Operation Operating Environment When using an A3A, make sure that dust, metal powder, or oil will not penetrate into the interior of the A3A. Forward Voltage: Vr (V) Yellow The polarity of the LED is indicated on the back of the Switch. Wire the LED correctly according to the polarity. An A3A with a built-in LED does not have a limiting resistor. Connect a limiting resistor. The resistance can be calculated by using the following expression. R = (E -VF)/IF () E: Applied voltage (V) VF: LED forward voltage (V) IF: LED forward current (A) Note: Make sure that the limiting resistor connected to the built-in LED of an A3A satisfies the characteristics of the built-in LED. The mean forward current of the built-in LED must be 8 mA minimum. Example Conditions: Red LED with an IF of -10 mA at 24 V and a Ta of 25C. From the red LED characteristic below, VF will be 2 V when IF is 10 mA. Therefore, R = (24 V - 2 V)/0.01 A = 2,200 . Thus the recommended resistance is 2.2 k at 0.5 W (2* x IF2R). Note: A factor of 2 (marked with an asterisk) is applied because the permissible wattage of the resistor must be twice as large as the required wattage. Ta = 25C Forward Current: Ir (mA) LED Forward Voltage: Vr (V) Pushbutton When exchanging the Pushbutton (except the ones for the mechanical indicator models) with a new one, pull out the Pushbutton from the Switch, holding the Pushbutton in the longitudinal direction. Do not remove the Pushbutton of the mechanical indicator model. Engraving of Pushbutton Depth of engraving: 0.3 mm max. for illuminating pushbutton Since the Pushbutton is made of polycarbonate, use an alcoholbased solvent when cleaning the Unit. Pressing of Pushbutton Apply firm pressure to the Pushbutton when operating it. In doing so, however, do not apply a pressure greater than 11.8 N. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A25-E1-06 219 Lighted Pushbutton Switches A3P Large Rectangular-bodied Lighted Pushbutton Switches Excellent operating sensitivity. Good illumination with even surface brightness. Three-color models (green, orange, red; chameleon lighting) included in lineup. UL and CSA approved. RC Ordering Information Model Number Legend The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Pushbutton, Lamp, and Switch. (5) (6) 24E R (1) (2) (3) (4) Single screen Upper Lower A 3 P J - 90 B 1 1 - 24E RW (1) Shape of Pushbutton (2) Switch Specifications Standard Load Symbol Shape Symbol Operation J Rectangular A Square A T Round B Alternate C Momentary D Alternate Momentary operation: Self-resetting Alternate operation: Self-holding Momentary SPDT DPDT Microload (3) Screen Pattern Symbol 1 2 2-split screen Momentary F Alternate G Momentary H Alternate Black 2 Light gray Note: A3PT models are available in light gray only. Note: 1. The chameleon screen pattern is not available with A3PT models. 2. The chameleon screen pattern is only available with 12 or 24-VDC models. SPDT DPDT 3 Standard Load With chameleon models, the whole screen lights red, green, or orange. When not lit, the display is white. 125 VAC, 0.1 A 30 VDC, 0.1 A Minimum applicable load 5 VDC, 1 mA Horizontal 3-split screen models Microload Vertical 3-split screen models "Colored-illumination" models operate in the way shown below: 3PDT models are also available. Select from among the individual products shown on page 233. The above diagrams show the Switches with the " " mark facing down. Unlit White R (Red) Upper W (White) Lower (5) Lighting Method LED-lighted Models (A3PJ and A3PA Models Only) Symbol (6) Color of Pushbutton For LED Symbol Color Rated voltage R Red 05E 5 VDC O Orange 12E 12 VDC G Green 24E 24 VDC W White K Chameleon LED Lamp-lighted Models The chameleon screen (A3PT Only) pattern is not available Symbol Rated voltage with A3PT models. The available rectangular models are shown below. Select from among the individual products shown on page 231. 4-split screen Vertical 2-split Colored-illumination models up to the models screen models 4-split screen models are available as individual Units. Refer to page 229. 250 VAC, 3 A 30 VDC, 3 A 220 Color 1 Chameleon (see note 1, 2, 3) Operation E Symbol Screen pattern Single screen G Symbol (4) Case Color Illumination-only models Horizontal 2-split screen Lit Color The built-in LED is colored. 05C 5 VDC 12C 12 VDC 24C 24 VDC A3PJ and A3PA can also be ordered separately. Refer to page 231 for details. The chameleon screen pattern is only available with 12 or 24-VDC models. For Incandescent Lamp Symbol No symbol Incandescent Lamplighted Models Symbol Rated voltage 06 6 VAC/VDC 14 14 VAC/VDC 28 28 VAC/VDC Color Red, orange, white, blue, green Includes colored plate. Refer to page 232 for details. A3P A3P Number of Incandescent Lamps Number of LED Lamps Screen pattern Single screen A3PJ A3PA Models with built-in LED Horizontal 2-split screen A3PT Screen pattern 1 2 4 (L (Low-po wer incandes cent lamp) 2 2 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- Horizontal 2-split screen --- Vertical 2-split screen Horizontal 3-split screen --- --- Horizontal 3-split screen Vertical 3-split screen --- --- Vertical 3-split screen 4-split screen --- --- 4-split screen Note: A3PT 2 2 4 ((See note.)) A3PA Single screen --- Vertical 2-split screen A3PJ 2 These split screen models are available only as individual Units. They cannot be ordered as sets. List of Models Model A3PJ (Rectangular) Appearance 6.7 52 max. 25 A3PA (Square) 52 max. 6.7 25 32 A3PT (Round) 52 max. 6.4 32 dia. 25 221 A3P A3P Construction Lighting method LED-lighted models (LED is built-in.) LED lamp-lighted models (LED lamp is not built-in.) Models A3PJ Screen patterns Single screen Single screen A3PA Single screen A3PJ Vertical 3-split screen Single screen Horizontal 2-split screen Horizontal 2-split screen Horizontal 2-split screen Horizontal 3-split screen Horizontal 2-split screen Chameleon (3-color) Chameleon (3-color) Vertical 2-split screen 4-split screen LED-lighted models A3PA Incandescent lamp-lighted models (Incandescent lamp is not built-in.) A3PT A3PJ Single screen A3PA Single screen Vertical 3-split screen Horizontal 2-split screen Horizontal 3-split Horizontal 2-split screen screen Vertical 2-split screen LED lamp-lighted models A3PT Single screen 4-split screen Incandescent lamp-lighted models Chameleon models (full screen illumination in one of three colors) LED-lighted models Cap (transparent) Cap (transparent) Cap (transparent) Legend plate (transparent) Legend plate (transparent) Legend plate (transparent) (See note.) Colored plate Colored plate Colored plate LED Unit LED Unit 3-color emitter Lamp holder Built-in LED Pushbutton (Split-screen models contain a light baffle.) * * Pushbutton colors LED-lighted models and LED lamp-lighted models White, Red, Green, Orange Incandescent lamp-lighted model White, Red, Green, Blue, Orange Note: Incandescent lamp-lighted A3PT models do not contain a legend plate. Lamp Switch Specifications Case Color Standard load 250 VAC, 3 A 30 VDC, 4A Microload 125 VAC, 0.1 A 30 VDC, 0.1 A Select either black or light gray to suit your panel design. (The round A3PT models are available in light gray only.) Minimum applicable load: 5 VDC, 1 mA Note: The above diagram for LED lamp-lighted models and incandescent lamp-lighted models shows the A3PJ model. 222 Single screen Switch A3P A3P A3P Lighting Method Diagram The following diagram shows the Switches with the mark facing down. Ordering Information Single screen models Horizontal 2-split screen models Single screen models Horizontal 2-split screen models Vertical 2-split screen models Vertical 3-split screen models Horizontal 3-split screen models 4-split screen As a set: See page 224. Individually: See page 230. LED-lighted models LED models LED lamp-lighted models A3PJ (rectangular) Individually: See page 230. (Not available as a set.) Single screen Chameleon models Single screen models Incandescent lamplighted models As a set: See page 224. Individually: See page 230. (Full screen illumination in one of three colors) Horizontal 2-split screen models Vertical 3-split screen models* Horizontal 3-split screen models* Single screen models Horizontal 2-split screen models Single screen models Horizontal 2-split screen models LED-lighted models Vertical 2-split screen models* 4-split screen models* As a set: See page 224. Individually: See page 230. *Models indicated with an asterisk are only available individually. As a set: See page 224. Individually: See page 230. LED models LED lamp-lighted models Individually: See page 230. (Not available as a set.) A3PA (square) Single screen models As a set: See page 224. Individually: See page 230. Chameleon models Single screen models Incandescent lamplighted models Single screen models LED models LED lamp-lighted models A3PT (round) Single screen models Incandescent lamplighted models Horizontal 2-split screen models As a set: See page 224. Individually: See page 230. As a set: See page 224. Individually: See page 230. As a set: See page 224. Individually: See page 230. 223 A3P A3P Ordering as a Set The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following tables. One set comprises the Pushbutton, Lamp, and Switch. A3PJ (Rectangular) Single Screen Models (1) Standard Loads Standard load (250 VAC, 3 A; 30 VDC, 4 A) Contact type Operation Output SPDT S Chameleon C Incandescent l lamp DPDT LED Chameleon C Incandescent l lamp Alternate operation (Self-holding) Black Light gray 5 VDC A3PJ-90A11-05E(1) A3PJ-90A12-05E(1) A3PJ-90B11-05E(1) A3PJ-90B12-05E(1) 12 VDC A3PJ-90A11-12E(1) A3PJ-90A12-12E(1) A3PJ-90B11-12E(1) A3PJ-90B12-12E(1) 24 VDC A3PJ-90A11-24E(1) A3PJ-90A12-24E(1) A3PJ-90B11-24E(1) A3PJ-90B12-24E(1) R O G W 12 VDC A3PJ-90AG1-12EK --- A3PJ-90BG1-12EK A3PJ-90BG2-12EK (See note 1.)) (S 24 VDC A3PJ-90AG1-24EK A3PJ-90AG2-24EK A3PJ-90BG1-24EK A3PJ-90BG2-24EK 6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90A11-06 A3PJ-90A12-06 A3PJ-90B11-06 A3PJ-90B12-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90A11-14 A3PJ-90A12-14 A3PJ-90B11-14 A3PJ-90B12-14 28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90A11-28 A3PJ-90A12-28 A3PJ-90B11-28 A3PJ-90B12-28 5 VDC A3PJ-90C11-05E(1) A3PJ-90C12-05E(1) A3PJ-90D11-05E(1) A3PJ-90D12-05E(1) 12 VDC A3PJ-90C11-12E(1) A3PJ-90C12-12E(1) A3PJ-90D11-12E(1) A3PJ-90D12-12E(1) 24 VDC A3PJ-90C11-24E(1) A3PJ-90C12-24E(1) A3PJ-90D11-24E(1) A3PJ-90D12-24E(1) R O G W 12 VDC A3PJ-90CG1-12EK A3PJ-90CG2-12EK A3PJ-90DG1-12EK --- (See note 1.)) (S 24 VDC A3PJ-90CG1-24EK A3PJ-90CG2-24EK A3PJ-90DG1-24EK A3PJ-90DG2-24EK 6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90C11-06 A3PJ-90C12-06 A3PJ-90D11-06 A3PJ-90D12-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90C11-14 A3PJ-90C12-14 A3PJ-90D11-14 A3PJ-90D12-14 28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90C11-28 A3PJ-90C12-28 A3PJ-90D11-28 A3PJ-90D12-28 Lighting LED Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Case color C l Rated voltage Black Pushbutton color symbol Light gray (See note 2.)) (S (See note 2.)) (S Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in (1). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White. Example: Red A3PJ-90A11-24E R Microloads Microload (125 VAC, 0.1 A; 30 VDC, 0.1 A) Contact type Output SPDT S Lighting LED Chameleon C Incandescent l lamp DPDT LED Chameleon C Incandescent l lamp Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Operation Case color Rated voltage Black Pushbutton color symbol Light gray 5 VDC A3PJ-90E11-05E(1) A3PJ-90E12-05E(1) 12 VDC A3PJ-90E11-12E(1) A3PJ-90E12-12E(1) 24 VDC A3PJ-90E11-24E(1) A3PJ-90E12-24E(1) R O G W 12 VDC A3PJ-90EG1-12EK --- (See note 1.)) (S 24 VDC A3PJ-90EG1-24EK A3PJ-90EG2-24EK 6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90E11-06 A3PJ-90E12-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90E11-14 A3PJ-90E12-14 28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90E11-28 A3PJ-90E12-28 5 VDC A3PJ-90G11-05E(1) A3PJ-90G12-05E(1) 12 VDC A3PJ-90G11-12E(1) A3PJ-90G12-12E(1) 24 VDC A3PJ-90G11-24E(1) A3PJ-90G12-24E(1) R O G W 12 VDC A3PJ-90GG1-12EK --- (See note 1.)) (S 24 VDC A3PJ-90GG1-24EK --- 6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90G11-06 A3PJ-90G12-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90G11-14 A3PJ-90G12-14 28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90G11-28 A3PJ-90G12-28 (See note 2.)) (S (See note 2.)) (S Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in (1). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White. Example: Red Note: A3PJ-90E11-24E R 1. You can change the screen colors of chameleon models between red, green, and orange, by changing the terminal wiring. Refer to page 240 for details. 2. Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and transparent). Use the appropriate combination. 224 A3P A3P A3PJ (Rectangular) Horizontal 2-split Screen Models (1) (2) Standard Loads Standard load (250 VAC, 3 A; 30 VDC, 4 A) Contact type Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Operation Output SPDT DPDT Lighting C l Case color Rated voltage Alternate operation (Self-holding) Black Light gray Black Light gray Pushb utton color symbol LED 24 VDC A3PJ-90A21-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90A22-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90B21-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90B22-24E(1)(2) R O G W Incandescent l lamp 6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90A21-06 A3PJ-90A22-06 A3PJ-90B21-06 A3PJ-90B22-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90A21-14 A3PJ-90A22-14 A3PJ-90B21-14 A3PJ-90B22-14 (See (S t ) note) 28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90A21-28 A3PJ-90A22-28 A3PJ-90B21-28 A3PJ-90B22-28 LED 24 VDC A3PJ-90C21-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90C22-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90D21-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90D22-24E(1)(2) R O G W Incandescent l lamp 6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90C21-06 A3PJ-90C22-06 A3PJ-90D21-06 A3PJ-90D22-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90C21-14 A3PJ-90C22-14 A3PJ-90D21-14 A3PJ-90D22-14 (See (S t ) note) 28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90C21-28 A3PJ-90C22-28 A3PJ-90D21-28 A3PJ-90D22-28 Enter the desired color symbols for the Pushbutton in (1) and (2). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White. Example: Red Upper White Lower A3PJ-90A21-24E R W Red White Microloads Microload (125 VAC, 0.1 A; 30 VDC, 0.1 A) Contact type Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Operation Output SPDT DPDT Lighting Case color C l Rated voltage Black Pushb utton color symbol Light gray LED 24 VDC A3PJ-90E21-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90E22-24E(1)(2) R O G W Incandescent l lamp 6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90E21-06 A3PJ-90E22-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90E21-14 A3PJ-90E22-14 (S (See note.) t ) 28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90E21-28 A3PJ-90E22-28 LED 24 VDC A3PJ-90G21-24E(1)(2) A3PJ-90G22-24E(1)(2) R O G W Incandescent l lamp 6 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90G21-06 A3PJ-90G22-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90G21-14 A3PJ-90G22-14 (S (See note.) t ) 28 VDC/VAC A3PJ-90G21-28 A3PJ-90G22-28 Enter the desired color symbols for the Pushbutton in (1) and (2). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White. Example: Note: Red Upper White Lower A3PJ-90E21-24E R W Red White Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and transparent). Use the appropriate combination. 225 A3P A3P A3PA (Square) Single Screen Models (1) Standard Loads Standard load (250 VAC, 3 A; 30 VDC, 4 A) Contact type Operation Output SPDT S Lighting LED Chameleon C Incandescent l lamp DPDT LED Chameleon C Incandescent l lamp Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Case color C l Rated voltage Alternate operation (Self-holding) Pushbutton color symbol Black Light gray Black Light gray 5 VDC A3PA-90A11-05E(1) A3PA-90A12-05E(1) A3PA-90B11-05E(1) A3PA-90B12-05E(1) 12 VDC A3PA-90A11-12E(1) A3PA-90A12-12E(1) A3PA-90B11-12E(1) A3PA-90B12-12E(1) 24 VDC A3PA-90A11-24E(1) A3PA-90A12-24E(1) A3PA-90B11-24E(1) A3PA-90B12-24E(1) R O G W 12 VDC A3PA-90AG1-12EK A3PA-90AG2-12EK A3PA-90BG1-12EK A3PA-90BG2-12EK (See note 1.)) (S 24 VDC A3PA-90AG1-24EK A3PA-90AG2-24EK A3PA-90BG1-24EK A3PA-90BG2-24EK 6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90A11-06 A3PA-90A12-06 A3PA-90B11-06 A3PA-90B12-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90A11-14 A3PA-90A12-14 A3PA-90B11-14 A3PA-90B12-14 28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90A11-28 A3PA-90A12-28 A3PA-90B11-28 A3PA-90B12-28 5 VDC A3PA-90C11-05E(1) A3PA-90C12-05E(1) A3PA-90D11-05E(1) A3PA-90D12-05E(1) 12 VDC A3PA-90C11-12E(1) A3PA-90C12-12E(1) A3PA-90D11-12E(1) A3PA-90D12-12E(1) 24 VDC A3PA-90C11-24E(1) A3PA-90C12-24E(1) A3PA-90D11-24E(1) A3PA-90D12-24E(1) R O G W 12 VDC A3PA-90CG1-12EK A3PA-90CG2-12EK A3PA-90DG1-12EK A3PA-90DG2-12EK (See note 1.)) (S 24 VDC A3PA-90CG1-24EK A3PA-90CG2-24EK A3PA-90DG1-24EK A3PA-90DG2-24EK 6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90C11-06 A3PA-90C12-06 A3PA-90D11-06 A3PA-90D12-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90C11-14 A3PA-90C12-14 A3PA-90D11-14 A3PA-90D12-14 28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90C11-28 A3PA-90C12-28 A3PA-90D11-28 A3PA-90D12-28 (See note 2.)) (S (See note 2.)) (S Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in (*). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White. Example: Red A3PA-90A11-24E R Microloads Microload (125 VAC, 0.1 A; 30 VDC, 0.1 A) Contact type Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Operation Output SPDT S Lighting LED Chameleon C Incandescent l lamp DPDT LED Chameleon C Incandescent l lamp Case color C l Rated voltage Black Pushbutton color symbol Light gray 5 VDC A3PA-90E11-05E(1) A3PA-90E12-05E(1) 12 VDC A3PA-90E11-12E(1) A3PA-90E12-12E(1) 24 VDC A3PA-90E11-24E(1) A3PA-90E12-24E(1) R O G W 12 VDC A3PA-90EG1-12EK --- (See note 1.)) (S 24 VDC A3PA-90EG1-24EK A3PA-90EG2-24EK 6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90E11-06 A3PA-90E12-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90E11-14 A3PA-90E12-14 28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90E11-28 A3PA-90E12-28 5 VDC A3PA-90G11-05E(1) A3PA-90G12-05E(1) 12 VDC A3PA-90G11-12E(1) A3PA-90G12-12E(1) 24 VDC A3PA-90G11-24E(1) A3PA-90G12-24E(1) R O G W 12 VDC A3PA-90GG1-12EK --- (See note 1.)) (S 24 VDC A3PA-90GG1-24EK --- 6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90G11-06 A3PA-90G12-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90G11-14 A3PA-90G12-14 28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90G11-28 A3PA-90G12-28 (See note 2.)) (S (See note 2.)) (S Enter the desired color symbol for the Pushbutton in (1). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White. Example: Red A3PA-90E11-24E R Note: 1. You can change the screen colors of chameleon models between red, green, and orange, by changing the terminal wiring. Refer to page 240 for details. 2. Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and transparent). Use the appropriate combination. 226 A3P A3P (1) A3PA (Square) Horizontal 2-split Screen Models (2) Standard Loads Standard load (250 VAC, 3 A; 30 VDC, 4 A) Contact type Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Operation Output SPDT DPDT Lighting Case color C l Rated voltage Alternate operation (Self-holding) Black Light gray Black Light gray Pushbutton color symbol LED 24 VDC A3PA-90A21-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90A22-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90B21-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90B22-24E(1)(2) R O G W Incandescent l lamp 6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90A21-06 A3PA-90A22-06 A3PA-90B21-06 A3PA-90B22-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90A21-14 A3PA-90A22-14 A3PA-90B21-14 A3PA-90B22-14 (S (See note.) t ) 28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90A21-28 A3PA-90A22-28 A3PA-90B21-28 A3PA-90B22-28 LED 24 VDC A3PA-90C21-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90C22-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90D21-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90D22-24E(1)(2) R O G W Incandescent l lamp 6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90C21-06 A3PA-90C22-06 A3PA-90D21-06 A3PA-90D22-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90C21-14 A3PA-90C22-14 A3PA-90D21-14 A3PA-90D22-14 (S (See note.) t ) 28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90C21-28 A3PA-90C22-28 A3PA-90D21-28 A3PA-90D22-28 Enter the desired color symbols for the Pushbutton in (1) and (2). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White. Example: Red Upper White Lower A3PA-90A21-24E R W Red White Microloads Microload (125 VAC, 0.1 A; 30 VDC, 0.1 A) Contact type Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Operation Output SPDT DPDT Lighting Case color C l Rated voltage Black Pushbutton color symbol Light gray LED 24 VDC A3PA-90E21-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90E22-24E(1)(2) R O G W Incandescent l lamp 6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90E21-06 A3PA-90E22-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90E21-14 A3PA-90E22-14 (S (See note.) t ) 28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90E21-28 A3PA-90E22-28 LED 24 VDC A3PA-90G21-24E(1)(2) A3PA-90G22-24E(1)(2) R O G W Incandescent l lamp 6 VDC/VAC A3PA-90G21-06 A3PA-90G22-06 14 VDC/VAC A3PA-90G21-14 A3PA-90G22-14 (S (See note.) t ) 28 VDC/VAC A3PA-90G21-28 A3PA-90G22-28 Enter the desired color symbols for the Pushbutton in (1) and (2). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White. Example: Note: Red Upper White Lower A3PA-90E21-24E R W Red White Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and transparent). Use the appropriate combination. 227 A3P A3P A3PT (Round) Single Screen Models (1) Standard Loads Standard load (250 VAC, 3 A; 30 VDC, 4 A) Contact type C yp Operation Output SPDT Lighting DPDT Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Alternate operation (Self-holding) Light gray Light gray Case color Rated voltage Pushbutton color symbol LED 24 VDC A3PT-90A12-24C(1) A3PT-90B12-24C(1) R O G W Incandescent lamp p 6 VDC/VAC A3PT-90A12-06 A3PT-90B12-06 (See note.)) (S 14 VDC/VAC A3PT-90A12-14 A3PT-90B12-14 28 VDC/VAC A3PT-90A12-28 A3PT-90B12-28 LED 24 VDC A3PT-90C12-24C(1) A3PT-90D12-24C(1) R O G W Incandescent lamp p 6 VDC/VAC A3PT-90C12-06 A3PT-90D12-06 (See note.)) (S 14 VDC/VAC A3PT-90C12-14 A3PT-90D12-14 28 VDC/VAC A3PT-90C12-28 A3PT-90D12-28 Enter the desired color symbols for the Pushbutton in (1) and (2). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White. Example: A3PT-90A12-24C R Red Microloads Contact type Operation Microload (125 VAC, 0.1 A; 30 VDC, 0.1 A) Pushbutton color symbol Momentary operation (Self-resetting) Light gray Case color Rated voltage Output Lighting SPDT LED 24 VDC A3PT-90E12-24C(1) R O G W Incandescent lamp 28 VDC/VAC A3PT-90E12-28 (See note.) LED 24 VDC A3PT-90G12-24C(1) R O G W Incandescent lamp 28 VDC/VAC A3PT-90G12-28 (See note.) DPDT Enter the desired color symbols for the Pushbutton in (1). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White. Example: A3PT-90E12-24C R Red Note: 228 Incandescent lamps are supplied with a colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange). Use the appropriate combination. Models A3PT (round models), however, are not supplied with legend plates. A3P A3P Illumination-only and Colored-illumination LED Models * "Illumination only" describes LED models for which the screen color is the same whether the LED is lit or not. The screen simply becomes brighter when the LED lights. Example: Red LED Not lit Cap (transparent) Red Legend plate (transparent) Pushbutton Lit Colored plate (red) Red Lamp holder LED lamp (red) * Lamp "Colored illumination" describes LED models for which the screen color is white when the LED is not lit and changes to the color of the LED lamp when the LED is lit. Example: Red LED Not lit Cap (transparent) White Legend plate (transparent) Pushbutton Lit Colored plate (white) Red Lamp holder LED lamp (red) Lamp Ordering: With colored-illumination models, order the Pushbutton, Lamp, and Switch as shown in the following table. Pushbutton Select the LED lamp-lighted model required from the selection on page 231. Each assembly includes the number of white colored plates required to enable colored illumination for the corresponding screen-split configuration. For example, 4-split screen models include 4 white colored plates. Lamp Select the LED lamps to suit your desired coloration from the selection on page 232. Switch Select from the Switches on page 233. Number of necessary LED lamps (standard) A3PJ (rectangular): 4 A3PA (square): 2 A3PT (round): 2 229 A3P A3P Ordering Individually Pushbuttons, Lamps, and Switches can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual Units. Also, store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs. LED-lighted/Chameleon Models (LED is built into the Pushbutton.) LED Lamp-lighted Models (LED lamp and Pushbutton are separate.) Pushbutton Round (A3PT) models not available. Incandescent Lamp-lighted Models (Incandescent lamp and Pushbutton are separate.) Pushbutton Pushbutton A3Pj-501j (for Pushbutton Switch) A3Pj-502j (for Pushbutton Switch) A3Pj-5jjj-jjE (for Pushbutton Switch) Lamp (Incandescent Lamp) (See note 3.) Lamp (LED Lamp) (See note 2.) Standard lamp: SLL-jj Low-power lamp: SLL-jjH SLL-jjEj Switch (See note 1.) Switch (See note 1.) Round (A3PT) models not available. A3Pj-7jjj-j (for Pushbutton Switch) A3Pj-7jjj-j (for Pushbutton Switch) A3Pj-7jjj-j (for Pushbutton Switch) Note: Switch (See note 1.) 1. The Switch is compatible with LED-lighted models, LED lamp-lighted models, and incandescent lamp-lighted models. 3. Number of necessary incandescent lamps. 2. Number of necessary LED lamps. A3PJ Screen pattern Single screen 4 A3PA A3PT A3PJ Screen pattern A3PA A3PT 2 2 Single screen 2 1 2 Horizontal 2-split screen 2 2 Horizontal 2-split screen 2 --- --- Vertical 2-split screen --- --- Vertical 3-split screen Horizontal 3-split screen --- --- Vertical 3-split screen Horizontal 3-split screen 4 (l (low-power incandescent lamp) 2 Vertical 2-split screen --- --- 4-split screen --- --- 4-split screen --- --- 230 A3P A3P Pushbutton LED-lighted Models (LED is built-in.) Model Split-screen color (color symbol) White (W) Red (R) Green (G) Orange (O) Selection precautions A3PJ-5701-jjE A3PJ-5702-jjE A3PJ-5703-jjE A3PJ-5706-jjE White A3PJ-5711-jjE A3PJ-5712-jjE A3PJ-5713-jjE A3PJ-5716-jjE Enter the voltage to be used in the jj at the d off th d l end the model number. Red A3PJ-5721-jjE A3PJ-5722-jjE A3PJ-5723-jjE A3PJ-5726-jjE Green A3PJ-5731-jjE A3PJ-5732-jjE A3PJ-5733-jjE A3PJ-5736-jjE Orange A3PJ-5741-jjE A3PJ-5742-jjE A3PJ-5743-jjE A3PJ-5746-jjE A3PA-5701-jjE A3PA-5702-jjE A3PA-5703-jjE A3PA-5706-jjE White A3PA-5711-jjE A3PA-5712-jjE A3PA-5713-jjE A3PA-5716-jjE Red A3PA-5721-jjE A3PA-5722-jjE A3PA-5723-jjE A3PA-5726-jjE Green A3PA-5731-jjE A3PA-5732-jjE A3PA-5733-jjE A3PA-5736-jjE Orange A3PA-5741-jjE A3PA-5742-jjE A3PA-5743-jjE A3PA-5746-jjE Single screen R t l Rectangular models Horizontal 2 split 2-split screen Single screen Horizontal 2-split screen Square models Note: For the color of the shaded part, select the model according to the colors given at the top of the table. 1. A cap, legend plate (transparent), colored plate, white plunger case, and LED (with a current-limiting resistor) are built into the standard lighting unit. mark on the Switch facing down. 2. Split-screen coloring configurations are given with the 3. The LED is built-in and cannot be replaced individually. LED Lamp-lighted Models (LED is not built-in.) Model Rectangular models Screen pattern Screen Square models Model Round models Screen Model Screen Single screen A3PJ-5021 A3PA-5021 Horizontal 2-split screen A3PJ-5022 A3PA-5022 Vertical 2-split screen A3PJ-5023 --- --- Horizontal 3-split screen A3PJ-5024 --- --- Vertical 3-split screen A3PJ-5025 --- --- 4-split screen A3PJ-5026 --- --- Note: Examples of voltages used: 5V= 05E 12 V = 1 2 E 24 V = 2 4 E Model A3PT-5021 --- 1. Colored plates (white, red, green, and orange), a legend plate (transparent), and a light baffle (split-screen models only) are included. Use the appropriate combination for the LED coloring required. 2. The number of white colored plates required to enable colored illumination for the corresponding screen-split configuration is included. (For example, 4-split screen models include 4 white colored plates). The number of colored plates included for each model are shown in the following table. Screen pattern White Red Green Orange Single screen 1 1 1 1 Horizontal 2-split screens Vertical 2-split screens 2 1 1 1 Horizontal 3-split screens Vertical 3-split screens 3 2 2 2 4-split screen 4 1 1 1 231 A3P A3P Incandescent Lamp-lighted Models (Incandescent lamp is not built-in.) Square models Rectangular models Model Screen pattern Screen Model Screen Round models Model Screen Single screen A3PJ-5011 A3PA-5011 Horizontal 2-split screen A3PJ-5012 A3PA-5012 Vertical 2-split screen A3PJ-5013 --- --- Horizontal 3-split screen A3PJ-5014 --- --- Vertical 3-split screen A3PJ-5015 --- --- 4-split screen A3PJ-5016 --- --- Note: Model A3PT-5011 --- 1. Colored plates (white, red, green, orange, and blue), a legend plate (transparent), and a light baffle (split-screen models only) are supplied. 2. A3PT (round) models do not contain a legend plate. 3. The number of colored plates included is shown in the following table. White Screen pattern Red Green Orange Blue Single screen 1 1 1 1 1 Horizontal and vertical 2-split screens 1 1 1 1 1 Horizontal and vertical 3-split screens 2 2 2 2 2 4-split screen 2 2 2 2 2 Chameleon Models (with Built-in LED) Shape Rectangular Square Note: Rated voltage Chameleon pushbutton switch 12 VDC A3PJ-5800-12E 24 VDC A3PJ-5800-24E 12 VDC A3PA-5800-12E 24 VDC A3PA-5800-24E 1. With chameleon models the whole screen lights red, green, or orange (i.e., red and green simultaneously). 2. A cap, legend plate (transparent), white colored plate, and LED (with a current-limiting resistor) are built into the Pushbutton. Lamp (For details on mounting, refer to page 246.) LED Lamp Voltage Color 5 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC Model (DC only) Model (DC only) Model (DC only) Applicable cap pp p ((color)) ( l d plate) l t ) (colored Red SLL-05ER SLL-12ER SLL-24ER Red Yellow SLL-05EY SLL-12EY SLL-24EY Orange Green SLL-05EG SLL-12EG SLL-24EG Green White SLL-05EW SLL-12EW SLL-24EW White 232 Selection ti precautions In the standard setup, 4 LED lamps are used with A3PJ models and 2 LED lamps are used with A3PA and d A3PT models. A3P A3P Incandescent Lamp Lamp type Standard lamp p Low-voltage g lamp p Selection p precautions Voltage 5 VAC/VDC SLL-06 SLL-06H 12 VAC/VDC SLL-14 SLL-14H 24 VAC/VDC SLL-28 In the standard setup for A3PJ models, 2 lamps are used with single screen models, and 4 lamps are used with split-screen models. If 3 or 4 lamps p p are lit continuously, ti l use low-power l lamps. l In the standard setup for A3PA models, 1 lamp is used with single g screen models,, and 2 lamps p are used d with ith split-screen lit models. d l SLL-28H In the standard setup for A3PT models, 2 lamps are used. Switch (common to both incandescent lamp-lighted models and LED models) Contact type Switch Standard load Silver alloy contact Number of outputs 1 2 3 Microload Gold alloy contact 1 2 3 Operation Rectangular models Square models Round models Momentary operation A3PJ-7010-1 A3PA-7010-1 A3PT-7010-2 Alternate operation A3PJ-7020-1 A3PA-7020-1 A3PT-7020-2 Momentary operation A3PJ-7030-1 A3PA-7030-1 A3PT-7030-2 Alternate operation A3PJ-7040-1 A3PA-7040-1 A3PT-7040-2 Momentary operation A3PJ-7150-1 --- --- Alternate operation A3PJ-7160-1 --- --- Momentary operation A3PJ-7050-1 A3PA-7050-1 A3PT-7050-2 Alternate operation A3PJ-7060-1 A3PA-7060-1 A3PT-7060-2 Momentary operation A3PJ-7070-1 A3PA-7070-1 A3PT-7070-2 Alternate operation A3PJ-7080-1 A3PA-7080-1 A3PT-7080-2 Momentary operation A3PJ-7170-1 --- --- Alternate operation A3PJ-7180-1 --- --- Selection precautions The end digit denotes the color of the flange: -1 denotes a black g , and -2 flange, denotes d t a lilight ht gray flange. Round switches are available only in light gray, and not in black. black Use the Switch in combination with the same shape Lamp (rectangular, square or round) square, round). Example: For g p rectangular Lamp A3PJ-5011, A3PJ 5011 select l t Switch A3PJ-7jj0-j. A3PJ 7jj0 j. On the Switch itself, however, only 3 digits are shown, shown as follows: A3PJ-7jj. Momentary operation is self-resetting, and alternate operation is self-holding (i.e., push-on, push-off). 233 A3P A3P Accessories Name Socket Barrier Switch guard Appearance Classification Rectangular Square Wire-wrap terminal A3PJ-4101 A3PA-4101 PCB terminal A3PJ-4102 A3PA-4102 Solder terminal A3PJ-4103 A3PA-4103 Short edge barrier (Horizontal mounting) (1 pair) Black A3PJ-4001 A3PA-4001 Light gray A3PJ-4002 A3PA-4002 Long edge barrier (Vertical mounting) (1 pair) Black A3PJ-4004 --- Light gray A3PJ-4005 Short intermediate barrier (Horizontal mounting) Black A3PJ-4007 A3PA-4007 Light gray A3PJ-4008 A3PA-4008 Long intermediate barrier (Vertical mounting) Black A3PJ-4010 --- Light gray A3PJ-4011 Application precautions Multiple sockets cannot be mounted. The purpose of the barrier is to prevent malfunctioning and to improve design image of the mounting panel. Intermediate barrier x 1. Edge barriers x 1 pair (2 Units). Mount short barriers horizontally. For horizontal mounting (with OMRON logo facing down) A3PJN-5050 Mount long barriers vertically. A3PAN-5050 For details on mounting, refer to page 246. Can be used by exchanging with the cap. Cannot be used with seal cover. Can be used with barrier. Seal cover For vertical mounting (with OMRON logo facing to the right) A3PJN-5055 A3PAN-5055 Use horizontal mounting guard for consecutive horizontal mounting, and use vertical mounting guard for consecutive vertical mounting. --- A3PJ-5060 A3PA-5060 Cannot be used with barrier and/or switch guard. For details on mounting, refer to page 246. Cap is manufactured from vinyl chloride. Character plate l t (character film) Long mounting plate 234 1 sheet ((for 20 Switches) Printed A3PJ-5205 A3PA-5205 Non-printed (transparent film) A3PJ-5207 A3PA-5207 1 sheet ((for S it h) 1 Switch) Printed A3PJ-5206 A3PA-5206 Non-printed (transparent film) A3PJ-5208 A3PA-5208 A3PJ-3002 --- --- Words p printed are ON,, OFF,, START STOP START, STOP, RESET RESET, OK OK, OUT, OUT POWER, COOL, and MOTOR. Other characters can be printed by request request. Use when vertically mounting individual (with barrier) or multiple Switches (in standard mounting style and with barrier). Since a short mounting plate is attached to the Switch, replace it with the long one. A3P A3P Parts Name Colored plate p f for incandescent lamp Appearance Screen pattern and color Single g screen A3PA-5101 Red A3PJ-5102 A3PA-5102 Green A3PJ-5103 A3PA-5103 Blue A3PJ-5104 A3PA-5104 Yellow A3PJ-5105 A3PA-5105 Orange A3PJ-5106 A3PA-5106 White A3PJ-5121 A3PA-5121 Red A3PJ-5122 A3PA-5122 Green A3PJ-5123 A3PA-5123 Blue A3PJ-5124 A3PA-5124 Yellow A3PJ-5125 A3PA-5125 Orange A3PJ-5126 A3PA-5126 White A3PJ-5131 --- Red A3PJ-5132 --- Green A3PJ-5133 --- Blue A3PJ-5134 --- Yellow A3PJ-5135 --- Orange A3PJ-5136 --- White A3PJ-5161 --- Red A3PJ-5162 --- Green A3PJ-5163 --- Blue A3PJ-5164 --- Yellow A3PJ-5165 --- Orange A3PJ-5166 --- White A3PJ-5301 A3PA-5301 Red A3PJ-5302 A3PA-5302 Green A3PJ-5303 A3PA-5303 Yellow A3PJ-5305 A3PA-5305 Orange A3PJ-5306 A3PA-5306 White A3PJ-5321 A3PA-5321 Red A3PJ-5322 A3PA-5322 Green A3PJ-5323 A3PA-5323 Yellow A3PJ-5325 A3PA-5325 Orange A3PJ-5326 A3PA-5326 White A3PJ-5331 --- Red A3PJ-5332 --- Green A3PJ-5333 --- Yellow A3PJ-5335 --- Orange A3PJ-5336 --- White A3PJ-5361 --- Red A3PJ-5362 --- Green A3PJ-5363 --- Yellow A3PJ-5365 --- Orange A3PJ-5366 --- Horizontal 2-split screen A3PJ-4302 A3PA-4302 Vertical 2-split screen A3PJ-4303 --- Horizontal 3 lit screen 3-split Long axis A3PJ-4304 --- Short axis A3PJ-4305 --- Vertical 3 lit screen 3-split Long axis A3PJ-4306 --- Short axis A3PJ-4307 --- 4-split p screen Long axis A3PJ-4304 --- Short axis A3PJ-4308 Vertical 2 lit screen 2-split 4-split p screen Single g screen Horizontal 2 lit screen 2-split Vertical 2 lit screen 2-split 4-split p screen Light g baffle Square A3PJ-5101 Horizontal 2 lit screen 2-split Colored plate p f LED for Rectangular White Application precautions Keep p mounted at all times. If th colored the l d plate l t b becomes discolored contact OMRON. OMRON discolored, For details on mounting, mounting refer to page 246. Keep p mounted at all times. If th colored l d plate l t iis llostt or the damaged contact OMRON. damaged, OMRON Use in accordance with coloring of the built-in LED. For details on mounting, refer to p page g 246. Keep p mounted at all times. If th lilight the ht b baffle ffl iis llost, t contact t t OMRON OMRON. Used in LED lamp-lighted models. Cannot be used in LED-lighted g models. 235 A3P A3P Name Legend plate g p Cap p Appearance Screen pattern and color Rectangular Square Application precautions Transparent legend plate A3PJ-5202 A3PA-5202 Milk-white legend plate A3PJ-5201 A3PA-5201 A transparent legend plate is p g p t d on th hb tt mounted the P Pushbutton. Transparent cap A3PJ-5600 A3PA-5600 --- Crimp-processed transparent cap A3PJ-5600-A A3PA-5600-A The surface is crimp-processed, so there is no reflection. Smokey-blue transparent cap A3PJ-5600-SB A3PA-5600-SB You can easily tell if the button is lit, even in bright locations. Tools Name Extractor 236 Appearance Classification --- Model A3PJ-5080 Application precautions Use to extract components when replacing the Pushbutton. A3P A3P Specifications Ratings Contact Ratings Silver Alloy Contacts (for Standard Loads) Non-inductive load (A) Rated lt (V) voltage Resistive load NC Inductive load (A) Lamp load NO NC Inductive load NO NC Motor load NO NC 125 VAC 250 VAC 5 3 0.7 0.5 3 2 1.3 0.8 8 VDC 14 VDC 30 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC 5 5 4 0.4 0.2 2 2 2 0.05 0.03 4 4 3 0.4 0.2 3 3 3 0.05 0.03 Note: NO 1. The above values are for steady-state currents. 2. Inductive load: Power factor = 0.4; time constant = 7 ms. 3. The lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current. 4. The motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current. The above ratings conform to JIS C4505, for testing under the following conditions. (1) Ambient temperature: 20 $2_C. (2) Ambient humidity: 65 $5% (3) Operating frequency: 20 times/min. Gold Alloy Contacts (for Microloads) Rated voltage (V) 0.1 A at 30 VDC (resistive load); 0.1 A at 125 VAC (resistive load) Minimum applicable load 1 mA at 5 VDC LED and Incandescent Lamp Ratings LED for LED-lighted Models A3PJ/M2PJ Model A3PA/M2PA Rated current Applicable voltage Rated voltage Single screen 2-split screen 3-split screen 4-split screen Single screen 2-split screen 5 VDC $5% 5 VDC 80 mA 40 mA x 2 20 mA x 2 20 mA x 4 80 mA 40 mA x 2 12 VDC $5% 12 VDC 40 mA 20 mA x 2 15 mA x 2 15 mA x 4 40 mA 20 mA x 2 24 VDC $5% 24 VDC 20 mA 15 mA x 2 15 mA x 2 15 mA x 2 20 mA 13 mA x 2 LED for Chameleon Models Applied voltage pp g Rated current Rated voltage g Green Red 12 VDC $5% 12 VDC 26 mA 20 mA 24 VDC $5% 24 VDC 13 mA 10 mA Incandescent Lamp Item Applied voltage Standard lamp Rated voltage Rated current Low-power lamp Model Rated current Model 5 VDC 6V 200 mA SLL-06 100 mA SLL-06H 12 VDC 14 V 80 mA SLL-14 40 mA SLL-14H 24 VDC 28 V 40 mA SLL-28 25 mA SLL-28H LED Lamp (for LED Lamp-lighted Models) Applied voltage Rated voltage Rated current Model 5 VDC $5% 5 VDC 30 mA SLL-05Ej 12 VDC $5% 12 VDC 15 mA SLL-12Ej 24 VDC $5% 24 VDC 12.5 mA SLL-24Ej Note: Only DC LED lamps are available. 237 A3P A3P Characteristics Operating frequency Mechanical: 120 operations/minute max. (See note 1.) Electrical: 30 operations/minute max. Insulation resistance 100 M min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength g 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of same polarity (See note 2.) 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of different polarity, between current-carrying metal part and ground, and between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal part. 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between lamp terminals (See note 3.) Vibration resistance Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock resistance Destruction: 500 m/s2 Malfunction: 200 m/s2 Life expectancy Mechanical: Momentary operation models: 1,000,000 operations min. Alternate operation models: 200,000 operations min. (One operation consists of set and reset operations.) Electrical: 100,000 operations min. Weight Approx. 30 g Inrush current NC: Silver alloy contact: 10 A max. NO: Silver alloy contact: 10 A max. Ambient operating temperature LED-lighted models: -10_C to 40_C (with no icing or condensation) Incandescent lamp-lighted models: -10_C to 50_C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient operating humidity 35% to 85% Ambient storage temperature -25_C to 65_C Degree of protection IP40 Electric shock protection class Class II PTI (proof tracking index) 175 Pollution degree 3 (IEC947-5-1) Note: 1. With alternate operation models, 60 operations/minute max. One operation cycle consists of set and reset operations. 2. 600 VAC for microloads. 3. With no incandescent lamp or LED lamp mounted. Approved Standard Ratings UL508 General Use: 5A at 125 V CSA C22 No. 14 General Use: 5 A at 125 VAC, 3 A at 250 VAC Operating Characteristics A3PJ series Operating p g characteristics h t i ti Momentary operation models A3PA series Alternate operation models Momentary operation models A3PT series Alternate operation models Momentary operation models Alternate operation models OF max. 5.88 N 6.86 N 5.88 N 6.86 N 3.92 N 4.90 N RF min. 0.39 N 0.29 N 0.39 N 0.29 N 0.39 N 0.29 N TT Approx. 3.5 mm Approx. 3.5 mm Approx. 3.5 mm Approx. 3.5 mm Approx. 3.5 mm Approx. 3.5 mm PT max. 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm LTA min. --- 0.5 mm --- 0.5 mm --- 0.5 mm 238 A3P A3P Operation Terminal connections LED-lighted Models (The terminal arrangement diagram shows a 1-switch output. Connections to terminals from the lighting block are the same for 2 outputs.) Rated voltage Model A3PJ 5 VDC Single screen Bottom view + - - Terminal arrangement 2-split screen 24 VDC - + - Bottom view Top view + - - + Lighting block Top view Bottom view + - Lighting block Bottom view Top view Top view - - - Terminal arrangement Lighting block Top view Terminal arrangement Lighting block Top view + Terminal arrangement Lighting block - - + - Bottom view - 2-split screen + - Bottom view + - Top view Terminal arrangement Single screen - - - - Bottom view Top view Terminal arrangement Lighting block Bottom view - Bottom view - - - Top view - - A3PA 12 VDC Screen pattern Terminal arrangement Terminal arrangement Lighting block Bottom view - + - Lighting block Top view - - Terminal arrangement Terminal arrangement Lighting block Lighting block Incandescent Lamp-lighted/LED Lamp-lighted Models (All are shown with the OMRON logo facing down. The terminal arrangements are the same as for the LED-lighted models.) Model Silver/gold alloy contacts (1 output) Rectangular A3PJ models Bottom view Top view Square A3PA models Top view Bottom view Round A3PT models Bottom view Top view - - - - - - - - Terminal arrangement Silver/gold alloy contacts (2 outputs) Terminal arrangement Lighting block Bottom view Lighting block Bottom view Top view Top view Lighting block Bottom view Top view - - - - - - - - Terminal arrangement Silver/gold alloy contacts (3 outputs) Terminal arrangement Lighting block Top view Bottom view Terminal arrangement --- Lighting block Terminal arrangement Lighting block --- - - - - Terminal arrangement Lighting block 239 A3P A3P LED Chameleon Models (The terminal arrangement diagram shows a 1-switch output. Connections to terminals from the lighting block are the same for 2 outputs.) 24 VDC Rated voltage Rectangular A3PJ model - - + - Square A3PA model - - Terminal Arrangement and Coloring Chameleon Models Wiring g Coloring LC+ LC+ LC+ L1- L2- L1- and L2- shorted Green Red Orange Panel Cutout (If using a Switch Guard or Seal Cover, refer to the panel cutout diagrams on page 244.) A3PJ (Rectangular) Models Classification Flange mount models Individual mounting (Horizontal) Multiple mounting (Horizontal) Individual mounting (Vertical) Mounting design Panel cutout 30.50.3 250.1 Remarks Panel cutout spacing between rows of Units: 23.50.3 3 min. 320.1 32n-1.50.3 250.1 1 6 min. n 2 23.50.3 32n0.5 Mount to long mounting plate (A3PJ-3002) before use. 320.1 23.50.3 30.50.3 250.1 Multiple mounting (Vertical) 320.1 1 Mount to long mounting plate (A3PJ-3002) before use. n 2 25n0.5 Barrier mount models Individual mounting (Horizontal) 25n-1.50.3 30.50.3 36.40.3 27 23.50.3 Panel cutout spacing between rows of Units: 39 32.9n+3.50.3 Multiple mounting (Horizontal) 27 Individual mounting (Vertical) 34 1 n 2 For barrier mount models, refer to Accessories on page 234. 23.50.3 (Dotted line indicates the position of each mounting barrier.) 33n+61 Mount to long mounting plate (A3PJ-3002) before use. 6 min. 29.40.3 30.50.3 6 min. 320.1 Multiple mounting (Vertical) 34 1 2 n Mount to long mounting plate (A3PJ-3002) before use. 25.9n+3.50.3 30.50.3 26n+61 Note: 1. n: Number of Units 2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm 3. Mount the panel before mounting the Switch Guard. 4. If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating. 240 A3P A3P A3PA (Square) Models Classification Flange mount models Mounting design Individual mounting Panel cutout 23.50.3 250.1 3 min. 22.50.3 250.1 Multiple mounting 6 min. 250.1 1 23.50.3 n 2 25n0.1 Barrier mount models Individual mounting Remarks Panel cutout spacing between rows of Units: 25n-2.50.3 Panel cutout spacing between rows of Units: 23.50.3 27 27.80.3 32 (Dotted line indicates the position of each mounting barrier.) 6 min. Multiple mounting 27 1 2 n 23.50.3 26n+2.50.3 6 min. 26n+6.51 Note: 1. n: Number of Units 2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm 3. Mount the panel before mounting the Switch Guard. 4. If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating. A3PT (Round) Models 6.4 dia. R11.8 +0.2 -0 290.3 dia. 4 min. 241 A3P A3P Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. A3PJ (Rectangular) Models A3PA (Square) Models 29.90.2 OMRON logo OMRON logo 22.90.2 250.1 #110 quick connect terminal/solder terminal #110 quick connect terminal/ solder terminal 250.1 22.90.2 19.1 19.1 Separator 320.1 Separator 250.1 52 max. 52 max. A3PT (Round) Models #110 quick connect terminal/solder terminal 22.4 28.5 dia. OMRON logo 24.9 dia. 32 dia. 6.4 23.8 43.6 52 max. Accessory Mounting Dimensions D Legend Plate Rectangular Models A3PJ-5201/-5202 Square Models A3PA-5201/-5202 Extractor A3PJ-5080 Plate surface 252 Note: 242 Made from stainless steel. A3P A3P D Socket-mounting Dimensions Rectangular Models A3PJ (M2PJ) Square Models A3PA (M2PA) Wire-wrap Terminal A3PJ-4101 Wire-wrap Terminal A3PA-4101 1 x 1 Wire-wrap Terminal 1 x 1 Wire-wrap Terminal 18.50.8 18.50.8 PCB Terminal A3PJ-4102 PCB Terminal A3PA-4102 PCB Cutout (bottom view) PCB Cutout (bottom view) Nine, 1.5-dia. holes Eleven, 1.5-dia. holes Solder Terminal A3PA-4103 Solder Terminal A3PJ-4103 Terminal Hole Dimensions Note: Terminal Hole Dimensions PCB cutout dimensions show the switch mounted to the socket with the OMRON logo facing down. 243 A3P A3P D Switch and Guard Mounting Dimensions Rectangular Models A3PJN-5050 (Horizontal Mounting) A3PJN-5055 (Vertical Mounting) Square Models A3PAN-5050 (Horizontal Mounting) A3PAN-5055 (Vertical Mounting) 52 max. Spring 52 max. Spring 9.6 Card 9.6 250.1 250.1 250.1 320.1 Switch Guard (A3PJ-5050) Switch Guard (A3PJ-5050) OMRON logo OMRON logo 26.20.2 Panel Cutouts Panel Cutouts Multiple Mounting (Horizontal) Individual Mounting (Horizontal) Individual Mounting (Horizontal) Multiple Mounting (Horizontal) 22.50.3 25n-2.50.3 32n-1.50.3 30.50.3 23.50.3 23.50.3 23.50.3 23.50.3 n = Number of mountings n = Number of mountings Note: Multiple vertical mounting is not possible. Note: Multiple vertical mounting is not possible. D Seal Cover Mounting Dimensions Rectangular Models A3PJ-5060 Cover A (transparent) Cover B (black) Square Models A3PA-5060 Cover A (transparent) Cover B (black) OMRON logo Seal cover (A3PA-5060) OMRON logo Seal Cover (A3PJ-5060) 51.3 max. 51.3 max. Panel Cutouts Panel Cutouts Multiple Mounting (Horizontal) Individual Mounting (Horizontal) Individual Mounting Multiple Mounting 22.50.3 10.5 min. 9.5 min. 22.50.3 30.50.3 30.50.3 23.50.3 23.50.3 23.50.3 23.50.3 9.5 min. Note: 1. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm 2. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of $0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 244 9.5 min. A3P A3P Precautions Caution Do not apply a voltage higher than the maximum rated operating voltage between the lamp terminals, as there is a risk that the incandescent lamp or LED will be damaged, and the Pushbutton will be ejected. When replacing the incandescent lamp, first turn OFF the power supply, and then wait 10 minutes before performing replacement, as the lamp is still hot immediately after the power is turned OFF, so there is a risk of burns. Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on page 14. Correct Use Mounting Always make sure that the power is turned OFF before mounting, removing, or wiring the Switch, or performing maintenance. After wiring the Switch, make sure that there is a suitable isolation distance. Wiring Perform soldering promptly and correctly at 60 W maximum and within 3 seconds. (Dip soldering temperature 280_C max.) Wait for one minute after soldering before exerting any external force on the solder. Operating Environment Do not use in locations that are subject to dust, oil, or metal filings as these may penetrate the interior of the Switch and cause malfunction. LED (for VDC) Check the terminal polarity when wiring. The rated voltage is shown on the plate on the back of the lighting unit, so be sure to use within the voltage shown. An LED current-limiting resistor is built in, so there is no need to mount an external resistor. Using Microloads Using a standard load switch when a microload circuit is opened or closed may cause wear on the contacts. Use the switch within the operating range. (Refer to the diagram below.) Even when using microload models within the operating range shown below, if inrush current occurs when the contact is opened or closed, it may cause the contact surface to become rough, and so decrease life expectancy. Therefore, insert a contact protection circuit where necessary. The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability level of 60% ( 60) (conforming to JIS C5003). The equation, 60 = 0.5 x 10-4/time indicates that the estimated malfunction rate is less than 1/2,000,000 with a reliability level of 60%. Voltage (V) ! Microload area Standard load area Invalid area Current (mA) Others If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating. Incandescent Lamp Apply 80% of the rated voltage (operating voltage) to the incandescent lamp to improve life expectancy and incandescence. Character Plate (Character Film) If preparing the character plate separately, use a heat-resistant film with a thickness of 0.1 to 0.3 mm. 24.8 +0. -0.3 dia. 230.1 dia. 245 A3P A3P Assembly/Disassembly A3PJ/M2PJ (Rectangular Models) A3PA/M2PA (Square Models) Transparent cap Legend plate 1. Locking/Unlocking Positive Cap Lock Mechanism Unlock (Character plate) Colored plate Lock Positive cap stopper (Light baffle) 6. Mounting and Replacing LED and Incandescent Lamps If using an A3PA (square) model with one incandescent lamp, insert the lamp in the center hole. 2. Mounting Pushbutton Be sure to mount the Pushbutton with the correct orientation. Align the groove on the Pushbutton, the projections in the Switch, and the LED contact piece before pushing the Pushbutton into the Switch. When dismounting the Pushbutton, use the Extractor (A3PJ-5080) for easy dismounting. Groove OMRON logo LED contact piece Diagram shows A3PA model. 3. Removing/Mounting Cap Insert the A3PA from the open side into the theft-prevention stopper. Note: Built-in LEDs cannot be replaced. 7. LED Rated Voltage Display (LED Models Only) The LED rated voltage is shown between the built-in resistors on the back of the lighting unit. Use within a range of $ 5%. A3PJ Rated voltage display A3PA Note: 4. Mounting Colored Plate Place the colored plate on the plunger case with the dull side of the colored plate facing downward. With A3PJ split-screen models, be sure that the projections on the upper surface of the colored plate face outward. For the A3PA, make sure that the flat plate is facing upwards. Display is on the back. 8. Mounting Switch onto Panel * Individual Mounting and Barrier Mounting When mounting the Switch, push it into the panel cutout from the front of the mounting panel by holding it with the logo mark ``OMRON" facing downward. Flat plate Projection A3PA A3PJ OMRON logo * 5. Mounting Character Plate (Character Frame) and Legend Plate Mount the legend plate for the A3PJ under the layered surfaces and mount the cap, as shown below. 246 Multiple Barrier Mounting (A3PJ) When mounting a number of Switches in line on the panel, link the Switches with spacing barriers in between, attach mounting barriers at both sides of this block of Switches and, pushing in on the mounting barriers at the side, insert the Switches into the panel cutout together. A3P A3P OMRON logo 9. Mounting Barriers Mount each part by pushing it in the direction of the arrow shown in the corresponding illustration below. Barrier mounting 10.Mounting Seal Cover After mounting the seal cover onto the flange of the Switch, push the Switch into the panel cutout. 11. Inscribing the Legend Plate * * Inscribe the legend plate to a depth of 0.5 mm max. The legend plate is made from polycarbonate resin. To coat the legend plate, use an alcohol-based coating such as melamine, phthalic acid, or acrylic. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A135-E1-02 247 Indicators M2P Large Rectangular-bodied Indicators Good illumination with even surface brightness. Three-color models (green, orange, red; chameleon lighting) included in lineup. UL and CSA approved. RC Ordering Information Model Number Legend The model numbers used to order sets of Units are illustrated below. One set comprises the Display, Lamp, and Socket. (4) (1) (2) (3) (5) 24E R Single screen Upper Lower M 2 P J - 90 A 1 1 - 24E RW (1) Shape of Display Symbol Shape J Rectangular A Square T Round (3) Case Color (2) Screen Pattern Illumination-only models Symbol Screen pattern Single screen Symbol The available rectangular models are shown below. Select from among the individual products shown on page 257. Vertical 2-split screen models 1 4-split screen models Color 1 Black 2 Light gray Note: M2PT model is available in light gray only. Horizontal 2-split screen Upper W (White) Lower R (Red) (4) Lighting Method (5) Color of Display LED-lighted Models (M2PJ For LED and M2PA Only) Symbol Color Symbol Rated voltage R Red 05E 5 VDC 12E 12 VDC 24E 24 VDC 2-split screen 2 G Horizontal 3-split screen models Vertical 3-split screen models Chameleon (see note 1, 2) The above diagrams show the Sockets with the " " mark facing down. Note: 1. The chameleon screen pattern is not available with M2PT models. 2. The chameleon screen pattern is only available with 12 or 24-VDC models. 3. With chameleon models, the whole screen lights red, green, or orange. When not lit, the display is white. Colored-illumination models up to the 4-split screen models are available as individual Units. Refer to page 255. "Colored-illumination" models operate in the way shown below: Unlit Lit White Color The built-in LED is colored. 248 O Orange G Green W White K Chameleon LED Lamp-lighted Models The chameleon screen (M2PT Only) pattern is not available Symbol Rated voltage with M2PT models. 05C 5 VDC The chameleon screen pattern is only available 12C 12 VDC with 12 or 24-VDC models. 24C 24 VDC For Incandescent Lamp M2PJ and M2PA can also be Symbol Color ordered separately. Refer to page 257 for details. No symbol Red, Incandescent Lamplighted Models Symbol Rated voltage 06 6 VAC/VDC 14 14 VAC/VDC 28 28 VAC/VDC orange, white, blue, green Includes colored plate. Refer to page 258 for details. M2P M2P Number of Built-in LED Lamps Screen pattern Single screen A3PJ Number of Built-in Incandescent Lamps A3PA Built-in LED models Horizontal 2-split screen Vertical 2-split screen Horizontal 3-split screen Vertical 3-split screen 4 (S note.) t ) (See A3PT A3PJ Screen pattern A3PA A3PT 2 Single screen 2 1 2 4 (L (Low-power incandescent lamp) 2 2 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2 Horizontal 2-split screen --- --- Vertical 2-split screen --- --- Horizontal 3-split screen --- --- Vertical 3-split screen 4-split screen ----4-split screen Note: These split screen models are available only as individual Units. They cannot be ordered as sets. List of Models Model Appearance M2PJ (Rectangular) M2PA (Square) 52 max. 52 max. M2PT (Round) 52 max. 6.7 32 dia. 249 M2P M2P Construction Lighting method LED-lighted models (LED is built-in.) M2PA LED lamp-lighted models (LED is not built-in.) Models M2PJ Screen pattern Single screen Single screen Single screen Vertical 3-split screen Single screen Horizontal 2-split screen Horizontal 2-split screen Horizontal 2-split screen Horizontal 3-split screen Horizontal 2-split screen Chameleon (3-color) Chameleon (3-color) Vertical 2-split screen 4-split screen LED-lighted models LED-lighted models M2PJ M2PA Incandescent lamp-lighted models (Incandescent lamp is not built-in.) M2PT M2PJ Single screen M2PA Single screen Vertical 3-split screen Horizontal 2-split screen Horizontal 3-split Horizontal 2-split screen screen Vertical 2-split screen Single screen 4-split screen Incandescent lamp-lighted models LED lamp-lighted models Chameleon models (full screen illumination in one of three colors) Cap (transparent) Cap (transparent) Legend plate (transparent) Legend plate (transparent) Colored plate Colored plate LED Unit Cap (transparent) Display LED Unit 3-color emitter Legend plate (transparent) (See note.) (Split-screen models contain light baffles.) Display Colors: Colored plate * Lamp holder lamp-lighted models White, Red, Green, Orange Incandescent lamp-lighted models White, Red, Green, Blue, Orange Built-in LED LED-lighted and LED * Note: Incandescent lamp-lighted M2PT models do not contain legend plates. Lamp Case Color Select either black or light gray to suit your panel design. (The round M2PT models are available in light gray only.) Note: The above diagram for LED lamp-lighted and incandescent lamp-lighted models shows the M2PJ model. 250 M2PT Single screen Socket M2P M2P M2P Lighting Method Diagram Ordering Information Single screen models Horizontal 2-split screen models As a set: See page 252. Individually: See page 256. LED-lighted models LED models Single screen models LED lamp-lighted models M2PJ (rectangular) Horizontal 2-split screen models Horizontal 3-split screen models Vertical 3-split screen models Vertical 2-split screen models 4-split screen models Single screen models Chameleon models Incandescent lamplighted models As a set: See page 252. Individually: See page 256. (Full screen illumination in one of three colors) Single screen models Vertical 3-split screen models* Horizontal 2-split screen models Horizontal 3-split screen models* Single screen models Horizontal 2-split screen models Single screen models Horizontal 2-split screen models LED-lighted models Individually: See page 256. (Not available as a set.) Vertical 2-split screen models* 4-split screen models* As a set: See page 252. Individually: See page 256. *Models indicated with an asterisk are only available individually. As a set: See page 252. Individually: See page 256. LED models LED lamp-lighted models Individually: See page 256. (Not available as a set.) M2PA (square) Single screen models As a set: See page 252. Individually: See page 256. Chameleon models Single screen models Incandescent lamplighted models Single screen models LED models LED lamp-lighted models M2PT (round) Single screen models Incandescent lamplighted models Horizontal 2-split screen models As a set: See page 252. Individually: See page 256. As a set: See page 252. Individually: See page 256. As a set: See page 252. Individually: See page 256. 251 M2P M2P Ordering as a Set The model numbers used to order sets of Units are given in the following tables. One set comprises the Display, Lamp, and Socket. M2PJ (Rectangular) Single Screen Models (1) Case color Black Light gray Display color symbol Lighting method LED Chameleon Incandescent lamp p 5 VDC M2PJ-90A11-05E(1) M2PJ-90A12-05E(1) 12 VDC M2PJ-90A11-12E(1) M2PJ-90A12-12E(1) 24 VDC M2PJ-90A11-24E(1) M2PJ-90A12-24E(1) R O G W 12 VDC M2PJ-90AG1-12EK M2PJ-90AG2-12EK ((See note 1.)) 24 VDC M2PJ-90AG1-24EK M2PJ-90AG2-24EK 6 VDC/VAC M2PJ-90A11-06 M2PJ-90A12-06 14 VDC/VAC M2PJ-90A11-14 M2PJ-90A12-14 28 VDC/VAC M2PJ-90A11-28 M2PJ-90A12-28 ((See note 2.)) Enter the desired color symbol for the Display in (1). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White. Example: Red Note: MPJ-90A11-24E R 1. You can change the screen colors of chameleon models between red, green, and orange by changing the terminal wiring. Refer to page 260 for details. 2. Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and transparent). Use the appropriate combination. M2PJ (Rectangular) Horizontal 2-split Screen Models (1) (2) Black Case color Light gray Display color symbol Lighting method LED 24 VDC M2PJ-90A21-24E(1)(2) M2PJ-90A22-24E(1)(2) R O G W Incandescent lamp p 6 VDC/VAC M2PJ-90A21-06 M2PJ-90A22-06 ((See note.)) 14 VDC/VAC M2PJ-90A21-14 M2PJ-90A22-14 28 VDC/VAC M2PJ-90A21-28 M2PJ-90A22-28 Enter the desired color symbols for the Display in (1) and (2). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White. Example: Note: 252 Red Upper White Lower M2PJ-90A21-24E R W Red White Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and transparent). Use the appropriate combination. M2P M2P M2PA (Square) Single Screen Models (1) Black Case color Light gray Display color symbol Lighting method LED Chameleon Incandescent lamp p 5 VDC M2PA-90A11-05E(1) M2PA-90A12-05E(1) 12 VDC M2PA-90A11-12E(1) M2PA-90A12-12E(1) 24 VDC M2PA-90A11-24E(1) M2PA-90A12-24E(1) R O G W 12 VDC M2PA-90AG1-12EK M2PA-90AG2-12EK ((See note 1.)) 24 VDC M2PA-90AG1-24EK M2PA-90AG2-24EK 6 VDC/VAC M2PA-90A11-06 M2PA-90A12-06 14 VDC/VAC M2PA-90A11-14 M2PA-90A12-14 28 VDC/VAC M2PA-90A11-28 M2PA-90A12-28 ((See note 2.)) Enter the desired color symbol for the Display in (1). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White. Example: Red Note: M2PA-90A11-24E R 1. You can change the screen colors of chameleon models between red, green, and orange, by changing the terminal wiring. Refer to page 260 for details. 2. Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and transparent). Use the appropriate combination. M2PA (Square) Horizontal 2-split Screen Models (1) (2) Case color Black Light gray Display color symbol Lighting method LED 24 VDC M2PA-90A21-24E(1)(2) M2PA-90A22-24E(1)(2) R O G W Incandescent lamp p 6 VDC/VAC M2PA-90A21-06 M2PA-90A22-06 ((See note.)) 14 VDC/VAC M2PA-90A21-14 M2PA-90A22-14 28 VDC/VAC M2PA-90A21-28 M2PA-90A22-28 Enter the desired color symbols for the Display in (1) and (2). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White. Example: Note: Red Upper White Lower M2PA-90A21-24E R W Red White Incandescent lamps are supplied with colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange) and legend plates (milk-white and transparent). Use the appropriate combination. 253 M2P M2P M2PT (Round) Single Screen Models (1) Case color Light gray Display color symbol Lighting method LED Incandescent lamp p 5 VDC M2PT-90A12-05C(1) 12 VDC M2PT-90A12-12C(1) 24 VDC M2PT-90A12-24C(1) R O G W 6 VDC/VAC M2PT-90A12-06 ((See note.)) 14 VDC/VAC M2PT-90A12-14 28 VDC/VAC M2PT-90A12-28 Enter the desired color symbol for the Display in (1). (R) = Red, (O) = Orange, (G) = Green, (W) = White. Example: M2PT-90A12-24C R Red Note: 254 Incandescent lamps are supplied with a colored plates (white, red, green, blue, and orange). Use the appropriate combination. Models A3PT and M2PT (round models), however, are not supplied with legend plates. M2P M2P Illumination-only and Colored-illumination LED Models * "Illumination only" describes LED models for which the screen color is the same whether the LED is lit or not. The screen simply becomes brighter when the LED lights. Example: Red LED Not lit Cap (transparent) Red Legend plate (transparent) Display Lit Colored plate (red) Red Lamp holder LED lamp (red) * Lamp "Colored illumination" describes LED models for which the screen color is white when the LED is not lit and changes to the color of the LED lamp when the LED is lit. Example: Red LED Not lit Cap (transparent) White Legend plate (transparent) Lit Display Colored plate (white) Red Lamp holder LED lamp (red) Lamp Ordering: For a colored-illumination Indicator, order the Display, Lamp, and Socket as shown in the following table. Display Select the LED lamp-lighted model required from the selection on page 257. Each assembly includes the number of white colored plates required to enable colored illumination for the corresponding screen-split configuration. For example, 4-split screen models includes 4 white colored plates. Lamp Select the LED lamps to suit your desired coloration from the selection on page 258. Socket Select from the Sockets on page 259. Number of necessary LED lamps (standard): M2PJ (rectangular): 4 M2PA (square): 2 M2PT (round): 2 255 M2P M2P Ordering Individually Displays, Lamps, and Sockets can be ordered separately. Combinations that are not available as sets can be created using individual Units. Also, store the parts as spares for maintenance and repairs. LED-lighted/Chameleon Models (LED is built into the Display.) LED Lamp-lighted Models (LED lamp and Display are separate.) Incandescent Lamp-lighted Models (Incandescent lamp and Display are separate.) Display Display Round (M2PT) models not available. M2Pj-5jjj-jjE (for Indicator) Display M2Pj-502j (for Indicator) M2Pj-501j (for Indicator) Lamp (Incandescent Lamp) (See note 3.) Lamp (LED Lamp) (See note 2.) Standard lamp: SLL-jj Low-power lamp: SLL-jjH SLL-jjEj Socket Socket (See note 1.) M2Pj-7jjj-j (for Indicator) M2Pj-7jjj-j (for Indicator) Note: Socket M2Pj-7jjj-j (for Indicator) 1. The Socket is compatible with LED-lighted, LED lamp-lighted, and incandescent lamp-lighted models. 3. Number of necessary incandescent lamps. 2. Number of necessary LED lamps. M2PJ Screen pattern Single screen 4 M2PA M2PT M2PJ Screen pattern M2PA M2PT 2 2 Single screen 2 1 2 Horizontal 2-split screen 2 2 Horizontal 2-split screen 2 --- --- Vertical 2-split screen --- --- Vertical 3-split screen Horizontal 3-split screen --- --- Vertical 3-split screen Horizontal 3-split screen 4 (l (low-power incandescent lamp) 2 Vertical 2-split screen --- --- 4-split screen --- --- 4-split screen --- --- 256 M2P M2P Display LED-lighted Models (LED is built-in.) Appearance Split-screen color (color symbol) White (W) Red (R) Green (G) Orange (O) M2PJ-5701-jjE M2PJ-5702-jjE M2PJ-5703-jjE M2PJ-5706-jjE White M2PJ-5711-jjE M2PJ-5712-jjE M2PJ-5713-jjE M2PJ-5716-jjE Red M2PJ-5721-jjE M2PJ-5722-jjE M2PJ-5723-jjE M2PJ-5726-jjE Green M2PJ-5731-jjE M2PJ-5732-jjE M2PJ-5733-jjE M2PJ-5736-jjE Orange M2PJ-5741-jjE M2PJ-5742-jjE M2PJ-5743-jjE M2PJ-5746-jjE M2PA-5701-jjE M2PA-5702-jjE M2PA-5703-jjE M2PA-5706-jjE M2PA-5711-jjE M2PA-5712-jjE M2PA-5713-jjE M2PA-5716-jjE M2PA-5721-jjE M2PA-5722-jjE M2PA-5723-jjE M2PA-5726-jjE M2PA-5731-jjE M2PA-5732-jjE M2PA-5733-jjE M2PA-5736-jjE M2PA-5741-jjE M2PA-5742-jjE M2PA-5743-jjE M2PA-5746-jjE Single screen R t l Rectangular models Horizontal 2 split 2-split screen Single screen Horizontal 2-split screen Square models White Red Green Orange Note: Enter the voltage to be used in the j j at the d off th d l end the model number. Examples of voltage used: 5V= 0 5E 12 V = 1 2 E 24 V = 2 4 E For the color of the shaded part, select the model according to the colors given at the top of the table. 1. A cap, legend plate (transparent), colored plate, white plunger case, and LED (with a current-limiting resistor) are built into the standard lighting unit. 2. Split-screen coloring configurations are given with the LED Lamp-lighted Models (LED is not built-in.) Model Rectangular models Screen pattern Screen mark on the Sockets facing down. Square models Model Screen Round models Model Screen Single screen M2PJ-5021 M2PA-5021 Horizontal 2-split screen M2PJ-5022 M2PA-5022 Vertical 2-split screen M2PJ-5023 --- --- Horizontal 3-split screen M2PJ-5024 --- --- Vertical 3-split screen M2PJ-5025 --- --- 4-split screen M2PJ-5026 --- --- Note: Selection precautions Model M2PT-5021 --- 1. Colored plates (white, red, green, and orange), a legend plate (transparent), and a light baffle (split-screen models only) are included. Use the appropriate combination for the LED coloring required. 2. The number of white colored plates required to enable colored illumination for the corresponding screen-split configuration is included. (For example, 4-split screen models include 4 white colored plates). The number of colored plates included for each model are shown in the following table. Screen pattern White Red Green Orange Single screen 1 1 1 1 Horizontal 2-split screen Vertical 2-split screen 2 1 1 1 Horizontal 3-split screen Vertical 3-split screen 3 2 2 2 4-split screen 4 1 1 1 257 M2P M2P Display Incandescent Lamp-lighted Models (Incandescent lamp is not built-in.) Rectangular models Model Screen pattern Screen Square models Model Screen Round models Model Screen Single screen M2PJ-5011 M2PA-5011 Horizontal 2-split screen M2PJ-5012 M2PA-5012 Vertical 2-split screen M2PJ-5013 --- --- Horizontal 3-split screen M2PJ-5014 --- --- Vertical 3-split screen M2PJ-5015 --- --- 4-split screen M2PJ-5016 --- --- Note: Model M2PT-5011 --- 1. Colored plates (white, red, green, orange, and blue), a legend plate (transparent), and a light baffle (split-screen models only) are supplied. 2. M2PT (round) models do not contain a legend plate. 3. The number of colored plates supplied is shown in the following table. White Screen pattern Red Green Orange Blue Single screen 1 1 1 1 1 Horizontal 2-split screen Vertical 2-split screen 1 1 1 1 1 Horizontal 3-split screen Vertical 3-split screen 2 2 2 2 2 4-split screen 2 2 2 2 2 Chameleon Models (with Built-in LED) Shape Rectangular Square Note: Rated voltage Chameleon indicator 12 VDC M2PJ-5800-12E 24 VDC M2PJ-5800-24E 12 VDC M2PA-5800-12E 24 VDC M2PA-5800-24E 1. With the chameleon models, the whole screen lights red, green, or orange (i.e., red and green simultaneously). 2. A cap, legend plate (transparent), white colored plate, and LED (with a current-limiting resistor) are built into the Display. Lamp (For mounting, refer to page 246.) LED Lamp Voltage Color 5 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC Model (DC only) Model (DC only) Model (DC only) Applicable cap pp p ((color)) ( l d plate) l t ) (colored Red SLL-05ER SLL-12ER SLL-24ER Red Yellow SLL-05EY SLL-12EY SLL-24EY Orange Green SLL-05EG SLL-12EG SLL-24EG Green White SLL-05EW SLL-12EW SLL-24EW White 258 Selection ti precautions In the standard setup, 4 LED lamps are used with M2PJ models and 2 LED lamps are used with M2PA and d M2PT models. M2P M2P Incandescent Lamp Lamp type Standard lamp p Low-voltage g lamp p Selection p precautions Voltage 5 VAC/VDC SLL-06 SLL-06H 12 VAC/VDC SLL-14 SLL-14H 24 VAC/VDC SLL-28 SLL-28H In the standard setup for M2PJ models, 2 lamps are used with single screen models, and 4 lamps are used with split-screen models. If 3 or 4 lamps p p are lit continuously, ti l use low-power l lamps. l In the standard setup for M2PA models, 1 lamp is used with single g screen models,, and 2 lamps p are used d with ith split-screen lit models. d l In the standard setup for M2PT models, 2 lamps are used. Socket (common to both incandescent lamp-lighted and LED-lighted models) Rectangular M2PJ-7010-1 Square M2PA-7010-1 Round M2PT-7010-2 Selection precautions The end digit denotes the color of the flange: -1 denotes a black flange, and -2 denotes a light gray flange. Round switches are available only in light gray, and not in black. Accessories Accessories are the same as those for the A3P Lighted Pushbutton Switches. Refer to page 234. LED and Incandescent Lamp Ratings and Characteristics Ratings and characteristics the same as those for the A3P Lighted Pushbutton Switches. Refer to page 237. 259 M2P M2P Operation Terminal connections LED-lighted Models Rated voltage Model M2PJ 5 VDC 12 VDC Single screen Bottom view - Top view Bottom view - - - - + Terminal arrangement 2-split screen - - Terminal arrangement Lighting block Bottom view + - - Bottom view Top view Bottom view + - Lighting block Bottom view Terminal arrangement Lighting block Top view - Top view Lighting block Bottom view + - Top view - - Terminal arrangement Lighting block Bottom view Top view - + - Terminal arrangement Top view + Terminal arrangement - + + - - Lighting block 2-split screen - Top view Terminal arrangement + - - - Single screen Lighting block Bottom view - Bottom view Top view - - M2PA 24 VDC Screen pattern + - Terminal arrangement Lighting block Top view - - - Terminal arrangement Terminal arrangement Lighting block Lighting block Incandescent Lamp-lighted/LED Lamp-lighted Models (All are shown with the OMRON logo facing down. The terminal arrangements are the same as for the LED-lighted models.) Rectangular M2PJ models Model Bottom view Indicator - Top view - - Rated voltage 24 VDC Model Lighting block Terminal arrangement Top view - - Lighting block Terminal arrangement Lighting block Chameleon Models Wiring g Rectangular M2PJ model LC+ LC+ LC+ L1- L2- L1- and L2- shorted Green Red Orange - - - Coloring - - - 260 Round M2PT models Bottom view Terminal Arrangement and Coloring LED Chameleon Models Square M2PA model Top view - - - Terminal arrangement Square M2PA models Bottom view M2P M2P Panel Cutout (If using a Switch Guard or Seal Cover, refer to the panel cutout diagrams.) M2PJ (Rectangular) Models Classification Flange mount models Mounting design Individual mounting (Horizontal) Multiple mounting (Horizontal) Individual mounting (Vertical) Panel cutout Remarks Panel cutout spacing between rows of Units: 30.50.3 250.1 23.50.3 3 min. 320.1 32n-1.50.3 250.1 1 6 min. n 2 23.50.3 32n0.5 23.50.3 Mount to long mounting plate (A3PJ-3002) before use. 320.1 30.50.3 250.1 Multiple mounting (Vertical) 320.1 1 Mount to long mounting plate (A3PJ-3002) before use. n 2 25n0.5 Barrier mount models Individual mounting (Horizontal) 25n-1.50.3 30.50.3 For barrier mount models, refer to Accessories on page 234. 36.40.3 27 23.50.3 Panel cutout spacing between rows of Units: 39 32.9n+3.50.3 Multiple mounting (Horizontal) 27 Individual mounting (Vertical) 34 1 n 2 23.50.3 (Dotted line indicates the position of each mounting barrier.) 33n+61 6 min. 29.40.3 Mount to long mounting plate (A3PJ-3002) before use. 30.50.3 6 min. 320.1 Multiple mounting (Vertical) 34 1 Mount to long mounting plate (A3PJ-3002) before use. n 2 25.9n+3.50.3 30.50.3 26n+61 Note: 1. n: Number of Units 2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm 3. Mount the panel before mounting the Switch Guard. 4. If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating. M2PA (Square) Models Classification Flange mount models Individual mounting Mounting design Panel cutout 23.50.3 250.1 3 min. 22.50.3 250.1 Multiple mounting 6 min. 250.1 1 23.50.3 n 2 25n0.1 Barrier mount models Individual mounting Remarks Panel cutout spacing between rows of Units: 25n-2.50.3 Panel cutout spacing between rows of Units: 23.50.3 27 27.80.3 32 (Dotted line indicates the position of each mounting barrier.) 6 min. Multiple mounting 27 1 2 n 23.50.3 26n+2.50.3 6 min. 26n+6.51 Note: 1. n: Number of Units 2. Recommended panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm 3. If the panel is to be finished (e.g., coated), make sure that the panel meets the specified dimensions after the coating. 261 M2P M2P M2PT (Round) Models 6.4 dia. R11.8 +0.2 -0 290.3 dia. 4 min. Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. M2PJ (Rectangular) Models M2PA (Square) Models 22 29.90.2 26.1 2.8 OMRON logo OMRON logo #110 quick connect terminal /soldered terminal #110 quick connect terminal /soldered terminal 0.5 250.1 22.90.2 18.9 19.1 250.1 6.7 320.1 43.6 250.1 52 max. M2PT (Round) Models 19.1 22.90.2 6.7 43.6 52 max. #110 quick connect terminal/soldered terminal 22.4 28.5 dia. OMRON logo 32 dia. 23.8 24.9 dia. 6.4 43.6 52 max. Accessory Mounting Dimensions Dimensions for mounting accessories are the same as those for the A3P Lighted Pushbutton Switches. Refer to page 242. Precautions Correct Use Refer to the Common Precautions for Pushbutton Switches on page 14. Refer to Correct Use for A3P on page 245. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. Cat. No. A137-E1-02 262 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC 1 Commerce Drive Schaumburg, IL 60173 847.843.7900 For US technical support or other inquiries: 800.556.6766 OMRON CANADA, INC. 885 Milner Avenue Toronto, Ontario M1B 5V8 416.286.6465 OMRON ON-LINE Global - www.omron.com USA - www.omron247.com Canada - www.omron.ca Brazil - www.omron.com.br Latin America - www.espanol.omron.com UNITED STATES To locate a Regional Sales Office, local Distributor or to obtain product information, call: 847.843.7900 MEXICO SALES OFFICES Mexico, D.F. Ciudad Juarez Monterrey, N.L Queretaro 555.660.3144 656.623.7083 818.377.4281 442.135.4510 BRAZIL SALES OFFICE Sao Paulo 55.11.2101.6310 ARGENTINA SALES OFFICE Cono Sur 54.114.787.1129 OTHER LATIN AMERICAN SALES mela@omron.com X032-E1-08 (c)2007 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC Printed in the U.S.A. Specifications subject to change without notice. Mouser Electronics Authorized Distributor Click to View Pricing, Inventory, Delivery & Lifecycle Information: Omron: M2PA-5702-24E M2PA-5706-05E M2PA-5711-24E M2PA-7010-1 M2PA-90A12-24EG M2PA-90A12-24EW M2PJ5011 M2PJ-5012 M2PJ-5021 M2PJ-5022 M2PJ-5701-24E M2PJ-5702-24E M2PJ-5703-24E M2PJ-5706-24E M2PJ-5722-24E M2PJ-5723-24E M2PJ-5726-24E M2PJ-5736-24E M2PJ-7010-1 M2PJ-7010-2 M2PJ-90A11-24EG M2PJ-90A11-24EO M2PJ-90A11-24ER M2PJ-90A11-24EW M2PJ-90A21-24EWW M2PA-5011 M2PA-5706-24E M2DA-500GY M2DT-500Y M2DJ-500R M2DT-500GY M2DT-500R M2DT-7002 M2DJ-500GY M2DA-500Y M2DA500R M2DA-7001 M2DJ-7001 M2DT-7001 M2DJ-500Y